2009 Malibu

2009 Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual M
Seats and Restraint System ............................. 1-1 Driving Your Vehicle ....................................... 4-1
Head Restraints ......................................... 1-2 Your Driving, the Road, and the Vehicle ....... 4-2
Front Seats ............................................... 1-3 Towing ................................................... 4-26
Rear Seats .............................................. 1-10 Service and Appearance Care .......................... 5-1
Safety Belts ............................................. 1-12 Service ..................................................... 5-3
Child Restraints ....................................... 1-32 Fuel ......................................................... 5-5
Airbag System ......................................... 1-58 Checking Things Under the Hood ............... 5-14
Restraint System Check ............................ 1-73 Headlamp Aiming ..................................... 5-47
Features and Controls ..................................... 2-1 Bulb Replacement .................................... 5-47
Keys ........................................................ 2-3 Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ......... 5-50
Doors and Locks ...................................... 2-10 Tires ...................................................... 5-51
Windows ................................................. 2-15 Appearance Care ..................................... 5-90
Theft-Deterrent Systems ............................ 2-18 Vehicle Identification ................................. 5-97
Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ........... 2-21 Electrical System ...................................... 5-98
Mirrors .................................................... 2-37 Capacities and Specifications ................... 5-108
OnStar® System ...................................... 2-40 Maintenance Schedule ..................................... 6-1
Universal Home Remote System ................ 2-43 Maintenance Schedule ................................ 6-2
Storage Areas ......................................... 2-50
Customer Assistance Information .................... 7-1
Sunroof .................................................. 2-51 Customer Assistance and Information ........... 7-2
Instrument Panel ............................................. 3-1 Reporting Safety Defects ........................... 7-15
Instrument Panel Overview .......................... 3-4 Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy ........... 7-17
Climate Controls ...................................... 3-20
Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators ........ 3-28 Index ................................................................ 1
Driver Information Center (DIC) .................. 3-43
Audio System(s) ....................................... 3-56
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Canadian Owners
A French language copy of this manual can be obtained
from your dealer/retailer or from:
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
1-800-551-4123
GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GM Emblem, www.helminc.com
CHEVROLET, the CHEVROLET Emblem, the MALIBU
Emblem, and the name MALIBU are registered Propriétaires Canadiens
trademarks of General Motors Corporation. On peut obtenir un exemplaire de ce guide en français
This manual includes the latest information at the time it auprès de concessionnaire ou à l’adresse suivante:
was printed. GM reserves the right to make changes Helm, Incorporated
after that time without further notice. For vehicles P.O. Box 07130
first sold in Canada, substitute the name “General Detroit, MI 48207
Motors of Canada Limited” for Chevrolet Motor Division
1-800-551-4123
wherever it appears in this manual. www.helminc.com
This manual describes features that may or may not be
on your specific vehicle. Index
Read this manual from beginning to end to learn about
the vehicle’s features and controls. Pictures, symbols, To quickly locate information about the vehicle, use the
and words work together to explain vehicle operation. index in the back of the manual. It is an alphabetical list of
what is in the manual and the page number where it can
Keep this manual in the vehicle for quick reference. be found.
Litho in U.S.A.
©
Part No. 15898474 B Second Printing 2008 General Motors Corporation. All Rights Reserved.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
ii
Safety Warnings and Symbols A notice tells about something that can damage the
vehicle.
A circle with a slash Notice: These mean there is something that could
through it is a safety damage your vehicle.
symbol which means
“Do Not,” “Do not do this,” Many times, this damage would not be covered by the
or “Do not let this happen.” vehicle’s warranty, and it could be costly. The notice
tells what to do to help avoid the damage.
There are also warning labels on the vehicle which use
the same words, CAUTION or Notice.
A box with the word CAUTION is used to tell about
things that could hurt you or others if you were to ignore Vehicle Symbols
the warning.
The vehicle has components and labels that use symbols
instead of text. Symbols are shown along with the text
describing the operation or information relating to a
{ CAUTION: specific component, control, message, gage, or indicator.
These mean there is something that could hurt M: This symbol is shown when you need to see your
you or other people. owner manual for additional instructions or information.
*: This symbol is shown when you need to see a

Cautions tell what the hazard is and what to do to avoid service manual for additional instructions or information.
or reduce the hazard. Read these cautions.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
iii
Vehicle Symbol Chart .: Fuel Gage
Here are some additional symbols that may be found on
the vehicle and what they mean. For more information +: Fuses
on the symbol, refer to the index.
i: Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
9: Airbag Readiness Light
j: LATCH System Child Restraints
#: Air Conditioning
*: Malfunction Indicator Lamp
!: Antilock Brake System (ABS)
:: Oil Pressure
g: Audio Steering Wheel Controls or OnStar®
}: Power
$: Brake System Warning Light
/: Remote Vehicle Start
": Charging System
>: Safety Belt Reminders
I: Cruise Control
7: Tire Pressure Monitor
B: Engine Coolant Temperature
F: Traction Control
O: Exterior Lamps
M: Windshield Washer Fluid
#: Fog Lamps
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
iv
Section 1 Seats and Restraint System
Head Restraints ...............................................1-2 Where to Put the Restraint .............................1-42
Front Seats ......................................................1-3 Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children
Manual Seats ................................................1-3 (LATCH) ..................................................1-44
Power Seats ..................................................1-4 Securing a Child Restraint in a
Manual Lumbar ..............................................1-4 Rear Seat Position ....................................1-52
Heated Seats .................................................1-5 Securing a Child Restraint in the
Reclining Seatbacks ........................................1-6 Right Front Seat Position ............................1-54
Seatback Latches ...........................................1-8 Airbag System ...............................................1-58
Power Lift Seat ..............................................1-9 Where Are the Airbags? ................................1-60
Rear Seats .....................................................1-10 When Should an Airbag Inflate? .....................1-63
Split Folding Rear Seat .................................1-10 What Makes an Airbag Inflate? .......................1-64
How Does an Airbag Restrain? .......................1-64
Safety Belts ...................................................1-12 What Will You See After an Airbag Inflates? .....1-64
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone ................1-12 Passenger Sensing System ............................1-66
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly .................1-17 Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ...........1-71
Lap-Shoulder Belt .........................................1-26 Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ..................1-31 Vehicle ....................................................1-72
Safety Belt Extender .....................................1-32
Restraint System Check ..................................1-73
Child Restraints .............................................1-32 Checking the Restraint Systems ......................1-73
Older Children ..............................................1-32 Replacing Restraint System Parts
Infants and Young Children ............................1-35 After a Crash ............................................1-74
Child Restraint Systems .................................1-39
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
1-1
Head Restraints
The vehicle’s front seats have adjustable head restraints
in the outboard seating positions.
{ CAUTION:
With head restraints that are not installed and
adjusted properly, there is a greater chance that
occupants will suffer a neck/spinal injury in a
crash. Do not drive until the head restraints for all
occupants are installed and adjusted properly.
Adjust the head restraint so that the top of the restraint is

at the same height as the top of the occupant’s head.
This position reduces the chance of a neck injury in
a crash.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
1-2
Pull the head restraint up to
raise it. To lower the head CAUTION: (Continued)
restraint, press the button,
located on the top of the
confuse you, or make you push a pedal when you
seatback, and push the
restraint down. do not want to. Adjust the driver’s seat only when
the vehicle is not moving.
If the vehicle has a manual seat, it can be moved

forward or rearward.
1. Lift the bar to unlock
Push down on the head restraint after the button is the seat.
released to make sure that it is locked in place. 2. Slide the seat to the
The head restraints are not designed to be removed. desired position and
release the bar.
Front Seats
Manual Seats
{ CAUTION:
Try to move the seat with your body to be sure the seat
You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to is locked in place.
adjust a manual driver’s seat while the vehicle is
moving. The sudden movement could startle and
CAUTION: (Continued)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
1-3
Power Seats Manual Lumbar
On vehicles with this
feature, the handle is
located on the outboard
side of the seat.
Move the handle up or down repeatedly to decrease or

If the vehicle has power seats, the controls used to increase lumbar support.
operate them are located on the outboard side of
the seats.
To adjust the seat:
• Move the seat forward or rearward by sliding the
control forward or rearward.
• Raise or lower the front part of the seat cushion by
moving the front of the control up or down.
• Raise or lower the rear part of the seat cushion by
moving the rear of the control up or down.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
1-4
Heated Seats Press the top of the switch again to go to the low heat
setting. The indicator light will be lit next to the number 1.
On vehicles with heated Press the bottom of the switch to turn the feature off.
front seats, the buttons are
located on the outboard The heated seat feature will turn off when the ignition is
side of the driver’s and front turned off.
passenger seats.
Press the top of the switch to turn the feature on.

The seat will heat to the high setting. The indicator light
above the switch will be lit next to the number 2.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
1-5
Reclining Seatbacks On seats with manual reclining seatbacks, the lever
used to operate them is located on the outboard side
Manual Reclining Seatbacks of the seat.
{ CAUTION:
You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to
do not want to. Adjust the driver’s seat only when
{ CAUTION:
To recline the seatback:
If either seatback is not locked, it could move 1. Lift the recline lever.
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always 2. Move the seatback to the desired position, then
release the lever to lock the seatback in place.
push and pull on the seatbacks to be sure they
are locked. 3. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is
locked.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
1-6
To return the seatback to an upright position:
1. Lift the lever fully without applying pressure to the CAUTION: (Continued)
seatback and the seatback returns to the upright
position. For proper protection when the vehicle is in
2. Release the lever to lock the seatback. motion, have the seatback upright. Then sit well
3. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is back in the seat and wear your safety belt
locked. properly.
{ CAUTION:
Sitting in a reclined position when your vehicle is
in motion can be dangerous. Even if you buckle
up, your safety belts cannot do their job when you
are reclined like this.
The shoulder belt cannot do its job. In a crash,
you could go into it, receiving neck or other
injuries.
The lap belt cannot do its job either. In a crash the
belt could go up over your abdomen. The belt
forces would be there, not at your pelvic bones.
This could cause serious internal injuries.
Do not have a seatback reclined if the vehicle is

moving.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
1-7
Seatback Latches
{ CAUTION:
You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to
do not want to. Adjust the driver’s seat only when
If your vehicle is a coupe or retractable hardtop model,

it has a seatback latch as part of the manual recline
lever. This feature provides easy access to the
rear seats. To operate the seatback latch, pull up on the
manual recline lever. The seatback will automatically
spring forward. To operate the latch from the rear seat,
pull back on the top of the manual recline lever.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
1-8
Power Lift Seat
{ CAUTION:
If either seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
push and pull on the seatbacks to be sure they
are locked.
Lift the seatback up to return it to the upright position.

Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is locked.
To adjust a power lift seat, press the top or bottom of

the power lift seat switch to raise or lower the seat.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
1-9
Rear Seats
Split Folding Rear Seat
With this feature, either side of the seatback can be
folded down for more cargo space.
Before folding a seatback, make sure the front seat is
not reclined. If it is, the rear seatback will not fold down
all the way.
Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safety belts still
fastened may cause damage to the seat or the safety
belts. Always unbuckle the safety belts and return
them to their normal stowed position before folding
a rear seat.
To lower the rear seatback, pull up on the seatback
strap while folding the seatback down. This allows
access to the trunk.
To raise the rear seatback pull the seatback up and
make sure it latches. Push and pull on the seatback to
be sure it is locked in position. Make sure that the
safety belts are properly stowed over the seatback in
all three positions.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
1-10
{ CAUTION: { CAUTION:
A safety belt that is improperly routed, not properly If either seatback is not locked, it could move
attached, or twisted will not provide the protection forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
needed in a crash. The person wearing the belt cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
could be seriously injured. After raising the rear push and pull on the seatbacks to be sure they
seatback, always check to be sure that the safety are locked.
belts are properly routed and attached, and are
not twisted.
When the seat is not in use, it should be kept in the
upright locked position.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
1-11
Safety Belts
{ CAUTION:
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
This section of the manual describes how to use
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision,
safety belts properly. It also describes some things not
to do with safety belts. people riding in these areas are more likely to be
seriously injured or killed. Do not allow people to
ride in any area of your vehicle that is not
{ CAUTION: equipped with seats and safety belts. Be sure
everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a
safety belt properly.
Do not let anyone ride where a safety belt
cannot be worn properly. In a crash, if you or your
passenger(s) are not wearing safety belts, the This vehicle has indicators as a reminder to buckle the
injuries can be much worse. You can hit things safety belts. See Safety Belt Reminders on page 3-30
inside the vehicle harder or be ejected from the for additional information.
vehicle. You and your passenger(s) can be
seriously injured or killed. In the same crash, you
might not be, if you are buckled up. Always fasten
your safety belt, and check that your passenger(s)
are restrained properly too.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
1-12
In most states and in all Canadian provinces, the law Why Safety Belts Work
requires wearing safety belts. Here is why:
When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast as
You never know if you will be in a crash. If you do have it goes.
a crash, you do not know if it will be a serious one.
A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be so
serious that even buckled up, a person would not
survive. But most crashes are in between. In many of
them, people who buckle up can survive and sometimes
walk away. Without safety belts, they could have
been badly hurt or killed.
After more than 40 years of safety belts in vehicles,
the facts are clear. In most crashes buckling up does
matter... a lot!
Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it is just a seat on

wheels.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
1-13
Put someone on it. Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. The rider
does not stop.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
1-14
The person keeps going until stopped by something. or the instrument panel...
In a real vehicle, it could be the windshield...
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
1-15
Questions and Answers About
Safety Belts
Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle after a crash if

I am wearing a safety belt?
A: You could be — whether you are wearing a safety
belt or not. But your chance of being conscious
during and after an accident, so you can unbuckle
and get out, is much greater if you are belted.
And you can unbuckle a safety belt, even if you are
upside down.
Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why should I have to

wear safety belts?
A: Airbags are supplemental systems only; so they
or the safety belts! work with safety belts — not instead of them.
Whether or not an airbag is provided, all occupants
With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does.
still have to buckle up to get the most protection.
You get more time to stop. You stop over more distance,
and your strongest bones take the forces. That is why That is true not only in frontal collisions, but
safety belts make such good sense. especially in side and other collisions.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
1-16
Q: If I am a good driver, and I never drive far from How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
home, why should I wear safety belts?
This section is only for people of adult size.
A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you are in a Be aware that there are special things to know about
crash — even one that is not your fault — you and safety belts and children. And there are different rules for
your passenger(s) can be hurt. Being a good smaller children and infants. If a child will be riding in the
driver does not protect you from things beyond your vehicle, see Older Children on page 1-32 or Infants and
control, such as bad drivers. Young Children on page 1-35. Follow those rules for
Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km) of everyone’s protection.
home. And the greatest number of serious injuries It is very important for all occupants to buckle up.
and deaths occur at speeds of less than 40 mph Statistics show that unbelted people are hurt more often
(65 km/h). in crashes than those who are wearing safety belts.
Safety belts are for everyone. Occupants who are not buckled up can be thrown out of
the vehicle in a crash. And they can strike others in
the vehicle who are wearing safety belts.
First, before you or your passenger(s) wear a safety
belt, there is important information you should know.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
1-17
In a crash, this applies force to the strong pelvic bones
and you would be less likely to slide under the lap
belt. If you slid under it, the belt would apply force on
your abdomen. This could cause serious or even
fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go over the
shoulder and across the chest. These parts of the body
are best able to take belt restraining forces.
The shoulder belt locks if there is a sudden stop or
crash.
Sit up straight and always keep your feet on the floor in

front of you. The lap part of the belt should be worn
low and snug on the hips, just touching the thighs.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
1-18
Q: What is wrong with this?
{ CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt is
too loose. In a crash, you would move forward too
much, which could increase injury. The shoulder
belt should fit snugly against your body.
A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It will not give as

much protection this way.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
1-19
{ CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your lap belt is too
loose. In a crash, you could slide under the lap
belt and apply force on your abdomen. This could
cause serious or even fatal injuries. The lap belt
should be worn low and snug on the hips, just
touching the thighs.
A: The lap belt is too loose. It will not give nearly as

much protection this way.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
1-20
{ CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if your belt is buckled
in the wrong place like this. In a crash, the belt
would go up over your abdomen. The belt forces
would be there, not on the pelvic bones. This
could cause serious internal injuries. Always
buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you.
A: The belt is buckled in the wrong buckle.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
1-21
{ CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if your belt goes over
an armrest like this. The belt would be much too
high. In a crash, you can slide under the belt.
The belt force would then be applied on the
abdomen, not on the pelvic bones, and that could
cause serious or fatal injuries. Be sure the belt
goes under the armrests.
A: The belt is over an armrest.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
1-22
{ CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if you wear the
shoulder belt under your arm. In a crash, your
body would move too far forward, which would
increase the chance of head and neck injury. Also,
the belt would apply too much force to the ribs,
which are not as strong as shoulder bones. You
could also severely injure internal organs like your
liver or spleen. The shoulder belt should go over
the shoulder and across the chest.
A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It should

be worn over the shoulder at all times.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
1-23
{ CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured by not wearing the
lap-shoulder belt properly. In a crash, you would
not be restrained by the shoulder belt. Your body
could move too far forward increasing the chance
of head and neck injury. You might also slide
under the lap belt. The belt force would then be
applied right on the abdomen. That could cause
serious or fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should
go over the shoulder and across the chest.
A: The belt is behind the body.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
1-24
{ CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt. In a
crash, you would not have the full width of the belt
to spread impact forces. If a belt is twisted, make
it straight so it can work properly, or ask your
dealer/retailer to fix it.
A: The belt is twisted across the body.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
1-25
Lap-Shoulder Belt
All seating positions in the vehicle have a
lap-shoulder belt.
The following instructions explain how to wear a
lap-shoulder belt properly.
1. Adjust the seat, if the seat is adjustable, so you can
sit up straight. To see how, see “Seats” in the Index.
2. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Do not let it get twisted.
The lap-shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt
across you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt
go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt across
you more slowly.
If the shoulder portion of a passenger belt is pulled 3. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
out all the way, the child restraint locking feature Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
may be engaged. If this happens, just let the belt go If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt
back all the way and start again. Extender on page 1-32.
Engaging the child restraint locking feature in the Position the release button on the buckle so that the
right front seating position may affect the passenger safety belt could be quickly unbuckled if necessary.
sensing system. See Passenger Sensing System 4. If equipped with a shoulder belt height adjuster,
on page 1-66 for more information. move it to the height that is right for you. Improper
shoulder belt height adjustment could reduce the
effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash. See
“Shoulder Belt Height Adjustment” later in this
section for instruction on use and important safety
information.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
1-26
5. To make the lap part tight, pull up on the To unlatch the belt, push the button on the buckle.
shoulder belt. The belt should return to its stowed position. Slide the
It may be necessary to pull stitching on the safety latch plate up the safety belt webbing when the safety belt
belt through the latch plate to fully tighten the is not in use. The latch plate should rest on the stitching
lap belt on smaller occupants. on the safety belt, near the guide loop on the side wall.
Before a door is closed, be sure the safety belt is out
of the way. If a door is slammed against a safety belt,
damage can occur to both the safety belt and the vehicle.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
1-27
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster Safety Belt Pretensioners
Your vehicle has a shoulder belt height adjuster for the This vehicle has safety belt pretensioners for the
driver and right front passenger position. front outboard occupants. Although the safety belt
pretensioners cannot be seen, they are part of the safety
Adjust the height so that the shoulder portion of the belt
is centered on the shoulder. The belt should be away belt assembly. They can help tighten the safety belts
from the face and neck, but not falling off of the shoulder. during the early stages of a moderate to severe frontal
Improper shoulder belt height adjustment could reduce and near frontal crash if the threshold conditions for
pretensioner activation are met. And, if the vehicle has
the effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash.
side impact airbags, safety belt pretensioners can help
Squeeze the buttons (A) tighten the safety belts in a side crash.
on the sides of the height Pretensioners work only once. If they activate in a crash,
adjuster and move the they will need to be replaced, and probably other new
height adjuster to the parts for the vehicle’s safety belt system. See Replacing
desired position. Restraint System Parts After a Crash on page 1-74.
After the adjuster is set to the desired position, try to

move it down without squeezing the buttons to make
sure it has locked into position.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
1-28
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides
Rear shoulder belt comfort guides may provide added
safety belt comfort for older children who have outgrown
booster seats and for some adults. When installed on a
shoulder belt, the comfort guide positions the belt away
from the neck and head.
There is one guide for each outboard passenger position
in the rear seat. Here is how to install a comfort guide to
the safety belt:
2. Place the guide over the belt and insert the

two edges of the belt into the slots of the guide.
1. Pull the elastic cord out from between the edge of

the seatback and the interior body to remove the
guide from its storage clip.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
1-29
{ CAUTION:
A safety belt that is not properly worn may
not provide the protection needed in a crash.
The person wearing the belt could be seriously
injured. The shoulder belt should go over the
shoulder and across the chest. These parts of
the body are best able to take belt restraining
forces.
3. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies flat.

The elastic cord must be under the belt and the
guide on top.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
1-30
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy
Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant
women. Like all occupants, they are more likely to be
seriously injured if they do not wear safety belts.
4. Buckle, position, and release the safety belt as

described previously in this section. Make sure
that the shoulder belt crosses the shoulder.
To remove and store the comfort guide, squeeze the belt
edges together so that the safety belt can be removed
from the guide. Pull the guide upward to expose its A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt, and
storage clip, and then slide the guide onto the clip. the lap portion should be worn as low as possible, below
Turn the guide and clip inward and slide them in between the rounding, throughout the pregnancy.
the seatback and the interior body, leaving only the loop The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the mother.
of the elastic cord exposed. When a safety belt is worn properly, it is more likely that
the fetus will not be hurt in a crash. For pregnant women,
as for anyone, the key to making safety belts effective is
wearing them properly.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
1-31
Safety Belt Extender Child Restraints
If the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you,
you should use it. Older Children
But if a safety belt is not long enough, your dealer/retailer
will order you an extender. When you go in to order it,
take the heaviest coat you will wear, so the extender will
be long enough for you. To help avoid personal injury, do
not let someone else use it, and use it only for the seat it
is made to fit. The extender has been designed for adults.
Never use it for securing child seats. To wear it, attach it
to the regular safety belt. For more information, see the
instruction sheet that comes with the extender.
Older children who have outgrown booster seats should

wear the vehicle’s safety belts.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
1-32
The manufacturer’s instructions that come with the Q: What is the proper way to wear safety belts?
booster seat state the weight and height limitations for
that booster. Use a booster seat with a lap-shoulder belt A: An older child should wear a lap-shoulder belt
until the child passes the below fit test: and get the additional restraint a shoulder belt can
• Sit all the way back on the seat. Do the knees bend provide. The shoulder belt should not cross the face
at the seat edge? If yes, continue. If no, return to or neck. The lap belt should fit snugly below the hips,
the booster seat. just touching the top of the thighs. This applies belt
force to the child’s pelvic bones in a crash. It should
• Buckle the lap-shoulder belt. Does the shoulder belt never be worn over the abdomen, which could cause
rest on the shoulder? If yes, continue. If no, try using
severe or even fatal internal injuries in a crash.
the rear safety belt comfort guide. See “Rear Safety
Belt Comfort Guides” under Lap-Shoulder Belt on Also see “Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides” under
page 1-26 for more information. If the shoulder belt Lap-Shoulder Belt on page 1-26.
still does not rest on the shoulder, then return to the According to accident statistics, children and infants are
booster seat. safer when properly restrained in a child restraint system
• Does the lap belt fit low and snug on the hips, or infant restraint system secured in a rear seating
touching the thighs? If yes, continue. If no, return position.
to the booster seat. In a crash, children who are not buckled up can strike
• Can proper safety belt fit be maintained for the length other people who are buckled up, or can be thrown
of the trip? If yes, continue. If no, return to the out of the vehicle. Older children need to use safety
booster seat. belts properly.
• If you have the choice, a child should sit in a position
with a lap-shoulder belt and get the additional
restraint a shoulder belt can provide.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
1-33
Never do this. Never do this.
Never allow two children to wear the same safety Never allow a child to wear the safety belt with the
belt. The safety belt can not properly spread the shoulder belt behind their back. A child can be
impact forces. In a crash, the two children can be seriously injured by not wearing the lap-shoulder
crushed together and seriously injured. A safety belt properly. In a crash, the child would not be
belt must be used by only one person at a time. restrained by the shoulder belt. The child could
move too far forward increasing the chance of
head and neck injury. The child might also slide
under the lap belt. The belt force would then be
applied right on the abdomen. That could cause
serious or fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should
go over the shoulder and across the chest.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
1-34
{ CAUTION:
Children can be seriously injured or strangled if a
shoulder belt is wrapped around their neck and
the safety belt continues to tighten. Never leave
children unattended in a vehicle and never allow
children to play with the safety belts.
Airbags plus lap-shoulder belts offer protection

for adults and older children, but not for young
children and infants. Neither the vehicle’s safety
belt system nor its airbag system is designed for
them. Every time infants and young children
ride in vehicles, they should have the protection
Infants and Young Children provided by appropriate child restraints.
Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! This includes Children who are not restrained properly can strike
infants and all other children. Neither the distance other people, or can be thrown out of the vehicle.
traveled nor the age and size of the traveler changes
the need, for everyone, to use safety restraints. In fact,
the law in every state in the United States and in
every Canadian province says children up to some age
must be restrained while in a vehicle.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
1-35
{ CAUTION:
Never do this.
Never hold an infant or a child while riding in a
vehicle. Due to crash forces, an infant or a child will
become so heavy it is not possible to hold it during
a crash. For example, in a crash at only 25 mph
(40 km/h), a 12 lb (5.5 kg) infant will suddenly
become a 240 lb (110 kg) force on a person’s arms.
An infant should be secured in an appropriate
restraint.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
1-36
{ CAUTION:
Never do this.
Children who are up against, or very close to, any
airbag when it inflates can be seriously injured or
killed. Never put a rear-facing child restraint in the
right front seat. Secure a rear-facing child restraint
in a rear seat. It is also better to secure a
forward-facing child restraint in a rear seat. If you
must secure a forward-facing child restraint in the
right front seat, always move the front passenger
seat as far back as it will go.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
1-37
Q: What are the different types of add-on child
restraints? { CAUTION:
A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased by the
vehicle’s owner, are available in four basic types. To reduce the risk of neck and head injury during
Selection of a particular restraint should take into a crash, infants need complete support. This is
consideration not only the child’s weight, height, because an infant’s neck is not fully developed
and age but also whether or not the restraint will be and its head weighs so much compared with
compatible with the motor vehicle in which it will the rest of its body. In a crash, an infant in a
be used. rear-facing child restraint settles into the restraint,
For most basic types of child restraints, there are so the crash forces can be distributed across the
many different models available. When purchasing a strongest part of an infant’s body, the back and
child restraint, be sure it is designed to be used in a shoulders. Infants should always be secured in
motor vehicle. If it is, the restraint will have a label rear-facing child restraints.
saying that it meets federal motor vehicle safety
standards.
The restraint manufacturer’s instructions that
come with the restraint state the weight and height
limitations for a particular child restraint. In addition,
there are many kinds of restraints available for
children with special needs.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
1-38
Child Restraint Systems
{ CAUTION: A rear-facing infant
seat (A) provides restraint
A young child’s hip bones are still so small that with the seating surface
the vehicle’s regular safety belt may not remain against the back of
low on the hip bones, as it should. Instead, it may the infant.
settle up around the child’s abdomen. In a crash,
the belt would apply force on a body area that is
unprotected by any bony structure. This alone
could cause serious or fatal injuries. To reduce the
risk of serious or fatal injuries during a crash,
young children should always be secured in
appropriate child restraints.
The harness system holds the infant in place and, in a
crash, acts to keep the infant positioned in the restraint.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
1-39
A forward-facing child
seat (B) provides restraint
for the child’s body
with the harness.
A booster seat (C-D) is a child restraint designed to

improve the fit of the vehicle’s safety belt system.
A booster seat can also help a child to see out the
window.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
1-40
Securing an Add-On Child Restraint in When securing an add-on child restraint, refer to the
instructions that come with the restraint which may be on
the Vehicle the restraint itself or in a booklet, or both, and to this
manual. The child restraint instructions are important,
so if they are not available, obtain a replacement
{ CAUTION: copy from the manufacturer.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can
A child can be seriously injured or killed in a crash move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure
if the child restraint is not properly secured in the people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure
vehicle. Secure the child restraint properly in the any child restraint in the vehicle — even when no child
vehicle using the vehicle’s safety belt or LATCH is in it.
system, following the instructions that came with Securing the Child Within the Child
that child restraint and the instructions in this
manual.
Restraint
To help reduce the chance of injury, the child restraint { CAUTION:

must be secured in the vehicle. Child restraint systems
must be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the
A child can be seriously injured or killed in a crash
lap belt portion of a lap-shoulder belt, or by the LATCH
system. See Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children if the child is not properly secured in the child
(LATCH) on page 1-44 for more information. A child can restraint. Secure the child properly following the
be endangered in a crash if the child restraint is not instructions that came with that child restraint.
properly secured in the vehicle.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
1-41
Where to Put the Restraint
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat.
Even if the passenger sensing system has turned
We recommend that children and child restraints
be secured in a rear seat, including: an infant or a child off the right front passenger frontal airbag, no
riding in a rear-facing child restraint; a child riding in system is fail-safe. No one can guarantee that
a forward-facing child seat; an older child riding in an airbag will not deploy under some unusual
a booster seat; and children, who are large enough, circumstance, even though it is turned off.
using safety belts. Secure rear-facing child restraints in a rear
A label on your sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing seat, even if the airbag is off. If you secure a
child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to the forward-facing child restraint in the right front seat,
rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys. always move the front passenger seat as far back
as it will go. It is better to secure the child restraint
in a rear seat.
{ CAUTION: See Passenger Sensing System on page 1-66
for additional information.
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger
airbag inflates. This is because the back of the When securing a child restraint in a rear seating
rear-facing child restraint would be very close to the position, study the instructions that came with your child
inflating airbag. A child in a forward-facing child restraint to make sure it is compatible with this vehicle.
restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right Wherever you install a child restraint, be sure to
front passenger airbag inflates and the passenger secure the child restraint properly.
seat is in a forward position.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
1-42
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can A. Occupant prohibited
move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure B. Child restraint using
people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure LATCH
any child restraint in your vehicle — even when no child
is in it.
If you secure a child restraint in the left or center rear
seat using LATCH, review the following illustrations.
Depending on where you place the child restraint, you
may not be able to access certain safety belt assemblies
A. Child restraint using
or LATCH anchors for additional passengers or child
LATCH
restraints.
B. Child restraint or
Configurations for Use of Child occupant using
Restraints safety belt
C. Child restraint using
A. Child restraint using safety belt or LATCH
LATCH or occupant using
B. Child restraint or safety belt
occupant using
safety belt
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
1-43
A. Child restraint or Lower Anchors and Tethers for
occupant using
safety belt Children (LATCH)
The LATCH system holds a child restraint during driving
or in a crash. This system is designed to make installation
of a child restraint easier. The LATCH system uses
anchors in the vehicle and attachments on the child
restraint that are made for use with the LATCH system.
A. Child restraint or Make sure that a LATCH-compatible child restraint is
occupant using properly installed using the anchors, or use the vehicle’s
safety belt safety belts to secure the restraint, following the
B. Child restraint using instructions that came with that restraint, and also the
LATCH instructions in this manual. When installing a child
restraint with a top tether, you must also use either the
lower anchors or the safety belts to properly secure the
child restraint. A child restraint must never be installed
using only the top tether and anchor.
In order to use the LATCH system in your vehicle,
you need a child restraint that has LATCH attachments.
The child restraint manufacturer will provide you with
instructions on how to use the child restraint and its
attachments. The following explains how to attach a
child restraint with these attachments in your vehicle.
Not all vehicle seating positions or child restraints have
lower anchors and attachments or top tether anchors
and attachments.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
1-44
Lower Anchors Top Tether Anchor
Lower anchors (A) are metal bars built into the vehicle. A top tether (A, C) anchors the top of the child restraint
There are two lower anchors for each LATCH seating to the vehicle. A top tether anchor is built into the vehicle.
position that will accommodate a child restraint with The top tether attachment (B) on the child restraint
lower attachments (B). connects to the top tether anchor in the vehicle in order
to reduce the forward movement and rotation of the child
restraint during driving or in a crash.
Your child restraint may have a single tether (A) or a
dual tether (C). Either will have a single attachment (B)
to secure the top tether to the anchor.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
1-45
Some child restraints with top tethers are designed Lower Anchor and Top Tether Anchor
for use with or without the top tether being attached. Locations
Others require the top tether always to be attached.
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child
restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be
i (Top Tether Anchor):
attached. Be sure to read and follow the instructions Seating positions with
for your child restraint. top tether anchors.
If the child restraint does not have a top tether, one can j (Lower Anchor): Seating
be obtained, in kit form, for many child restraints. positions with two lower
Ask the child restraint manufacturer whether or not a kit anchors.
is available.
Rear Seat
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
1-46
To assist you in locating
the lower anchors, each
rear anchor position has
a label, near the crease
between the seatback and
the seat cushion.
To assist you in locating

the top tether anchors, the
top tether anchor symbol
is located on the cover. The top tether anchors are located under the covers,
behind the rear seat, on the filler panel. Be sure to use
an anchor located on the same side of the vehicle as the
seating position where the child restraint will be placed.
Do not secure a child restraint in a position without a top
tether anchor if a national or local law requires that the
top tether be attached, or if the instructions that come
with the child restraint say that the top tether must be
attached.
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat.
See Where to Put the Restraint on page 1-42 for
additional information.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
1-47
Securing a Child Restraint Designed for
the LATCH System { CAUTION:
{ CAUTION: Do not attach more than one child restraint to a
single anchor. Attaching more than one child
restraint to a single anchor could cause the anchor
If a LATCH-type child restraint is not attached to or attachment to come loose or even break during
anchors, the child restraint will not be able to a crash. A child or others could be injured. To
protect the child correctly. In a crash, the child reduce the risk of serious or fatal injuries during a
could be seriously injured or killed. Install a crash, attach only one child restraint per anchor.
LATCH-type child restraint properly using the
anchors, or use the vehicle’s safety belts to secure
the restraint, following the instructions that came
with the child restraint and the instructions in this
manual.
{ CAUTION:
Children can be seriously injured or strangled if a
shoulder belt is wrapped around their neck and
the safety belt continues to tighten. Buckle any
unused safety belts behind the child restraint so
children cannot reach them. Pull the shoulder belt
all the way out of the retractor to set the lock, if
your vehicle has one, after the child restraint has
been installed.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
1-48
Notice: Do not let the LATCH attachments rub
against the vehicle’s safety belts. This may damage
these parts. If necessary, move buckled safety
belts to avoid rubbing the LATCH attachments.
Do not fold the empty rear seat with a safety belt
buckled. This could damage the safety belt or
the seat. Unbuckle and return the safety belt to its
stowed position, before folding the seat.
If you need to secure more than one child restraint in
the rear seat, see Where to Put the Restraint on
page 1-42. Depending on where you place the child
restraint, you may not be able to access certain safety
belt assemblies or LATCH anchors for additional
passengers or child restraints.
You cannot secure three child restraints using the LATCH
anchors in the rear seat at the same time, but you can A. Passenger Side Rear Seat Lower Anchors
install two of them. If you want to do this, install one B. Center Rear Seat Lower Anchors
LATCH child restraint in the passenger-side position, and
install the other one either in the driver-side position or in C. Driver Side Rear Seat Lower Anchors
the center position. Refer to the following illustration to Make sure to attach the child restraint at the proper
learn which anchors to use. anchor location.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
1-49
This system is designed to make installation of child 2. If the child restraint manufacturer recommends that
restraints easier. When using lower anchors, do not use the top tether be attached, attach and tighten the
the vehicle’s safety belts. Instead use the vehicle’s top tether to the top tether anchor, if equipped.
anchors and child restraint attachments to secure the Refer to the child restraint instructions and the
restraints. Some restraints also use another vehicle following steps:
anchor to secure a top tether. 2.1. Find the top tether anchor.
1. Attach and tighten the lower attachments to the Open the cover to expose the anchor.
lower anchors. If the child restraint does not have
2.2. If the position you are using has an
lower attachments or the desired seating position
adjustable headrest or head restraint,
does not have lower anchors, secure the child
raise it. See Head Restraints on page 1-2.
restraint with the top tether and the safety belts.
Refer to your child restraint manufacturer 2.3. Route, attach, and tighten the top tether
instructions and the instructions in this manual. according to the child restraint instructions
and the following instructions:
1.1. Find the lower anchors for the desired
seating position. If the position you are
1.2. Put the child restraint on the seat. using does not have a
1.3. Attach and tighten the lower attachments on headrest or head restraint
the child restraint to the lower anchors. and you are using a
single tether, route the
tether over the seatback.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
1-50
If the position you are using If the position you are using
does not have a headrest has an adjustable headrest
or head restraint and you or head restraint and you
are using a dual tether, are using a dual tether
route the tether over the route the tether under the
seatback. headrest or head restraint
and in between the
headrest or head restraint
posts. See Head Restraints
on page 1-2.
If the position you are 3. Push and pull the child restraint in different
using has an adjustable directions to be sure it is secure.
and you are using a single
tether, route the tether
under the headrest or head
restraint and in between the
posts. See Head Restraints
on page 1-2.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
1-51
Securing a Child Restraint in a In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child
Rear Seat Position attached.
When securing a child restraint in a rear seating If the child restraint does not have the LATCH system,
position, study the instructions that came with the you will be using the safety belt to secure the child
child restraint to make sure it is compatible with this restraint in this position. Be sure to follow the
vehicle. instructions that came with the child restraint.
Secure the child in the child restraint when and as
If the child restraint has the LATCH system, see Lower the instructions say.
Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 1-44
for how and where to install the child restraint using If more than one child restraint needs to be installed
LATCH. If a child restraint is secured in the vehicle using in the rear seat, be sure to read Where to Put the
a safety belt and it uses a top tether, see Lower Anchors Restraint on page 1-42.
and Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 1-44 for top 1. Put the child restraint on the seat.
tether anchor locations.
2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
Do not secure a child seat in a position without a top portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
tether anchor if a national or local law requires that the around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
top tether be anchored, or if the instructions that will show you how.
come with the child restraint say that the top strap
must be anchored.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
1-52
3. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks. 4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
Position the release button on the buckle so that the retractor to set the lock.
the safety belt could be quickly unbuckled if
necessary.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
1-53
6. If the child restraint has a top tether, follow the child
restraint manufacturer’s instructions regarding the
use of the top tether. See Lower Anchors and
Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 1-44 for
more information.
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, unbuckle the vehicle
safety belt and let it return to the stowed position.
If the top tether is attached to a top tether anchor,
disconnect it.
Securing a Child Restraint in the

Right Front Seat Position
5. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint,
pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the lap This vehicle has airbags. A rear seat is a safer place to
portion of the belt and feed the shoulder belt back secure a forward-facing child restraint. See Where to
into the retractor. When installing a forward-facing Put the Restraint on page 1-42.
child restraint, it may be helpful to use your knee In addition, the vehicle has a passenger sensing system
to push down on the child restraint as you tighten which is designed to turn off the right front passenger
the belt. frontal airbag and seat-mounted side impact airbag
under certain conditions. See Passenger Sensing
System on page 1-66 and Passenger Airbag Status
Indicator on page 3-32 for more information, including
important safety information.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
1-54
A label on the sun visor says, “Never put a
rear-facing child seat in the front.” This is because CAUTION: (Continued)
the risk to the rear-facing child is so great, if the
airbag deploys.
Secure rear-facing child restraints in a rear
seat, even if the airbag is off. If you secure a
{ CAUTION: forward-facing child restraint in the right front seat,
always move the front passenger seat as far back
as it will go. It is better to secure the child restraint
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be in a rear seat.
airbag inflates. This is because the back of the See Passenger Sensing System on page 1-66
rear-facing child restraint would be very close to the for additional information.
inflating airbag. A child in a forward-facing child
restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right If the child restraint has the LATCH system, see
front passenger airbag inflates and the passenger Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH) on
seat is in a forward position. page 1-44 for how and where to install the child restraint
Even if the passenger sensing system has turned using LATCH. If a child restraint is secured using a
off the right front passenger frontal airbag, no safety belt and it uses a top tether, see Lower Anchors
and Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 1-44 for
system is fail-safe. No one can guarantee that
top tether anchor locations.
an airbag will not deploy under some unusual
circumstance, even though it is turned off.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
1-55
Do not secure a child seat in a position without a top
tether anchor if a national or local law requires that the
top tether be anchored, or if the instructions that come
with the child restraint say that the top strap must be
anchored.
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child
attached.
You will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure the
child restraint in this position. Follow the instructions that
came with the child restraint.
1. Move the seat as far back as it will go before
securing the forward-facing child restraint.
When the passenger sensing system has turned
off the right front passenger frontal airbag and 4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
seat-mounted side impact airbag, the off indicator
Position the release button on the buckle so that
on the passenger airbag status indicator should
the safety belt could be quickly unbuckled if
light and stay lit when you start the vehicle. See
necessary.
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 3-32.
2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
1-56
5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of 6. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint,
the retractor to set the lock. pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the lap
portion of the belt and feed the shoulder belt back
into the retractor. When installing a forward-facing
child restraint, it may be helpful to use your knee
to push down on the child restraint as you tighten
the belt.
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
If the airbags are off, the off indicator in the passenger
airbag status indicator will come on and stay on when the
vehicle is started.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
1-57
If a child restraint has been installed and the on All of the airbags in your vehicle will have the word
indicator is lit, see “If the On Indicator is Lit for a Child AIRBAG embossed in the trim or on an attached label
Restraint ” under Passenger Sensing System on near the deployment opening.
page 1-66 for more information. For frontal airbags, the word AIRBAG will appear on the
To remove the child restraint, unbuckle the vehicle middle part of the steering wheel for the driver and
safety belt and let it return to the stowed position. on the instrument panel for the right front passenger.
With seat-mounted side impact airbags, the word
Airbag System AIRBAG will appear on the side of the seatback closest
to the door.
The vehicle has the following airbags:
With roof-rail airbags, the word AIRBAG will appear
• A frontal airbag for the driver. along the headliner or trim.
• A frontal airbag for the right front passenger. Airbags are designed to supplement the protection
• A seat-mounted side impact airbag for the driver. provided by safety belts. Even though today’s airbags
are also designed to help reduce the risk of injury
• A seat-mounted side impact airbag for the right front from the force of an inflating bag, all airbags must inflate
passenger. very quickly to do their job.
• A roof-rail airbag for the driver and the passenger
seated directly behind the driver.
• A roof-rail airbag for the right front passenger and
the passenger seated directly behind the right
front passenger.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
1-58
Here are the most important things to know about the
airbag system:
{ CAUTION:
{ CAUTION: Airbags inflate with great force, faster than the blink
of an eye. Anyone who is up against, or very close
You can be severely injured or killed in a crash if to, any airbag when it inflates can be seriously
you are not wearing your safety belt — even if you injured or killed. Do not sit unnecessarily close to
have airbags. Airbags are designed to work with the airbag, as you would be if you were sitting on
safety belts, but do not replace them. Also, airbags the edge of your seat or leaning forward. Safety
are not designed to deploy in every crash. In some belts help keep you in position before and during a
crashes safety belts are your only restraint. See crash. Always wear your safety belt, even with
When Should an Airbag Inflate? on page 1-63. airbags. The driver should sit as far back as
possible while still maintaining control of the
Wearing your safety belt during a crash helps vehicle.
reduce your chance of hitting things inside the
vehicle or being ejected from it. Airbags are Occupants should not lean on or sleep against the
“supplemental restraints” to the safety belts. door or side windows in seating positions with
Everyone in your vehicle should wear a safety belt seat-mounted side impact airbags and/or roof-rail
properly — whether or not there is an airbag for that airbags.
person.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
1-59
The system checks the airbag electrical system for
malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical
{ CAUTION: problem. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3-31
for more information.
Children who are up against, or very close to, any
airbag when it inflates can be seriously injured Where Are the Airbags?
or killed. Airbags plus lap-shoulder belts offer
protection for adults and older children, but not for
young children and infants. Neither the vehicle’s
safety belt system nor its airbag system is designed
for them. Young children and infants need the
protection that a child restraint system can provide.
Always secure children properly in your vehicle.
To read how, see Older Children on page 1-32 or
Infants and Young Children on page 1-35.
The driver’s frontal airbag is in the middle of the

There is an airbag readiness light on the
steering wheel.
instrument panel cluster, which shows the airbag
symbol.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
1-60
Driver Side shown, Passenger Side similar
The right front passenger’s frontal airbag is in the
instrument panel on the passenger’s side. The seat-mounted side impact airbags for the driver and
right front passenger are in the side of the seatbacks
closest to the door.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
1-61
{ CAUTION:
If something is between an occupant and an airbag,
the airbag might not inflate properly or it might force
the object into that person causing severe injury or
even death. The path of an inflating airbag must
be kept clear. Do not put anything between an
occupant and an airbag, and do not attach or put
anything on the steering wheel hub or on or near
any other airbag covering.
Do not use seat accessories that block the inflation
path of a seat-mounted side impact airbag.
Never secure anything to the roof of a vehicle with
roof-rail airbags by routing a rope or tie down
Driver Side shown, Passenger Side similar through any door or window opening. If you do, the
path of an inflating roof-rail airbag will be blocked.
The roof-rail airbags for the driver, right front passenger,
and second row outboard passengers are in the
ceiling above the side windows.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
1-62
When Should an Airbag Inflate? Thresholds can also vary with specific vehicle design.
Frontal airbags are designed to inflate in moderate to Frontal airbags are not intended to inflate during vehicle
severe frontal or near-frontal crashes to help reduce the rollovers, rear impacts, or in many side impacts.
potential for severe injuries mainly to the driver’s or right In addition, the vehicle has dual-stage frontal airbags.
front passenger’s head and chest. However, they are only Dual-stage airbags adjust the restraint according to crash
designed to inflate if the impact exceeds a predetermined severity. The vehicle has electronic frontal sensors, which
deployment threshold. Deployment thresholds are used help the sensing system distinguish between a moderate
to predict how severe a crash is likely to be in time for the frontal impact and a more severe frontal impact. For
airbags to inflate and help restrain the occupants. moderate frontal impacts, dual-stage airbags inflate at a
Whether the frontal airbags will or should deploy is not level less than full deployment. For more severe frontal
based on how fast your vehicle is traveling. It depends impacts, full deployment occurs.
largely on what you hit, the direction of the impact, and The vehicle has seat-mounted side impact and
how quickly your vehicle slows down. roof-rail airbags. See Airbag System on page 1-58.
Frontal airbags may inflate at different crash speeds. Seat-mounted side impact and roof-rail airbags are
For example: intended to inflate in moderate to severe side crashes.
Seat-mounted side impact and roof-rail airbags will inflate
• If the vehicle hits a stationary object, the airbags if the crash severity is above the system’s designed
could inflate at a different crash speed than if the threshold level. The threshold level can vary with specific
vehicle hits a moving object. vehicle design.
• If the vehicle hits an object that deforms, the airbags Seat-mounted side impact and roof-rail airbags are
could inflate at a different crash speed than if the not intended to inflate in frontal impacts, near-frontal
vehicle hits an object that does not deform. impacts, rollovers, or rear impacts. A seat-mounted side
• If the vehicle hits a narrow object (like a pole), the impact airbag is intended to deploy on the side of the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed than if vehicle that is struck. A roof-rail airbag is intended
the vehicle hits a wide object (like a wall). to deploy on the side of the vehicle that is struck.
• If the vehicle goes into an object at an angle, the In any particular crash, no one can say whether an airbag
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed than if should have inflated simply because of the damage to
the vehicle goes straight into the object. a vehicle or because of what the repair costs were.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
1-63
For frontal airbags, inflation is determined by what the Airbags supplement the protection provided by safety
vehicle hits, the angle of the impact, and how quickly the belts. Frontal airbags distribute the force of the impact
vehicle slows down. For seat-mounted side impact and more evenly over the occupant’s upper body, stopping
roof-rail airbags, deployment is determined by the the occupant more gradually. Seat-mounted side impact
location and severity of the side impact. and roof-rail airbags distribute the force of the impact
more evenly over the occupant’s upper body.
What Makes an Airbag Inflate? But airbags would not help in many types of collisions,
primarily because the occupant’s motion is not toward
In a deployment event, the sensing system sends an those airbags. See When Should an Airbag Inflate?
electrical signal triggering a release of gas from the on page 1-63 for more information.
inflator. Gas from the inflator fills the airbag causing the
bag to break out of the cover and deploy. The inflator, Airbags should never be regarded as anything more
the airbag, and related hardware are all part of the airbag than a supplement to safety belts.
module.
Frontal airbag modules are located inside the What Will You See After an Airbag
steering wheel and instrument panel. For vehicles with
seat-mounted side impact airbags, there are airbag
Inflates?
modules in the side of the front seatbacks closest to After the frontal airbags and seat-mounted side impact
the door. For vehicles with roof-rail airbags, there are airbags inflate, they quickly deflate, so quickly that some
airbag modules in the ceiling of the vehicle, near the people may not even realize an airbag inflated. Roof-rail
side windows that have occupant seating positions. airbags may still be at least partially inflated for some
time after they deploy. Some components of the airbag
How Does an Airbag Restrain? module may be hot for several minutes. For location of
the airbag modules, see What Makes an Airbag Inflate?
In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions, on page 1-64.
even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel
or the instrument panel. In moderate to severe side
collisions, even belted occupants can contact the inside
of the vehicle.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
1-64
The parts of the airbag that come into contact with you In many crashes severe enough to inflate the airbag,
may be warm, but not too hot to touch. There may be windshields are broken by vehicle deformation. Additional
some smoke and dust coming from the vents in the windshield breakage may also occur from the right front
deflated airbags. Airbag inflation does not prevent the passenger airbag.
driver from seeing out of the windshield or being able to • Airbags are designed to inflate only once. After an
steer the vehicle, nor does it prevent people from leaving
airbag inflates, you will need some new parts for the
the vehicle.
airbag system. If you do not get them, the airbag
system will not be there to help protect you in another
crash. A new system will include airbag modules and
{ CAUTION: possibly other parts. The service manual for your
vehicle covers the need to replace other parts.
When an airbag inflates, there may be dust in the • The vehicle has a crash sensing and diagnostic
air. This dust could cause breathing problems for module which records information after a crash.
people with a history of asthma or other breathing See Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy on
trouble. To avoid this, everyone in the vehicle page 7-17 and Event Data Recorders on page 7-18.
should get out as soon as it is safe to do so. If you • Let only qualified technicians work on the airbag
have breathing problems but cannot get out of the systems. Improper service can mean that an airbag
vehicle after an airbag inflates, then get fresh air system will not work properly. See your dealer/
by opening a window or a door. If you experience retailer for service.
breathing problems following an airbag deployment,
you should seek medical attention.
The vehicle has a feature that may automatically unlock

the doors, turn the interior lamps on, and turn the hazard
warning flashers on when the airbags inflate. You can
lock the doors, turn the interior lamps off, and turn the
hazard warning flashers off by using the controls for
those features.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
1-65
Passenger Sensing System The passenger sensing system turns off the right front
passenger frontal airbag and seat-mounted side impact
The vehicle has a passenger sensing system for the airbag under certain conditions. The driver airbags and
right front passenger position. The passenger airbag the roof-rail airbags are not affected by the passenger
status indicator will be visible on the instrument sensing system.
panel when the vehicle is started. The passenger sensing system works with sensors that
are part of the right front passenger seat. The sensors
are designed to detect the presence of a properly-seated
occupant and determine if the right front passenger
frontal airbag and seat-mounted side impact airbag
should be enabled (may inflate) or not.
According to accident statistics, children are safer when
properly secured in a rear seat in the correct child
United States Canada restraint for their weight and size.
We recommend that children be secured in a rear seat,
The words ON and OFF, or the symbol for on and off, are including: an infant or a child riding in a rear-facing
visible during the system check. If you are using remote child restraint; a child riding in a forward-facing child
start, if equipped, to start the vehicle from a distance, you seat; an older child riding in a booster seat; and children,
may not see the system check. When the system check is who are large enough, using safety belts.
complete, either the word ON or OFF, or the symbol for
on or off, will be visible. See Passenger Airbag Status A label on the sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing
Indicator on page 3-32. child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to
the rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
1-66
The passenger sensing system is designed to turn off
the right front passenger airbag and seat-mounted
{ CAUTION: side impact airbag if:
• The right front passenger seat is unoccupied.
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
• The system determines that an infant is present in
a rear-facing infant seat.
airbag inflates. This is because the back of the
rear-facing child restraint would be very close to the • The system determines that a small child is present
inflating airbag. A child in a forward-facing child in a child restraint.
restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right • The system determines that a small child is present
front passenger airbag inflates and the passenger in a booster seat.
seat is in a forward position. • A right front passenger takes his/her weight off of
Even if the passenger sensing system has turned the seat for a period of time.
off the right front passenger frontal airbag and • The right front passenger seat is occupied by a
seat-mounted side impact airbag (if equipped), no smaller person, such as a child who has outgrown
system is fail-safe. No one can guarantee that an child restraints.
airbag will not deploy under some unusual
• Or, if there is a critical problem with the airbag
circumstance, even though the airbag(s) are off.
system or the passenger sensing system.
Secure rear-facing child restraints in a rear seat,
When the passenger sensing system has turned off the
even if the airbag(s) are off. If you secure a right front passenger frontal airbag and seat-mounted
forward-facing child restraint in the right front seat, side impact airbag, the off indicator will light and stay lit
always move the front passenger seat as far back to remind you that the airbags are off. See Passenger
as it will go. It is better to secure the child restraint in Airbag Status Indicator on page 3-32.
a rear seat.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
1-67
The passenger sensing system is designed to turn on
(may inflate) the right front passenger frontal airbag and
seat-mounted side impact airbag anytime the system { CAUTION:
senses that a person of adult size is sitting properly in
the right front passenger seat. If the airbag readiness light ever comes on and
When the passenger sensing system has allowed the stays on, it means that something may be wrong
airbags to be enabled, the on indicator will light and stay with the airbag system. To help avoid injury to
lit to remind you that the airbags are active. yourself or others, have the vehicle serviced right
For some children who have outgrown child restraints away. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3-31
and for very small adults, the passenger sensing system for more information, including important safety
may or may not turn off the right front passenger frontal information.
airbag and seat-mounted side impact airbag, depending
upon the person’s seating posture and body build.
Everyone in the vehicle who has outgrown child restraints
should wear a safety belt properly — whether or not there
is an airbag for that person.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
1-68
If the On Indicator is Lit for a Child 5. If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting
the vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, turn the vehicle
Restraint off. Then slightly recline the vehicle seatback and
If a child restraint has been installed and the on adjust the seat cushion, if adjustable, to make sure
indicator is lit: that the vehicle seatback is not pushing the child
restraint into the seat cushion.
1. Turn the vehicle off.
Also make sure the child restraint is not trapped
2. Remove the child restraint from the vehicle. under the vehicle head restraint. If this happens,
3. Remove any additional items from the seat such as adjust the head restraint. See Head Restraints
blankets, cushions, seat covers, seat heaters, or on page 1-2.
seat massagers. 6. Restart the vehicle.
4. Reinstall the child restraint following the directions If the on indicator is still lit with an infant present in
provided by the child restraint manufacturer and a child restraint, secure the child restraint in a
refer to Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front rear seat position in the vehicle and see your
Seat Position on page 1-54. dealer/retailer.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
1-69
If the Off Indicator is Lit for an If this happens, use the following steps to allow the
system to detect that person and enable the right front
Adult-Size Occupant passenger frontal airbag and seat-mounted side
impact airbag:
1. Turn the vehicle off.
2. Remove any additional material from the seat, such
as blankets, cushions, seat covers, seat heaters, or
seat massagers.
3. Place the seatback in the fully upright position.
4. Have the person sit upright in the seat, centered on
the seat cushion, with legs comfortably extended.
5. Restart the vehicle and have the person remain in
this position for two to three minutes after the on
indicator is lit.
If a person of adult-size is sitting in the right front

passenger seat, but the off indicator is lit, it could be
because that person is not sitting properly in the seat.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
1-70
Additional Factors Affecting System Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped
Operation Vehicle
Safety belts help keep the passenger in position on the Airbags affect how the vehicle should be serviced.
seat during vehicle maneuvers and braking, which helps There are parts of the airbag system in several places
the passenger sensing system maintain the passenger around the vehicle. Your dealer/retailer and the
airbag status. See “Safety Belts” and “Child Restraints” in service manual have information about servicing the
the Index for additional information about the importance vehicle and the airbag system. To purchase a service
of proper restraint use. manual, see Service Publications Ordering Information
A thick layer of additional material, such as a blanket or on page 7-16.
cushion, or aftermarket equipment such as seat covers,
seat heaters, and seat massagers can affect how well the
passenger sensing system operates. We recommend
that you not use seat covers or other aftermarket
{ CAUTION:
equipment except when approved by GM for your specific
vehicle. See Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped For up to 10 seconds after the ignition is turned off
Vehicle on page 1-72 for more information about and the battery is disconnected, an airbag can still
modifications that can affect how the system operates. inflate during improper service. You can be injured
if you are close to an airbag when it inflates. Avoid
yellow connectors. They are probably part of the
{ CAUTION: airbag system. Be sure to follow proper service
procedures, and make sure the person performing
Stowing of articles under the passenger seat or work for you is qualified to do so.
between the passenger seat cushion and seatback
may interfere with the proper operation of the
passenger sensing system.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
1-71
Adding Equipment to Your installed under or on top of the seat fabric, could also
interfere with the operation of the passenger sensing
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle system. This could either prevent proper deployment
of the passenger airbag(s) or prevent the passenger
Q: Is there anything I might add to or change sensing system from properly turning off the
about the vehicle that could keep the airbags passenger airbag(s). See Passenger Sensing
from working properly? System on page 1-66.
A: Yes. If you add things that change your vehicle’s If you have any questions about this, you should
frame, bumper system, height, front end or side contact Customer Assistance before you modify
sheet metal, they may keep the airbag system from your vehicle. The phone numbers and addresses
working properly. Changing or moving any parts of for Customer Assistance are in Step Two of
the front seats, safety belts, the airbag sensing and the Customer Satisfaction Procedure in this manual.
diagnostic module, steering wheel, instrument panel, See Customer Satisfaction Procedure on page 7-2.
roof-rail airbag modules, ceiling headliner or pillar
garnish trim, overhead console, front sensors, side Q: Because I have a disability, I have to get
impact sensors, or airbag wiring can affect the my vehicle modified. How can I find out whether
operation of the airbag system. this will affect my airbag system?
In addition, your vehicle has a passenger sensing A: If you have questions, call Customer Assistance.
system for the right front passenger’s position, which The phone numbers and addresses for Customer
includes sensors that are part of the passenger’s Assistance are in Step Two of the Customer
seat. The passenger sensing system may not Satisfaction Procedure in this manual. See
operate properly if the original seat trim is replaced Customer Satisfaction Procedure on page 7-2.
with non-GM covers, upholstery or trim, or with GM
In addition, your dealer/retailer and the service manual
covers, upholstery or trim designed for a different
have information about the location of the airbag sensors,
vehicle. Any object, such as an aftermarket seat
sensing and diagnostic module and airbag wiring.
heater or a comfort enhancing pad or device,
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
1-72
Restraint System Check Airbags
The airbag system does not need regularly scheduled
Checking the Restraint Systems maintenance or replacement. Make sure the airbag
readiness light is working. See Airbag Readiness Light
on page 3-31 for more information.
Safety Belts
Notice: If an airbag covering is damaged, opened,
Now and then, check that the safety belt reminder light,
or broken, the airbag may not work properly. Do not
safety belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors, and
open or break the airbag coverings. If there are any
anchorages are all working properly.
opened or broken airbag covers, have the airbag
Look for any other loose or damaged safety belt system covering and/or airbag module replaced. For the
parts that might keep a safety belt system from doing location of the airbag modules, see What Makes an
its job. See your dealer/retailer to have it repaired. Torn Airbag Inflate? on page 1-64. See your dealer/retailer
or frayed safety belts may not protect you in a crash. for service.
They can rip apart under impact forces. If a belt is torn
or frayed, get a new one right away.
Make sure the safety belt reminder light is working.
See Safety Belt Reminders on page 3-30 for more
information.
Keep safety belts clean and dry. See Care of Safety
Belts on page 5-93.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
1-73
Replacing Restraint System Parts If the vehicle has been in a crash, do you need new
safety belts or LATCH system (if equipped) parts?
After a Crash After a very minor crash, nothing may be necessary.
But the safety belt assemblies that were used during any
crash may have been stressed or damaged. See your
{ CAUTION: dealer/retailer to have the safety belt assemblies
inspected or replaced.
A crash can damage the restraint systems in your If the vehicle has the LATCH system and it was being
vehicle. A damaged restraint system may not used during a crash, you may need new LATCH
properly protect the person using it, resulting in system parts.
serious injury or even death in a crash. To help New parts and repairs may be necessary even if the
make sure your restraint systems are working safety belt or LATCH system (if equipped), was not
properly after a crash, have them inspected and being used at the time of the crash.
any necessary replacements made as soon as If an airbag inflates, you will need to replace airbag
possible. system parts. See the part on the airbag system earlier
in this section.
Have the safety belt pretensioners checked if the vehicle
has been in a crash, if the airbag readiness light stays
on after the vehicle is started, or while you are driving.
See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3-31.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
1-74
Section 2 Features and Controls
Keys ...............................................................2-3 Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ................2-21
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System ................2-4 New Vehicle Break-In ....................................2-21
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Ignition Positions ..........................................2-22
Operation ...................................................2-5 Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ...................2-23
Remote Vehicle Start ......................................2-7 Starting the Engine .......................................2-24
Doors and Locks ............................................2-10 Engine Coolant Heater ..................................2-25
Door Locks ..................................................2-10 Automatic Transmission Operation
Power Door Locks ........................................2-10 (Four Speed Transmission) .........................2-26
Door Ajar Reminder ......................................2-11 Automatic Transmission Operation
Delayed Locking ...........................................2-11 (Six Speed Transmission) ...........................2-28
Programmable Automatic Door Locks ..............2-11 Parking Brake ..............................................2-32
Rear Door Security Locks ..............................2-12 Shifting Into Park ..........................................2-33
Lockout Protection ........................................2-12 Shifting Out of Park ......................................2-34
Trunk ..........................................................2-12 Parking Over Things That Burn .......................2-34
Engine Exhaust ............................................2-35
Windows ........................................................2-15 Running the Vehicle While Parked ..................2-36
Power Windows ............................................2-16
Sun Visors ...................................................2-17 Mirrors ...........................................................2-37
Manual Rearview Mirror .................................2-37
Theft-Deterrent Systems ..................................2-18 Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror ................2-37
Content Theft-Deterrent .................................2-18 Compass .....................................................2-38
PASS-Key® III+ Electronic Immobilizer .............2-19 Outside Power Mirrors ...................................2-39
PASS-Key® III+ Electronic Immobilizer Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror ..................2-39
Operation .................................................2-20 Outside Heated Mirrors ..................................2-40
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
2-1
Section 2 Features and Controls
OnStar® System .............................................2-40 Instrument Panel Storage ...............................2-50
Universal Home Remote System ......................2-43 Front Storage Area .......................................2-50
Universal Home Remote System Operation Center Console Storage .................................2-50
(With Three Round LED) ............................2-44 Driver Storage Compartment ..........................2-51
Convenience Net ..........................................2-51
Storage Areas ................................................2-50
Glove Box ...................................................2-50 Sunroof .........................................................2-51
Cupholders ..................................................2-50
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
2-2
Keys
{ CAUTION:
Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition key
is dangerous for many reasons, children or others
could be badly injured or even killed. They could
operate the power windows or other controls or
even make the vehicle move. The windows will
function with the keys in the ignition and children
could be seriously injured or killed if caught in the
path of a closing window. Do not leave the keys in
a vehicle with children.
The key can be used for the ignition and all locks.
The key has a bar-coded key tag that the dealer/retailer
or qualified locksmith can use to make new keys.
Store this information in a safe place, not in your vehicle.
Notice: If you ever lock your keys in the vehicle,
you may have to damage the vehicle to get in.
Be sure you have spare keys.
If you are locked out of your vehicle, contact Roadside
Assistance. See Roadside Assistance Program on
page 7-7.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
2-3
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
System use this equipment.
If this vehicle has the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) If there is a decrease in the RKE operating range,
system, it operates on a radio frequency subject try this:
to Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Rules • Check the distance. The transmitter may be too far
and with Industry Canada. from the vehicle. Stand closer during rainy or snowy
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. weather.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: • Check the location. Other vehicles or objects may be
1. This device may not cause interference. blocking the signal. Take a few steps to the left or
right, hold the transmitter higher, and try again.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired • Check the transmitter’s battery. See “Battery
operation of the device. Replacement” later in this section.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. • If the transmitter is still not working correctly,
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: see your dealer/retailer or a qualified technician
1. This device may not cause interference. for service.
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
2-4
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) / (Remote Vehicle Start): For vehicles with this
feature, press to operate the remote start feature.
System Operation See Remote Vehicle Start on page 2-7 for additional
The Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter functions information.
work up to 195 feet (60 m) away from the vehicle.
Q (Lock): Press to lock all the doors. The interior
There are other conditions which can affect the lamps turn off after all of the doors are closed. If enabled
performance of the transmitter. See Remote Keyless through the Driver Information Center (DIC), the remote
Entry (RKE) System on page 2-4. lock feedback can be programmed to have the horn
chirp and/or the turn signals flash to confirm locking.
See “LOCK HORN” and “LIGHT FLASH” under DIC
Vehicle Personalization on page 3-50 for more
information.
Pressing Q may also arm the content theft-deterrent
system. See Content Theft-Deterrent on page 2-18.
K (Unlock): Press once to unlock the driver door.

Press K again within five seconds to unlock all
remaining doors. The interior lamps turn on and
stay on for 20 seconds or until the ignition is turned on.
If enabled through the DIC, the remote unlock feedback
With Remote Start can be programmed to have the horn chirp and/or the
Shown, Without Remote turn signals flash to confirm unlocking. See “UNLOCK
Start Similar HORN” and “LIGHT FLASH” under DIC Vehicle
Personalization on page 3-50 for more information.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
2-5
The high-beam headlamps, parking lamps, and Programming Transmitters to the
back-up lamps may come on each time K is pressed. Vehicle
See “EXT (Exterior) LIGHTS” under DIC Vehicle
Personalization on page 3-50 for additional information. Only RKE transmitters programmed to the vehicle
will work. If a transmitter is lost or stolen, a replacement
Pressing K on the RKE transmitter disarms the content can be purchased and programmed through your
theft-deterrent system. See Content Theft-Deterrent on dealer/retailer. When the replacement transmitter is
page 2-18. programmed to the vehicle, all remaining transmitters
must also be programmed. Any lost or stolen transmitters
V (Remote Trunk Release): Press and hold for no longer work once the new transmitter is programmed.
about one second to unlock the trunk. The trunk can be Each vehicle can have up to four transmitters
opened with the transmitter when the vehicle speed programmed to it.
is less than 2 mph (3 km/h) or when the ignition is off.
Battery Replacement
L (Vehicle Locator/Panic Alarm): Press and release
Replace the battery if the KEY FOB BATT (Battery)
to locate the vehicle. The horn sounds three times
LOW message displays in the DIC. See “KEY FOB BATT
and the headlamps and turn signals flash three times.
(Battery) LOW” under DIC Warnings and Messages
Press and hold L for about three seconds to initiate on page 3-46 for additional information.
the panic alarm. The horn sounds and the headlamps Notice: When replacing the battery, do not touch
and turn signals flash for 30 seconds. Press L again any of the circuitry on the transmitter. Static
to cancel the panic alarm. from your body could damage the transmitter.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
2-6
Remote Vehicle Start
Your vehicle may have a remote starting feature that
allows you to start the engine from outside the vehicle.
It may also start the vehicle’s heating or air conditioning
systems and rear window defogger. When the remote
start system is active and the vehicle has an automatic
climate control system, it will automatically regulate
the inside temperature. Normal operation of these
systems will return after the ignition key is turned
to ON/RUN.
Laws in some communities may restrict the use of
remote starters. For example, some laws may require
a person using remote start to have the vehicle in
view when doing so. Check local regulations for
any requirements on remote starting of vehicles.
To replace the battery:
Do not use the remote start feature if your vehicle is low
1. Separate the transmitter with a flat, thin object
on fuel. Your vehicle may run out of fuel.
inserted into the notch on the side.
2. Remove the old battery. Do not use a metal object. If your vehicle has the remote start feature, the RKE
transmitter functions will have an increased range
3. Insert the new battery, positive side facing up. of operation. However, the range may be less while
Replace with a CR2032 or equivalent battery. the vehicle is running.
4. Snap the transmitter back together.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
2-7
There are other conditions which can affect the If it is the first remote start since the vehicle has been
performance of the transmitter, see Remote Keyless driven, repeat the previous steps, while the engine is still
Entry (RKE) System on page 2-4 for additional running, to extend the engine running time by 10 minutes
information. from the time you repeat the steps for remote starting.
The remote start running time can be extended one time
/ (Remote Start): This button will be on the RKE and only after the first remote start.
transmitter if you have remote start. After entering the vehicle during a remote start, insert
To start the vehicle using the remote start feature: and turn the key to ON/RUN to drive the vehicle.
1. Aim the transmitter at the vehicle. The engine will shut off automatically after 10 minutes,
2. Press and release the transmitter’s lock button, unless a time extension has been done or the vehicle’s
then immediately press and hold the transmitter’s key is inserted into the ignition switch and turned to
remote start button for about four seconds or until the ON/RUN.
vehicle’s turn signal lamps flash. The doors will lock. To manually shut off a remote start, do any of the
When the vehicle starts, the parking lamps turn on following.
and remain on while the engine is running. • Aim the RKE transmitter at the vehicle and press
The remote start feature provides two separate starts and release the remote start button.
per ignition cycle, each with 10 minutes of engine running • Turn on the hazard warning flashers.
time, or one start with a time extension. The first start
must expire or be canceled to get two separate 10 minute • Turn the ignition switch out of LOCK/OFF position
starts. and then back to LOCK/OFF.
The parking lamps turn off to indicate the engine is off.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
2-8
After the engine has been started two times, or one Vehicles that have the remote vehicle start feature are
time with a time extension, the vehicle’s ignition must be shipped from the factory with the remote start system
turned to ON/RUN using the key before the remote start enabled. The system may be enabled or disabled
procedure can be used again. See Ignition Positions on through the DIC. See “REMOTE START” under DIC
page 2-22 for information regarding the ignition positions Vehicle Personalization on page 3-50 for additional
on your vehicle. information.
The remote vehicle start feature will not operate if any Remote Start Ready
of the follow occur:
• The remote start system is disabled through If your vehicle does not have the remote vehicle start
feature, it may have the remote start ready feature.
the DIC.
This feature allows your dealer/retailer to add the
• The vehicle’s key is in the ignition. manufacturer’s remote vehicle start feature.
• The vehicle’s hood is open. See your dealer/retailer if you would like to add the
manufacturer’s remote vehicle start feature to your
• The hazard warning flashers are on.
vehicle.
• The check engine light is on. See Malfunction
Indicator Lamp on page 3-38.
• The engine coolant temperature is too high.
• The oil pressure is low.
• Two remote vehicle starts, or one start with a time
extension, have already been provided for that
ignition cycle.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
2-9
Doors and Locks There are several ways to lock and unlock your vehicle.
From the outside, turn the key in the driver’s door
lock counterclockwise to lock the door and clockwise to
Door Locks unlock it or use the remote keyless entry transmitter.
From the inside, move the manual lock control on
the door or use the power door lock switch.
{ CAUTION:
Power Door Locks
Unlocked doors can be dangerous.
• Passengers, especially children, can easily On vehicles with power door locks, the switches are
open the doors and fall out of a moving vehicle. located on the front doors.
When a door is locked, the handle will not open
it. The chance of being thrown out of the
" (Unlock): Press to unlock the doors.
vehicle in a crash is increased if the doors are
not locked. So, all passengers should wear
Q (Lock): Remove the key from the ignition and press
safety belts properly and the doors should to lock the doors.
be locked whenever the vehicle is driven.
• Young children who get into unlocked vehicles
may be unable to get out. A child can be
overcome by extreme heat and can suffer
permanent injuries or even death from heat
stroke. Always lock the vehicle whenever
leaving it.
• Outsiders can easily enter through an unlocked
door when you slow down or stop your vehicle.
Locking your doors can help prevent this from
happening.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
2-10
Door Ajar Reminder Programmable Automatic Door
A chime will sound and the DOOR AJAR message Locks
will display if one of the doors is not fully closed.
This happens when the ignition is on and the shift The vehicle is programmed to lock all doors
lever is moved out of P (Park) or N (Neutral). automatically when the following are met:
See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-46. • All doors are closed.
• The ignition is on.
Delayed Locking • The vehicle is shifted out of (P) Park.
This feature will delay the actual locking of the doors This feature cannot be disabled.
and arming of the theft-deterrent system for five seconds
when the power door lock switch or remote keyless All doors will unlock when the vehicle is shifted into
entry transmitter is used to lock the vehicle. (P) Park.
If any door is open when locking the vehicle, three The power door unlock function can be programmed
chimes will sound signaling that the delayed locking through prompts displayed on the Driver Information
feature is active. Five seconds after the last door Center (DIC). See DIC Vehicle Personalization on
is closed, all of the doors will lock. To cancel the delay page 3-50.
and lock the doors immediately, press the lock button
on the remote keyless entry transmitter or the power
door lock switch a second time. The theft deterrent
system will arm after 30 seconds.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
2-11
Rear Door Security Locks Lockout Protection
The vehicle has rear door security locks to prevent If you press the power door lock switch when the key is
passengers from opening the rear doors from the inside. in the ignition and any door is open, all the doors will lock
and then the driver’s door will unlock. Be sure to remove
Open the rear doors to the key from the ignition when locking your vehicle.
access the security locks If the remote keyless entry transmitter is used to lock
on the inside edge of the doors while the key is in the ignition, a chime
each door. will sound three times. All doors will then lock.
Trunk
Press the trunk release button on the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter for one second to open the
trunk from the outside.
{ CAUTION:
To set the locks, insert a key into the slot and turn it to Exhaust gases can enter the vehicle if it is driven
the horizontal position. The door can only be opened from
with the liftgate, trunk/hatch open, or with any
the outside with the door unlocked. To return the door to
normal operation, turn the slot to the vertical position. objects that pass through the seal between the
body and the trunk/hatch or liftgate. Engine exhaust
contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which cannot be
seen or smelled. It can cause unconsciousness
and even death.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
2-12
Remote Trunk Release
Press the button located
on the driver door near
If the vehicle must be driven with the liftgate, or the map pocket to open
trunk/hatch open: the trunk.
• Close all of the windows.
• Fully open the air outlets on or under the
instrument panel.
• Adjust the Climate Control system to a setting
that brings in only outside air and set the fan
speed to the highest setting. See Climate
Control System in the Index.
• If the vehicle is equipped with a power liftgate,
disable the power liftgate function. The trunk can only be opened while the vehicle is in
P (Park) or when the ignition is off.
For more information about carbon monoxide, see
Engine Exhaust on page 2-35.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
2-13
Trunk Assist Handle Emergency Trunk Release Handle
There is an assist handle
located on the inside of
the trunk.
Use the assist handle to lower the trunk lid. The TRUNK
AJAR message will appear if the trunk is not properly
closed. See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-46 Notice: Do not use the emergency trunk release
for more information. handle as a tie-down or anchor point when securing
items in the trunk as it could damage the handle.
Notice: Using the trunk assist handle as a tie-down The emergency trunk release handle is only intended
or anchor point when securing items in the trunk to aid a person trapped in a latched trunk, enabling
may damage it. Use the trunk assist handle only to them to open the trunk from the inside.
help you close the trunk lid. There is a glow-in-the-dark emergency trunk release
handle located inside the trunk on the trunk latch.
This handle glows following exposure to light. Pull the
release handle up to open the trunk from the inside.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
2-14
Windows
{ CAUTION:
Leaving children, helpless adults, or pets in a
vehicle with the windows closed is dangerous.
They can be overcome by the extreme heat and
suffer permanent injuries or even death from heat
stroke. Never leave a child, a helpless adult, or a
pet alone in a vehicle, especially with the windows
closed in warm or hot weather.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
2-15
Power Windows Express-Up Window
On windows with this feature, pull the switch up to the
second position and release the switch to activate
the express-up feature. To stop the window as it is going
up, pull up or press down briefly on the switch again.
Programming the Power Windows

If the battery on the vehicle has been recharged,
disconnected, or is not working, the driver power window
will need to be re-programmed for the express-up
feature to work. Replace or recharge the vehicle’s
battery before reprogramming.
To program the driver window, follow these steps:
1. With the ignition in ACC/ACCESSORY, ON/RUN, or
when Retained Accessory Power (RAP) is active,
close all doors.
The power window switches are located on the armrest
2. Press and hold the power window switch until the
on the driver’s door. In addition, there is a switch on
window is fully open.
each passenger door.
3. Pull the power window switch up until the window is
Express-Down Window fully closed.
The driver window has an express-down feature. This 4. Continue holding the switch up for approximately
switch is labeled AUTO. Press the front all the way down two seconds after the window is completely
and release, to automatically lower. closed.
To stop the window while it is lowering, pull the front of The window is now reprogrammed.
the switch momentarily. To raise the window, pull
and hold the front of the switch.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
2-16
Express Window Anti-Pinch Feature Window Lockout
If any object is in the path of the window when The driver power window controls also include a lockout
the express-up is active, the window stops at the button.
obstruction and auto-reverse to a preset factory position.
Weather conditions such as severe icing may also o (Window Lockout): Press the lockout button to stop
cause the window to auto-reverse. The window returns the rear passengers from using their window switches.
to normal operation once the obstruction or condition The driver and front passenger can still operate all the
is removed. windows with the lock on. When the red part of the switch
is visible, you have returned to normal window operation.
Express Window Anti-Pinch Override
Sun Visors
{ CAUTION: To block out glare, you can swing down the visors.
You can also remove them from the center mount and
swing them to the side, to block out glare from the side.
If express override is activated, the window will
not reverse automatically. You or others could be Your vehicle may have lighted visor vanity mirrors
injured and the window could be damaged. Before located on the passenger and driver’s side visor.
you use express override, make sure that all people When you lift the cover, the light will turn on.
and obstructions are clear of the window path.
In an emergency, the anti-pinch feature can be

overridden in a supervised mode. Hold the window
switch all the way up to the second position. The window
rises for as long as the switch is held. Once the switch
is released, the express mode is re-activated.
In this mode, the window can still close on an object in
its path. Use care when using the override mode.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
2-17
Theft-Deterrent Systems The security light, located on the instrument panel
cluster, comes on to indicate that arming has been
Vehicle theft is big business, especially in some cities. initiated. Once the system is armed, the security light
This vehicle has theft-deterrent features, however, flashes once every three seconds.
they do not make it impossible to steal. If the security light is flashing twice per second, this
means that a door is open.
Content Theft-Deterrent If the system is armed and the key is used to unlock the
vehicle, the alarm will be activated.
Your vehicle may have a
If you do not want to arm the content theft system,
content theft-deterrent
lock the vehicle with the manual lock knob on the doors
alarm system.
or with the inside power door lock switches.
The alarm will sound and the exterior lights will flash if
any door is opened while armed.
Disarming the System

To disarm the system, do one of the following:
Arming the System
• Press the RKE transmitter unlock button.
With the ignition off, press the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter lock button to arm the system.
• Turn the ignition to ON/RUN.
Once the system is disarmed, the security light will stop
The system will arm 30 seconds after all the doors
flashing.
are closed, or 60 seconds with any door open.
If you press the lock button on the transmitter a second
time while all the doors are closed, the system will arm
immediately. The system will still arm in 60 seconds if a
door is open. When the open door is closed, the system
will arm.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
2-18
How the System Alarm is Activated PASS-Key® III+ Electronic
To activate the system if it is armed: Immobilizer
• Open the driver’s door or trunk. A ten second
pre-alarm chirp will sound followed by a The PASS-Key III+ system operates on a radio
thirty second full alarm of horn and lights. frequency subject to Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) Rules and with Industry Canada.
• Open any other door. A full alarm of horn and lights
will immediately sound for thirty seconds. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
• Open the hood. If the vehicle has the remote start Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
feature, it will activate the full alarm. 1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
When an alarm event has finished, the system will 2. This device must accept any interference received,
re-arm itself automatically. including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
How to Turn Off the System Alarm
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
To turn off the system alarm:
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
• Press the lock button on the RKE transmitter.
The system will then re-arm itself. 1. This device may not cause interference.
• Press the unlock button on the RKE transmitter. 2. This device must accept any interference received,
This will also disarm the system. including interference that may cause undesired
• Insert the key in the ignition and turn it on.
This will also disarm the system. Changes or modifications to this system by other than
How to Detect a Tamper Condition use this equipment.
If three chirps are heard when the unlock or lock button
PASS-Key III+ uses a radio frequency transponder in
is pressed on the RKE transmitter, it means that the
the key that matches a decoder in the vehicle.
content theft security system alarm was previously
triggered.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
2-19
PASS-Key® III+ Electronic If the engine still does not start, and the key appears
to be not damaged, try another ignition key. At this time,
Immobilizer Operation you may also want to check the fuse. See Fuses on
page 5-99. If the engine still does not start with the other
Your vehicle has PASS-Key® III+ (Personalized key, your vehicle needs service. If your vehicle does start,
Automotive Security System) theft-deterrent system. the first key may be faulty. See your dealer/retailer who
PASS-Key® III+ is a passive theft-deterrent system. can service the PASS-Key® III+ to have a new key made.
The system is automatically armed when the key In an emergency, contact Roadside Assistance.
is removed from the ignition. See Roadside Assistance Program on page 7-7.
You do not have to manually arm or disarm the system. It may be possible for the PASS-Key® III+ decoder to
“learn” the transponder value of a new or replacement
The security light will come on if there is a problem
key. Up to 10 keys may be programmed for the vehicle.
with arming or disarming the theft-deterrent system.
The following procedure is for programming additional
When the PASS-Key® III+ system senses that someone keys only. If all the currently programmed keys are lost
is using the wrong key, it prevents the vehicle from or do not operate, you must see your dealer/retailer or a
starting. Anyone using a trial-and-error method to start locksmith who can service PASS-Key® III+ to have keys
the vehicle will be discouraged because of the high made and programmed to the system.
number of electrical key codes.
See your dealer/retailer or a locksmith who can service
When trying to start the vehicle if the engine does not PASS-Key® III+ to get a new key blank that is cut
start and the security light on the instrument panel exactly as the ignition key that operates the system.
cluster comes on, there may be a problem with your
theft-deterrent system. Turn the ignition off and try again.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
2-20
To program the new key: Starting and Operating Your
1. Verify that the new key has a 1 stamped on it. Vehicle
2. Insert the already programmed key in the ignition
and start the engine. If the engine will not start,
see your dealer/retailer for service. New Vehicle Break-In
3. After the engine has started, turn the key to Notice: The vehicle does not need an elaborate
LOCK/OFF, and remove the key. break-in. But it will perform better in the long run if
4. Insert the key to be programmed and turn it to the you follow these guidelines:
ON/RUN position within five seconds of the original • Do not drive at any one constant speed, fast
key being turned to the LOCK/OFF position. or slow, for the first 500 miles (805 km).
The security light will turn off once the key has Do not make full-throttle starts. Avoid
been programmed. downshifting to brake or slow the vehicle.
5. Repeat Steps 1 through 4 if additional keys are to • Avoid making hard stops for the first 200 miles
be programmed. (322 km) or so. During this time the new brake
If you are ever driving and the security light comes on linings are not yet broken in. Hard stops with
and stays on, you may be able to restart your engine if new linings can mean premature wear and earlier
you turn it off. Your PASS-Key® III+ system, however, replacement. Follow this breaking-in guideline
is not working properly and must be serviced by your every time you get new brake linings.
dealer/retailer. Your vehicle is not protected by the • Do not tow a trailer during break-in. See Towing
PASS-Key® III+ system at this time. a Trailer on page 4-29 for the trailer towing
If the PASS-Key® III+ key is lost or damaged, see capabilities of your vehicle and more
your dealer/retailer or a locksmith who can service information.
PASS-Key® III+ to have a new key made. Following break-in, engine speed and load can be
Do not leave the key or device that disarms or gradually increased.
deactivates the theft deterrent system in the vehicle.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
2-21
Ignition Positions Notice: Using a tool to force the key to turn in the
ignition could cause damage to the switch or break
the key. Use the correct key, make sure it is all the
The ignition switch has
way in, and turn it only with your hand. If the key
four different positions.
cannot be turned by hand, see your dealer/retailer.
9 (LOCK/OFF): This position locks the ignition. It also

locks the transmission. The key can only be removed
in LOCK/OFF.
The shift lever must be in P (Park) to turn the ignition
switch to LOCK/OFF.
The steering can bind with the wheels turned off center.
If this happens, move the steering wheel from right
to left while turning the key to ACC/ACCESSORY.
If this doesn’t work, the vehicle needs service.
To shift out of P (Park), the ignition must be in ON/RUN ACC (ACC/ACCESSORY): This position lets you use
or ACC/ACCESSORY and the brake pedal must be things like the radio and windshield wipers while
applied. the engine is not running.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
2-22
R (ON/RUN): This position can be used to operate the Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
electrical accessories and to display some instrument
panel warning lights. The switch will stay in this position These vehicle accessories can be used for up to
while the engine is running. 10 minutes after the engine is turned off:
• Audio System
If you leave the key in the ACC/ACCESSORY or
ON/RUN position with the engine off, the battery could
• Power Windows
be drained. You may not be able to start the vehicle • Heated Seats (if equipped)
if the battery is allowed to drain for an extended period • Sunroof (if equipped)
of time. These features continue to work up to 10 minutes after
the ignition is turned to LOCK/OFF.
/ (START): This position starts the engine. When the
engine starts, release the key. The ignition switch will The power windows, heated seats, and sunroof will
return to the ON/RUN position for driving. work until any door is opened.
The radio continues to work until the driver door is
A warning tone will sound when the driver door is opened, opened.
the ignition is in ACC/ACCESSORY or LOCK/OFF and
the key is in the ignition. All these features operate when the key is in the
ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
2-23
Starting the Engine If the engine does not start and the key is held in
START, cranking will be stopped after 15 seconds
Move the shift lever to P (Park) or N (Neutral). to prevent cranking motor damage. To prevent gear
The engine will not start in any other position. damage, this system also prevents cranking if the
To restart the engine when the vehicle is already engine is already running. Engine cranking can be
moving, use N (Neutral) only. stopped by turning the ignition switch to the ACC/
ACCESSORY or LOCK/OFF position.
Notice: Do not try to shift to P (Park) if the
vehicle is moving. If you do, you could damage Notice: Cranking the engine for long periods of
the transmission. Shift to P (Park) only when the time, by returning the key to the START position
vehicle is stopped. immediately after cranking has ended, can overheat
and damage the cranking motor, and drain the
Starting Procedure battery. Wait at least 15 seconds between each try,
1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn the to let the cranking motor cool down.
ignition to START. When the engine starts, let go of 2. If the engine does not start after 5-10 seconds,
the key. The idle speed will slow down as the engine especially in very cold weather (below 0°F or −18°C),
warms. Do not race the engine immediately after it could be flooded with too much gasoline.
starting it. Operate the engine and transmission Try pushing the accelerator pedal all the way to
gently to allow the oil to warm up and lubricate all the floor and holding it there as you hold the key
moving parts. in START for up to a maximum of 15 seconds.
The vehicle has a Computer-Controlled Cranking Wait at least 15 seconds between each try, to allow
System. This feature assists in starting the engine the cranking motor to cool down. When the engine
and protects components. If the ignition key is turned starts, let go of the key and accelerator. If the vehicle
to the START position, and then released when the starts briefly but then stops again, repeat these
engine begins cranking, the engine will continue steps. This clears the extra gasoline from the engine.
cranking for a few seconds or until the vehicle starts. Do not race the engine immediately after starting it.
Operate the engine and transmission gently until the
oil warms up and lubricates all moving parts.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
2-24
Notice: The engine is designed to work with the
electronics in the vehicle. If you add electrical parts
or accessories, you could change the way the engine { CAUTION:
operates. Before adding electrical equipment, check
with your dealer/retailer. If you do not, the engine Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet could
might not perform properly. Any resulting damage cause an electrical shock. Also, the wrong kind of
would not be covered by the vehicle warranty.
extension cord could overheat and cause a fire.
You could be seriously injured. Plug the cord into a
Engine Coolant Heater properly grounded three-prong 110-volt AC outlet.
If the cord will not reach, use a heavy-duty
The engine coolant heater can provide easier starting
and better fuel economy during engine warm-up in cold three-prong extension cord rated for at least
weather conditions at or below 0°F (−18°C). Vehicles 15 amps.
with an engine coolant heater should be plugged in at
least four hours before starting the vehicle. An internal
3. Plug the cord into a normal, grounded 110-volt AC
thermostat in the plug-end of the cord may exist which will
outlet.
prevent engine coolant heater operation at temperatures
above 0°F (−18°C). 4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug and
store the cord as it was before to keep it away
To Use the Engine Coolant Heater from moving engine parts and prevent damage.
1. Turn off the engine. The length of time the heater should remain plugged in
depends on several factors. Ask a dealer/retailer in the
2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord.
area where you will be parking the vehicle for the best
On the 2.4L engine, the engine coolant heater cord
advice on this.
is located near the air cleaner box on the passenger
side of the engine compartment. On the 3.5L and
3.6L V6 engines, the engine coolant heater cord is
located on the driver side around the battery box.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-16
for more information on location.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
2-25
Automatic Transmission Operation
(Four Speed Transmission) { CAUTION:
The automatic It is dangerous to get out of the vehicle if the shift
transmission has lever is not fully in P (Park) with the parking brake
a shift lever located firmly set. The vehicle can roll.
on the console between
the seats. Do not leave the vehicle when the engine is
running unless you have to. If you have left the
engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly.
You or others could be injured. To be sure the
vehicle will not move, even when you are on fairly
level ground, always set the parking brake and
move the shift lever to P (Park). See Shifting Into
Park on page 2-33. If you are pulling a trailer, see
P (Park): This position locks the front wheels. It is the Towing a Trailer on page 4-29.
best position to use when you start the engine because
the vehicle cannot move easily.
Make sure the shift lever is fully in P (Park) before
starting the engine. The vehicle has an automatic
transmission shift lock control system. You must fully
apply the brake pedal and then press the shift lever
button before you can shift from P (Park) when the
ignition key is in ON/RUN. If you cannot shift out of
P (Park), ease pressure on the shift lever, then push
the shift lever all the way into P (Park) as you maintain
brake application. Then press the shift lever button and
move the shift lever into another gear. See Shifting Out of
Park on page 2-34.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
2-26
R (Reverse): Use this gear to back up. Notice: Shifting out of P (Park) or N (Neutral) with
the engine running at high speed may damage the
Notice: Shifting to R (Reverse) while the vehicle is transmission. The repairs would not be covered
moving forward could damage the transmission. by the vehicle warranty. Be sure the engine is not
The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle running at high speed when shifting the vehicle.
warranty. Shift to R (Reverse) only after the vehicle
is stopped. D (Drive): This position is for normal driving. It provides
To rock the vehicle back and forth to get out of snow, the best fuel economy. If you need more power for
ice or sand without damaging the transmission, see passing, and you are:
If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow • Going less than 35 mph (56 km/h), push the
on page 4-19. accelerator pedal about halfway down.
N (Neutral): In this position, the engine does not • Going about 35 mph (56 km/h) or more, push the
connect with the wheels. To restart the engine when accelerator all the way down.
the vehicle is already moving, use N (Neutral) only.
Also, use N (Neutral) when the vehicle is being towed. Notice: If the vehicle seems to start up rather
slowly or not shift gears when you go faster, and
you continue to drive the vehicle that way, you could
damage the transmission. Have the vehicle serviced
{ CAUTION: right away. You can drive in L2 (Low) when you are
driving less than 35 mph (56 km/h) and D (Drive) for
Shifting into a drive gear while the engine is higher speeds until then.
running at high speed is dangerous. Unless your
foot is firmly on the brake pedal, the vehicle could
move very rapidly. You could lose control and hit
people or objects. Do not shift into a drive gear
while the engine is running at high speed.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
2-27
I (Intermediate): This position is also used for normal Automatic Transmission Operation
driving. However, it reduces vehicle speed without using
the brakes for slight downgrades where the vehicle (Six Speed Transmission)
would otherwise accelerate. If constant upshifting or
downshifting occurs while driving up steep hills, this The automatic transmission
position can be used to prevent repetitive types of shifts. has a shift lever located
You might choose I (Intermediate) instead of D (Drive) on the console between
when driving on hilly, winding roads and when towing a the seats.
trailer, so that there is less shifting between gears.
L (Low): This position gives you access to 4 (Fourth),
3 (Third), 2 (Second) and 1 (First) gear ranges.
This provides more engine braking but lower fuel
economy than D (Drive). You can use it on very steep
hills, or in deep snow or mud. If the electronic range
select is put in L (Low), the transmission will not shift
into lower gears until the vehicle is going slow enough.
P (Park): This position locks the front wheels. It is the

best position to use when you start the engine because
the vehicle cannot move easily.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
2-28
Make sure the shift lever is fully in P (Park) before
starting the engine. The vehicle has an automatic
{ CAUTION: transmission shift lock control system. You must fully
apply the brake pedal then press the shift lever button
It is dangerous to get out of the vehicle if the shift before you can shift from P (Park) while the ignition key
lever is not fully in P (Park) with the parking brake is in ON/RUN. If you cannot shift out of P (Park), ease
pressure on the shift lever and push the shift lever all
firmly set. The vehicle can roll.
the way into P (Park) as you maintain brake application.
Do not leave the vehicle when the engine is Then move the shift lever into another gear. See Shifting
running unless you have to. If you have left the Out of Park on page 2-34.
engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly.
R (Reverse): Use this gear to back up.
You or others could be injured. To be sure the
vehicle will not move, even when you are on fairly Notice: Shifting to R (Reverse) while the vehicle is
level ground, always set the parking brake and moving forward could damage the transmission.
move the shift lever to P (Park). See Shifting Into The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle
Park on page 2-33. If you are pulling a trailer, see warranty. Shift to R (Reverse) only after the vehicle
is stopped.
Towing a Trailer on page 4-29.
To rock the vehicle back and forth to get out of snow,
ice, or sand without damaging the transmission, see If
Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow on
page 4-19.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
2-29
N (Neutral): In this position, the engine does not D (Drive): This position is for normal driving. It provides
connect with the wheels. To restart the engine when the best fuel economy. If you need more power for
the vehicle is already moving, use N (Neutral) only. passing, and you are:
Also, use N (Neutral) when the vehicle is being towed. • Going less than 35 mph (56 km/h), push the
accelerator pedal about halfway down.
{ CAUTION: • Going about 35 mph (56 km/h) or more, push the
accelerator all the way down.
Shifting into a drive gear while the engine is M (Manual Mode): This position, allows you to change
running at high speed is dangerous. Unless your gears similar to a manual transmission. If the vehicle
foot is firmly on the brake pedal, the vehicle could has this feature, see Driver Shift Control (DSC).
move very rapidly. You could lose control and hit
people or objects. Do not shift into a drive gear
Driver Shift Control (DSC)
while the engine is running at high speed. To use this feature, do the following:
1. Move the shift lever from D (Drive) rearward to
M (Manual).
Notice: Shifting out of P (Park) or N (Neutral) with
the engine running at high speed may damage the While driving in manual mode, the transmission will
transmission. The repairs would not be covered remain in the driver selected gear. When coming
by the vehicle warranty. Be sure the engine is not to a stop in the manual position, the vehicle
running at high speed when shifting the vehicle. will automatically shift into 1 (First) gear.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
2-30
The transmission will only allow you to shift into gears
appropriate for the vehicle speed and engine revolutions
per minute (RPM):
• The transmission will not automatically shift to the
next higher gear if the vehicle speed or engine
RPM is too low.
• The transmission will not allow shifting to the next
lower gear if the vehicle speed or engine RPM is
too high.
Second or Third Gear Start Feature
When accelerating the vehicle from a stop in snowy and
icy conditions, you may want to shift the gear select tap
switch into Second or Third gear. A higher gear allows
you to gain more traction on slippery surfaces.
2. Press the + (plus) paddle located on top of
the steering wheel controls forward to upshift, With the DSC feature, the vehicle can be set to pull
or push the backside of the shift paddle rearward away in Second or Third gear.
to downshift. 1. Move the shift lever from D (Drive) into the
The Driver Information Center (DIC) in the instrument M (Manual Mode).
cluster will change from the currently displayed message 2. With the vehicle stopped, press (+) end of the
to the letter “M”, For Manual position, and a number button to select Second or Third gear. The vehicle
indicating the requested gear range when moving will start from a stop position in Second or Third gear.
the shift lever forward or rearward.
3. Once moving select the desired drive gear.
While using the DSC feature the transmission will have
firmer shifting and sportier performance. You can use
this for sport driving or when climbing hills to stay in gear
longer or to downshift for more power or engine braking.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
2-31
Parking Brake the pedal release. If the parking brake is not released
when you begin to drive, the brake system warning light
comes on and a chime sounds as a warning that the
To set the parking brake,
parking brake is still on.
push down the parking
brake pedal with your left The PUSH PARK PEDAL message will also display
foot. If the ignition is on, the in the Driver Information Center (DIC) as a reminder
brake system warning light to release the parking brake. See DIC Warnings
will come on. See Brake and Messages on page 3-46.
System Warning Light on
Notice: Driving with the parking brake on can
page 3-34.
overheat the brake system and cause premature
wear or damage to brake system parts. Make sure
that the parking brake is fully released and the brake
warning light is off before driving.
To release the parking brake, hold the regular brake If you are towing a trailer and are parking on a hill, see
pedal down with your right foot. Push down momentarily Towing a Trailer on page 4-29.
on the parking brake pedal with your left foot until you feel
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
2-32
Shifting Into Park Leaving the Vehicle with the Engine
Running
{ CAUTION:
{ CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to get out of the vehicle if the
shift lever is not fully in P (Park) with the parking It can be dangerous to leave the vehicle with the
brake firmly set. The vehicle can roll. If you have engine running. The vehicle could move suddenly if
left the engine running, the vehicle can move the shift lever is not fully in P (Park) with the parking
suddenly. You or others could be injured. To be brake firmly set. And, if you leave the vehicle with
sure the vehicle will not move, even when you are the engine running, it could overheat and even
on fairly level ground, use the steps that follow. catch fire. You or others could be injured. Do not
If you are pulling a trailer, see Towing a Trailer leave the vehicle with the engine running.
on page 4-29.
If you have to leave the vehicle with the engine running,
1. Hold the brake pedal down and set the parking be sure the vehicle is in P (Park) and the parking brake is
brake. See Parking Brake on page 2-32 for more firmly set before you leave it. After you have moved the
information. shift lever into P (Park), hold the regular brake pedal
2. Move the shift lever into P (Park) by holding in the down. Then, see if you can move the shift lever away
button on the shift lever and pushing the shift lever from P (Park) without first pushing the button.
all the way toward the front of the vehicle. If you can, it means that the shift lever was not fully
3. Turn the ignition key to LOCK/OFF. locked in P (Park).
4. Remove the key and take it with you. If you can
leave the vehicle with the ignition key in your
hand, the vehicle is in P (Park).
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
2-33
Torque Lock If you cannot shift out of P (Park), ease pressure on
the shift lever and push the shift lever all the way into
Torque lock is when the weight of the vehicle puts P (Park) as you maintain brake application. Then press
too much force on the parking pawl in the transmission. the shift lever button and move the shift lever into the
This happens when parking on a hill and shifting the gear you wish.
transmission into P (Park) is not done properly and then it
is difficult to shift out of P (Park). To prevent torque lock,
set the parking brake and then shift into P (Park). To find Parking Over Things That Burn
out how, see “Shifting Into Park” listed previously.
If torque lock does occur, your vehicle may need to be
pushed uphill by another vehicle to relieve the parking { CAUTION:
pawl pressure, so you can shift out of P (Park).
Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust
Shifting Out of Park parts under the vehicle and ignite. Do not park
over papers, leaves, dry grass, or other things
The vehicle has an automatic transmission shift lock that can burn.
control system. You have to apply the brake pedal then
press the shift lever button before you can shift from
P (Park). See Automatic Transmission Operation
(Four Speed Transmission) on page 2-26 or Automatic
Transmission Operation (Six Speed Transmission) on
page 2-28.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
2-34
Engine Exhaust
{ CAUTION: • The vehicle’s exhaust system has been

modified, damaged or improperly repaired.
Engine exhaust contains Carbon Monoxide (CO)
• There are holes or openings in the
vehicle body from damage or after-market
which cannot be seen or smelled. Exposure to CO modifications that are not completely sealed.
can cause unconsciousness and even death.
If unusual fumes are detected or if it is suspected
Exhaust may enter the vehicle if: that exhaust is coming into the vehicle:
• The vehicle idles in areas with poor ventilation • Drive it only with the windows
(parking garages, tunnels, deep snow that completely down.
may block underbody airflow or tail pipes). • Have the vehicle repaired immediately.
• The exhaust smells or sounds strange or
different. Never park the vehicle with the engine running in an
enclosed area such as a garage or a building that
• The exhaust system leaks due to corrosion or has no fresh air ventilation.
damage.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
2-35
Running the Vehicle While Parked
It is better not to park with the engine running. But if you { CAUTION:
ever have to, here are some things to know.
It can be dangerous to get out of the vehicle
if the automatic transmission shift lever is not
{ CAUTION: fully in P (Park) with the parking brake firmly set.
The vehicle can roll. Do not leave the vehicle when
Idling a vehicle in an enclosed area with poor the engine is running unless you have to. If you
ventilation is dangerous. Engine exhaust may have left the engine running, the vehicle can move
enter the vehicle. Engine exhaust contains Carbon suddenly. You or others could be injured. To be
Monoxide (CO) which cannot be seen or smelled. sure the vehicle will not move, even when you are
It can cause unconsciousness and even death. on fairly level ground, always set the parking brake
Never run the engine in an enclosed area that and move the shift lever to P (Park).
has no fresh air ventilation. For more information,
see Engine Exhaust on page 2-35. Follow the proper steps to be sure the vehicle will not
move. See Shifting Into Park on page 2-33.
If parking on a hill and pulling a trailer, see Towing a
Trailer on page 4-29.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
2-36
Mirrors Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror
The vehicle may have an automatic dimming inside
Manual Rearview Mirror rearview mirror with a compass display and OnStar®
controls. See your dealer/retailer for more information
Hold the inside rearview mirror in the center to move it on the system and how to subscribe to OnStar®.
for a clearer view of behind your vehicle. Adjust the mirror See OnStar® System on page 2-40 for more information
to avoid glare from the headlamps behind. Push the tab about the services OnStar® provides.
forward for daytime use and pull it for nighttime use.
Vehicles with OnStar® have three additional control O (On/Off): Press to turn the dimming feature on
buttons located at the bottom of the mirror. See your or off.
dealer/retailer for more information on the system
and how to subscribe to OnStar®. See OnStar® System
Automatic Dimming Mirror Operation
on page 2-40 for more information about the services Automatic dimming reduces the glare of lights from
OnStar® provides. behind the vehicle. The dimming feature comes on and
the indicator light illuminates each time the vehicle is
started.
Cleaning the Mirror

Do not spray glass cleaner directly on the mirror.
Use a soft towel dampened with water.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
2-37
Compass To adjust for compass variance:
1. Find your current location and variance zone
Compass Operation number on the zone map that follows.
Press O to turn the compass display on or off.

When the ignition and the compass feature are on,
the compass displays the current compass direction
after a few seconds.
Compass Calibration
If after a few seconds the display does not show a
compass direction, (N for North for example), there may
be a strong magnetic field interfering with the compass.
Interference can be caused by a magnetic antenna
mount, note pad holder, or similar object. If the letter C
appears in the compass window, the compass may need
to be reset or calibrated.
The mirror can be calibrated by driving the vehicle very
slowly, in circles, until the display reads a direction.
Compass Variance
The mirror is set in zone eight. It is necessary to adjust 2. Press and hold O until a zone number displays.
the compass to compensate for compass variance if 3. Once the zone number displays, press O
the vehicle is driven outside zone eight. Under certain
repeatedly until the correct zone number is reached.
circumstances, such as a long distance, cross-country
If C appears in the compass window, the compass
trip, it is necessary to adjust the compass variance.
may need calibration. See “Compass Calibration”
listed previously.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
2-38
Outside Power Mirrors If you have these controls,
they are located on the
You may have one of the following power mirror driver door.
controls:
If you have these controls,

they are located near the
driver side mirror.
Use the selector switch located below the four-way

control panel to choose either the left or right outside
mirror. Then press the control pad to move the selected
mirror in the desired direction.
To maximize the viewing area, adjust each mirror so
you can see the side of your vehicle and the area beside
and behind your vehicle.
1. Press the left or right side of the selector switch
located above the control pad, to select the driver Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror
or passenger mirror.
2. Press one of the four buttons located on the control If the vehicle has this feature, the driver side mirror
pad to move the mirror to the desired direction. adjusts for the glare of headlamps behind your vehicle.
This feature is controlled by the on and off settings
on the automatic dimming inside rearview mirror.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
2-39
Outside Heated Mirrors Turn-by-Turn Navigation service, with one trial route, is
available on most vehicles. Press the OnStar button to
For vehicles with heated mirrors: have an OnStar advisor contact Roadside Service.
OnStar service is provided subject to the OnStar Terms
< (Rear Defogger): Press to heat the mirrors.
and Conditions included in the OnStar Subscriber
See “Rear Window Defogger” under Automatic Climate glove box literature.
Control System on page 3-24 for more information. Some services such as Remote Door Unlock or Stolen
Vehicle Location Assistance may not be available until
OnStar® System the owner of the vehicle registers with OnStar. After the
first prepaid year, contact OnStar to select a monthly or
annual subscription payment plan. If a payment plan
is not selected, the OnStar system and all services,
including airbag notification and emergency services,
may be deactivated and no longer available. For more
information visit onstar.com (U.S.) or onstar.ca (Canada),
or press the OnStar button to speak with an advisor.
Not all OnStar services are available on all vehicles.
To check if this vehicle is able to provide the services
OnStar uses several innovative technologies and live described below, or for a full description of OnStar
advisors to provide a wide range of safety, security, services and system limitations, see the OnStar Owner’s
information, and convenience services. If the airbags Guide in the glove box or visit onstar.com (U.S.) or
deploy, the system is designed to make an automatic onstar.ca (Canada), contact OnStar at 1-888-4-ONSTAR
call to OnStar Emergency advisors who can request (1-888-466-7827) or TTY 1-877-248-2080, or press the
emergency services be sent to your location. If the keys OnStar button to speak with an OnStar advisor 24 hours
are locked in the vehicle, call OnStar at 1-888-4-ONSTAR a day, 7 days a week.
to have a signal sent to unlock the doors. OnStar
Hands-Free Calling, including 30 trial minutes good for
60 days, is available on most vehicles. OnStar
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
2-40
OnStar Services Available with the OnStar Hands-Free Calling
Safe & Sound Plan OnStar Hands-Free Calling allows eligible OnStar
• Automatic Notification of Airbag Deployment subscribers to make and receive calls using voice
commands. Hands-Free Calling is fully integrated into the
• Advanced Automatic Crash Notification (AACN) vehicle, and can be used with OnStar Pre-Paid Minute
(If equipped) Packages. Most vehicles include 30 trial minutes good
• Link to Emergency Services for 60 days. Hands-Free Calling can also be linked to
a Verizon Wireless service plan in the U.S. or a Bell
• Roadside Assistance Mobility service plan in Canada, depending on eligibility.
• Stolen Vehicle Location Assistance To find out more, refer to the OnStar Owner’s Guide in
the vehicle’s glove box, visit onstar.com or onstar.ca, or
• Remote Door Unlock/Vehicle Alert speak with an OnStar advisor by pressing the OnStar
• OnStar Vehicle Diagnostic Email button or calling 1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827).
• GM Goodwrench On Demand Diagnostics OnStar Turn-by-Turn Navigation

• OnStar Hands-Free Calling with 30 trial minutes Vehicles with the OnStar Turn-by-Turn Navigation
• OnStar Virtual Advisor (U.S. Only) system can provide voice-guided driving directions.
Press the OnStar button to have an OnStar advisor
OnStar Services Included with locate a business or address and download driving
directions to the vehicle. Voice-guided directions to the
Directions & Connections Plan desired destination will play through the audio system
• All Safe and Sound Plan Services speakers. See the OnStar Owner’s Guide for more
information.
• OnStar Turn-by-Turn Navigation (If equipped) or
Driving Directions - Advisor delivered
• RideAssist
• Information and Convenience Services
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
2-41
OnStar Virtual Advisor How OnStar Service Works
OnStar Virtual Advisor is a feature of OnStar The OnStar system can record and transmit vehicle
Hands-Free Calling that uses minutes to access information. This information is automatically sent to an
location-based weather, local traffic reports, and OnStar Call Center when the OnStar button is pressed,
stock quotes. Press the phone button and give a the emergency button is pressed, or if the airbags or
few simple voice commands to browse through the AACN system deploy. This information usually includes
various topics. See the OnStar Owner’s Guide for the vehicle’s GPS location and, in the event of a crash,
more information. This feature is only available in additional information regarding the crash that the vehicle
the continental U.S. was involved in (e.g. the direction from which the vehicle
was hit). When the Virtual Advisor feature of OnStar
OnStar Steering Wheel Controls Hands-Free Calling is used, the vehicle also sends
OnStar the vehicle’s GPS location so they can provide
This vehicle may have a Talk/Mute button that can
services where it is located.
be used to interact with OnStar Hands-Free Calling.
See Audio Steering Wheel Controls on page 3-89 OnStar service cannot work unless the vehicle is in a
for more information. place where OnStar has an agreement with a wireless
service provider for service in that area. OnStar service
On some vehicles, the mute button can be used to
also cannot work unless the vehicle is in a place where
dial numbers into voice mail systems, or to dial phone
the wireless service provider OnStar has hired for that
extensions. See the OnStar Owner’s Guide for more
area has coverage, network capacity and reception when
information.
the service is needed, and technology that is compatible
with the OnStar service. Not all services are available
everywhere, particularly in remote or enclosed areas,
or at all times.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
2-42
Location information about the vehicle is only available
if the GPS satellite signals are unobstructed and
Universal Home Remote
available. System
The vehicle must have a working electrical system, The Universal Home Remote System provides a way to
including adequate battery power, for the OnStar replace up to three hand-held Radio-Frequency (RF)
equipment to operate. There are other problems OnStar transmitters used to activate devices such as garage
cannot control that may prevent OnStar from providing door openers, security systems, and home lighting.
OnStar service at any particular time or place. Some
examples are damage to important parts of the vehicle This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
in a crash, hills, tall buildings, tunnels, weather or Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
wireless phone network congestion. 1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
Your Responsibility 2. This device must accept any interference received,
Increase the volume of the radio if the OnStar advisor operation.
cannot be heard. If the light next to the OnStar buttons is
red, the system may not be functioning properly. Press This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
the OnStar button and request a vehicle diagnostic. If the Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
light appears clear (no light is appearing), your OnStar 1. This device may not cause interference.
subscription has expired and all services have been
deactivated. Press the OnStar button to confirm that the 2. This device must accept any interference received,
OnStar equipment is active. including interference that may cause undesired
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
use this equipment.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
2-43
Universal Home Remote System Do not use this system with any garage door opener
that does not have the stop and reverse feature.
Operation (With Three Round LED) This includes any garage door opener model
manufactured before April 1, 1982.
Read the instructions completely before attempting to
program the transmitter. Because of the steps involved,
it may be helpful to have another person assist with
programming the transmitter.
Be sure to keep the original remote control transmitter
for use in other vehicles, as well as, for future
programming. Only the original remote control
transmitter is needed for Fixed Code programming.
This vehicle may have the Universal Home Remote The programmed buttons should be erased when the
System. If there are three round Light Emitting vehicle is sold or the lease ends. See “Erasing Universal
Diode (LED) indicator lights above the Universal Home Remote Buttons” later in this section.
Home Remote buttons, follow the instructions below.
Park the vehicle outside of the garage when
This system provides a way to replace up to three programming a garage door. Be sure that people
remote control transmitters used to activate devices and objects are clear of the garage door or gate
such as garage door openers, security systems, that is being programmed.
and home automation devices.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
2-44
Programming Universal Home
Remote — Rolling Code
For questions or help programming the Universal
Home Remote System, call 1-866-572-2728 or go
to learcar2u.com.
Most garage door openers sold after 1996 are Rolling
Code units.
Programming a garage door opener involves
time-sensitive actions, so read the entire procedure
before starting. Otherwise, the device will time out
and the procedure will have to be repeated.
To program up to three devices:
2. Locate in the garage, the garage door opener

receiver (motor-head unit). Locate the “Learn” or
“Smart” button. It can usually be found where the
hanging antenna wire is attached to the motor-head
unit and may be a colored button. Press this button.
After pressing this button, complete the following
steps in less than 30 seconds.
1. From inside the vehicle, press the two outside 3. Immediately return to the vehicle. Press and hold
buttons at the same time for one to two seconds, the Universal Home Remote button that will be used
and immediately release them. to control the garage door until the garage door
moves. The indicator light, above the selected
button, should slowly blink. This button may need
to be held for up to 20 seconds.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
2-45
4. Immediately, within one second, release the button To program up to three devices:
when the garage door moves. The indicator light
will blink rapidly until programming is complete.
5. Press and release the same button again.
The garage door should move, confirming
that programming is successful and complete.
To program another Rolling Code device such as an
additional garage door opener, a security device,
or home automation device, repeat Steps 1 through 5,
choosing a different function button in Step 3 than
what was used for the garage door opener.
If these instructions do not work, the garage door
opener is probably a Fixed Code unit. Follow the
Programming instructions that follow for a Fixed Code
garage door opener.
Programming Universal Home 1. To verify that the garage door opener is a Fixed
Remote — Fixed Code Code unit, remove the battery cover on the hand
held transmitter supplied by the manufacturer of the
For questions or help programming the Universal garage door opener motor. If there are a row of dip
Home Remote System, call 1-866-572-2728 or go to switches similar to the graphic above, the garage
learcar2u.com. door opener is a Fixed Code unit. If you do not
Most garage door openers sold before 1996 are Fixed see a row of dip switches, return to the previous
Code units. section for Programming Universal Home
Remote – Rolling Code.
Programming a garage door opener involves
time-sensitive actions, so read the entire procedure Your hand held transmitter can have between
before starting. Otherwise, the device will time out eight to 12 dip switches depending on the brand
and the procedure will have to be repeated. of transmitter.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
2-46
The garage door opener receiver (motor head unit)
could also have a row of dip switches that can
be used when programming the Universal Home
Remote. If the total number of switches on the motor
head and hand held transmitter are different, or if the
dip switch settings are different, use the dip switch
settings on the motor head unit to program the
Universal Home Remote. The motor head dip switch
settings can also be used when the original hand
held transmitter is not available.
Example of Eight Dip Switches with Three Positions
The panel of switches might not appear exactly as

they do in the examples above, but they should
be similar.
The switch positions on the hand-held transmitter
could be labeled, as follows:
• A switch in the up position could be labeled as
“Up,” “+,” or “On.”
Example of Eight Dip Switches with Two Positions • A switch in the down position could be labeled
as “Down,” “−,” or “Off.”
• A switch in the middle position could be labeled
as “Middle,” “0,” or “Neutral.”
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
2-47
2. Write down the eight to 12 switch settings from left
to right as follows:
• When a switch is in the up position, write “Left.”
• When a switch is in the down position,
write “Right.”
• If a switch is set between the up and down
position, write “Middle.”
The switch settings written down in Step 2 now
become the button strokes to be entered into the
Universal Home Remote in Step 4. Be sure to
enter the switch settings written down in Step 2,
in order from left to right, into the Universal Home
Remote, when completing Step 4.
3. From inside your vehicle, first firmly press all three
buttons at the same time for about three seconds. 4. The indicator lights will blink slowly. Enter each
Release the buttons to put the Universal Home switch setting from Step 2 into your vehicle’s
Remote into programming mode. Universal Home Remote. You will have two and
one-half minutes to complete Step 4. Now press
one button on the Universal Home Remote for
each switch setting as follows:
• If you wrote “Left,” press the left button in the
vehicle.
• If you wrote “Right,” press the right button in the
vehicle.
• If you wrote “Middle,” press the middle button in
the vehicle.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
2-48
5. After entering all of the switch positions, again, Reprogramming Universal Home
firmly press and release all three buttons at the
same time. The indicator lights will turn on. Remote Buttons
6. Press and hold the button that will be used to Any of the three buttons can be reprogrammed by
control the garage door until the garage door repeating the instructions.
moves. The indicator light above the selected
button should slowly blink. This button may Erasing Universal Home Remote
need to be held for up to 55 seconds. Buttons
7. Immediately release the button when the garage The programmed buttons should be erased when the
door moves. The indicator light will blink rapidly vehicle is sold or the lease ends.
until programming is complete.
To erase either Rolling Code or Fixed Code on the
8. Press and release the same button again. Universal Home Remote device:
The garage door should move, confirming
that programming is successful and complete. 1. Press and hold the two outside buttons at the
same time for approximately 20 seconds, until
To program another Fixed Code device such as an the indicator lights, located directly above the
additional garage door opener, a security device, buttons, begin to blink rapidly.
or home automation device, repeat Steps 1-8, choosing
a different button in Step 6 than what was used for 2. Once the indicator lights begin to blink, release both
the garage door opener. buttons. The codes from all buttons will be erased.
For help or information on the Universal Home Remote
Using Universal Home Remote System, call the customer assistance phone number
Press and hold the appropriate button for at least half under Customer Assistance Offices on page 7-6.
of a second. The indicator light will come on while
the signal is being transmitted.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
2-49
Storage Areas Front Storage Area
A storage area is located in front of the shift lever.
Glove Box Push the bottom of the door and the storage will
automatically open.
Pull the handle up to open.
Center Console Storage
Cupholders
The center console storage area has a storage tray
Removable cupholders are located in front of the center and a main storage. Pull up on the driver side latch to
console. See “Center Console Storage Area” following access the storage tray. Pull up on the passenger side
for how to access them. Press and hold the tab at latch to access the main storage. There is a removable
the rear of the cupholders and lift up and rearward to divider and may be a storage pocket located at the rear
remove the cupholders. This will disengage the two of the center console.
forward tabs.
The armrest on top of the center console can be
To reinstall them, place the two forward tabs into the adjusted to a rearward, middle, and forward position.
slots and push the rear of the cupholder down. Pull or push the front of the armrest to adjust to
For vehicles with rear seat cupholders, pull down the the desired position.
door on the back of the center console to access them. Another storage area is located in front of the main
storage. Push down and then forward on the rear of the
Instrument Panel Storage cover to access. There is a storage tray and removable
cupholders.
An instrument panel storage area, with a removable
liner, is located above the radio. Slide the latch toward
the back of the vehicle to open the storage area.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
2-50
Driver Storage Compartment The sunroof only operates when the ignition is in
ON/RUN, ACC/ACCESSORY, or if Retained Accessory
A driver storage compartment is located near the Power (RAP) is active. See Retained Accessory
left side of the steering column on the bottom of Power (RAP) on page 2-23.
the instrument panel. Pull the cover down to open. Press and release the back of the switch to open the
Pull out to remove for cleaning. sunroof to the vent position. From the vent position, press
and release the back of the switch to express-open the
Convenience Net sunroof. To stop the sunroof from express opening, press
the switch again. If the sunshade is closed, it will open
Use the convenience net, located in the rear, to store automatically when the sunroof opens past the vented
small loads as far forward as possible. The net should not position.
be used to store heavy loads.
A deflector will automatically raise when the sunroof is
opened. The deflector will retract when the sunroof
Sunroof is closed.
To close the sunroof, press the front of the switch and
On vehicles with a sunroof, hold it until the sunroof is closed. The sunroof will stop if
the switch is located on the switch is released. Close the sunshade by hand.
the headliner between the
map lamps. The sunroof glass panel cannot be opened or closed if
the vehicle has an electrical failure.
Notice: Forcing the sunshade forward of the
sliding glass panel may cause damage and the
sunroof may not operate properly. Always close
the glass panel before closing the sunshade.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
2-51
✍ NOTES
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
2-52
Section 3 Instrument Panel
Instrument Panel Overview ...............................3-4 Electric Power Management ...........................3-17
Hazard Warning Flashers ................................3-6 Battery Run-Down Protection ..........................3-18
Horn .............................................................3-6 Accessory Power Outlet(s) .............................3-18
Tilt and Telescopic Steering Wheel ...................3-6 Power Outlet 115 Volt Alternating Current ........3-19
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever .........................3-7 Climate Controls ............................................3-20
Turn and Lane-Change Signals ........................3-7 Climate Control System .................................3-20
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer ..................3-8 Automatic Climate Control System ...................3-24
Flash-to-Pass .................................................3-8 Outlet Adjustment .........................................3-27
Windshield Wipers ..........................................3-8
Windshield Washer .........................................3-9 Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators ............3-28
Cruise Control ..............................................3-10 Instrument Panel Cluster ................................3-29
Headlamps ..................................................3-13 Speedometer and Odometer ...........................3-30
Headlamps on Reminder ................................3-14 Trip Odometer ..............................................3-30
Headlamps Off in Park ..................................3-14 Tachometer .................................................3-30
Delayed Headlamps ......................................3-14 Safety Belt Reminders ...................................3-30
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) .......................3-14 Airbag Readiness Light ..................................3-31
Automatic Headlamp System ..........................3-15 Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ...................3-32
Fog Lamps ..................................................3-15 Charging System Light ..................................3-33
Instrument Panel Brightness ...........................3-16 Brake System Warning Light ..........................3-34
Dome Lamps ...............................................3-16 Antilock Brake System (ABS) Warning Light .....3-35
Entry/Exit Lighting .........................................3-16 Electronic Stability Control (ESC)/Traction
Parade Dimming ...........................................3-16 Control System (TCS) Indicator/Warning
Reading Lamps ............................................3-16 Light ........................................................3-35
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-1
Section 3 Instrument Panel
Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light ......3-36 Audio System(s) .............................................3-56
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage ..................3-37 Setting the Clock ..........................................3-57
Tire Pressure Light .......................................3-37 Radio(s) ......................................................3-59
Malfunction Indicator Lamp .............................3-38 Using an MP3 ..............................................3-71
Oil Pressure Light .........................................3-41 XM Radio Messages .....................................3-77
Security Light ...............................................3-41 Bluetooth® ...................................................3-78
Cruise Control Light ......................................3-42 Theft-Deterrent Feature ..................................3-89
Highbeam On Light .......................................3-42 Audio Steering Wheel Controls .......................3-89
Fuel Gage ...................................................3-42 Radio Reception ...........................................3-91
Driver Information Center (DIC) .......................3-43 Backglass Antenna .......................................3-92
DIC Operation and Displays ...........................3-44 XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System .............3-92
DIC Warnings and Messages .........................3-46 Chime Level Adjustment ................................3-92
DIC Vehicle Personalization ............................3-50
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-2
✍ NOTES
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-3
Instrument Panel Overview
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-4
The main components of the instrument panel are the following:
A. Outlet Adjustment on page 3-27. L. Tilt and Telescopic Steering Wheel on page 3-6.
B. Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever on page 3-7. M. Horn on page 3-6.
C. Driver Shift Control (If Equipped). Automatic N. Audio Steering Wheel Controls on page 3-89
Transmission Operation (Four Speed Transmission) (If Equipped).
on page 2-26 or Automatic Transmission Operation O. Ignition Positions on page 2-22.
(Six Speed Transmission) on page 2-28.
P. Climate Control System on page 3-20 or Automatic
D. Instrument Panel Cluster on page 3-29. Climate Control System on page 3-24.
E. Windshield Wipers on page 3-8 and Windshield Q. Hazard Warning Flashers on page 3-6.
Washer on page 3-9.
R. Shift Lever. See Automatic Transmission Operation
F. Instrument Panel Storage on page 2-50. (Four Speed Transmission) on page 2-26 or
G. Audio System(s) on page 3-56. Automatic Transmission Operation (Six Speed
H. Instrument Panel Brightness on page 3-16. Transmission) on page 2-28.
Fog Lamps on page 3-15. S. Front Storage Area on page 2-50. Accessory Power
I. Driver Storage Compartment on page 2-51. Outlet(s) on page 3-18.
J. Hood Release on page 5-14. T. Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 3-32.
K. Cruise Control on page 3-10. Driver Information U. Traction Control System (TCS) on page 4-8.
Center (DIC) on page 3-43. V. Glove Box on page 2-50.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-5
Hazard Warning Flashers Tilt and Telescopic Steering Wheel
A tilt and telescope wheel lets the steering wheel
| (Hazard Warning Flasher): Press this button
be adjusted.
located on the instrument panel, to make the front and
rear turn signal lamps flash on and off. This warns
others that you are having trouble.
Press | again to turn the flashers off.
Horn
Press near or on the horn symbols on the steering
wheel pad to sound the horn.
The lever is located on the left side of the steering

column.
To tilt and telescope the steering wheel, pull down the
lever. Then move the steering wheel up or down or
backward or forward into a comfortable position. Pull the
lever up to lock the steering wheel in place.
Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-6
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever Turn and Lane-Change Signals
An arrow on the instrument
panel cluster flashes in the
direction of the turn or
lane change.
Move the lever all the way up or down to signal a turn.

Raise or lower the lever until the arrow starts to flash
to signal a lane change. Hold it there until lane change
The lever on the left side of the steering column is complete.
includes the following:
The lever returns to its starting position when it is
G: Turn and Lane-Change Signals released.
If after signaling a turn or lane change the arrows flash
53: Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer rapidly or do not come on, a signal bulb could be
burned out.
O: Exterior Lamp Control
Have the bulbs replaced. If the bulb is not burned out,
Flash-to-Pass. check the fuse. See Fuses on page 5-99.
Information for these features is on the pages following.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-7
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer Windshield Wipers
To change the headlamps from low beam to high beam,
push the turn signal/multifunction lever away from you.
This instrument panel cluster light 3 comes on if the
high beam lamps are turned on while the ignition
is in ON/RUN.
To change the headlamps from high beam to low beam,
pull the turn signal lever toward you.
Flash-to-Pass
This feature lets the high-beam headlamps be used to
signal a driver in front of you that you want to pass. The windshield wiper lever is located on the right side of
Pull the turn signal/multifunction lever toward you until the steering wheel.
the high-beam headlamps come on, then release Move the lever to control the windshield wipers.
the lever to turn them off.
9 (Off): Turns off the windshield wipers.
& (Intermittent; Speed Sensitive Wipers): For

intermittent or speed sensitive operation. The amount
of delay time varies between wiping cycles due to the
delay setting selected or the speed of the vehicle. As
vehicle speed is increased or decreased, the wiper
interval also increases or decreases.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-8
x (Delay): While the lever is in the intermittent As an added safety feature, if the wipers are on for
position, turn the intermittent adjust band with this more than 15 seconds, the vehicle’s headlamps turn on
symbol on it up or down to select a shorter or longer automatically. They turn off 15 seconds after the
delay between wiping cycles. To the left of the wipers are turned off.
adjust band are bars, increasing in size from bottom to
top, that indicate the frequency of the wipes. Smaller Windshield Washer
bars mean the wipers movement is less frequent. Larger
bars mean the movement is more frequent. Press the button at the end of the windshield wiper
lever until the washers begin.
6 (Low Speed): For steady wiping at low speed.
1 (High Speed): For wiping at a high speed. { CAUTION:

8 (Mist): Move the lever all the way down for a single
wiping cycle. Hold it there until the windshield wipers In freezing weather, do not use your washer until
start; then release. The wipers stop after one wiping the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the washer
cycle. Hold the lever down longer, for more wipe cycles. fluid can form ice on the windshield, blocking your
Clear ice and snow from the wiper blades before vision.
using them.
If the wiper blades are frozen to the windshield, carefully When the button is released, the washers stop, but the
loosen or thaw them. If they become damaged, install wipers continue to wipe about three times or resume
new blades. the previous speed.
Heavy snow or ice can overload the wiper motor. A circuit
breaker stops the motor until it cools. If the motor gets
stuck, turn the wipers off, clear away the snow or ice, and
then turn the wipers back on.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-9
Cruise Control Setting Cruise Control
Cruise control lets a speed of about 25 mph (40 km/h) or
more be maintained without keeping your foot on the { CAUTION:
accelerator. This can really help on long trips. Cruise
control does not work at speeds below 25 mph (40 km/h).
If you leave your cruise control on when you are
not using cruise, you might hit a button and go
{ CAUTION: into cruise when you do not want to. You could be
startled and even lose control. Keep the cruise
control switch off until you want to use cruise
Cruise control can be dangerous where you
control.
cannot drive safely at a steady speed. So, do not
use the cruise control on winding roads or in
heavy traffic.
Cruise control can be dangerous on slippery roads.
On such roads, fast changes in tire traction can
cause excessive wheel slip, and you could lose
control. Do not use cruise control on slippery roads.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-10
The cruise control buttons To set a speed do the following:
are located on the steering
wheel. 1. Press I to turn cruise control on. The indicator
light on the button comes on.
2. Get up to the desired speed.
3. Press the SET− and release it. The cruise symbol
displays in the instrument panel cluster to show the
system is engaged.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
When the brakes are applied, the cruise control
shuts off.
I (On/Off): Press to turn the cruise control system on If the vehicle is in cruise control and the Traction Control
and off. System (TCS) or Enhanced Traction System (ETS)
RES+ (Resume): Press to resume a set speed and to begins to limit wheel spin, the cruise control automatically
accelerate the speed. disengages. See Traction Control System (TCS) on
page 4-8 and Electronic Stability Control (ESC) on
SET− (Set): Press to set a speed and to decrease the page 4-6. When road conditions allow, the cruise control
speed. can be used again.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-11
Resuming a Set Speed Reducing Speed While Using Cruise
If the cruise control is set at a desired speed and then Control
the brakes are applied, the cruise control is disengaged. If the cruise control system is already engaged:
The cruise symbol in the instrument panel cluster also
goes out indicating cruise is no longer engaged. To • Push and hold the SET− until the desired lower
return to the previously set speed, you do not need to speed is reached, then release it.
repeat the set process again. Once at a speed of about • To slow down in very small amounts, briefly push
25 mph (40 km/h) or more, briefly press the RES+. the SET−. Each time this is done, the vehicle
This takes the vehicle back up to the previously chosen goes about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) slower.
speed and stays there.
Passing Another Vehicle While Using
Increasing Speed While Using Cruise Cruise Control
Control Use the accelerator pedal to increase the vehicle’s
There are two ways to go to a higher speed. speed. When you take your foot off the pedal, the vehicle
slows down to the previously set cruise control speed.
• If the cruise control system is already engaged,
press the RES+. Hold it there until the desired Using Cruise Control on Hills
speed is reached and then release the button.
How well the cruise control works on hills depends upon
• To increase the vehicle speed in very small the vehicle’s speed, load, and the steepness of the hills.
amounts, briefly press the RES+ and then release When going up steep hills, you might have to step on the
it. Each time this is done, the vehicle goes about accelerator pedal to maintain the vehicle’s speed. When
1 mph (1.6 km/h) faster. going downhill, you might have to brake or shift to a lower
gear to keep the vehicle at a lower speed. When the
brakes are applied this ends the cruise control.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-12
Ending Cruise Control The exterior lamp control has the following four
positions:
There are two ways to disengage the cruise control:
• Step lightly on the brake pedal to disengage 2 (Headlamps): Turns on the headlamps, parking
the cruise control. lamps, and taillamps.
• Press the on/off button, to turn off the cruise ; (Parking Lamps): Turns on the parking lamps and
control. taillamps only.
Erasing Speed Memory AUTO (Automatic Headlamp System): Automatically
The cruise control set speed memory is erased when turns on the Daytime Running Lamps during daytime,
the cruise control or the ignition are turned off. and the headlamps, parking lamps, and taillamps
at night.
Headlamps P (Off/On): Turn the band to this position to turn on
the Automatic Headlamp System. In Canada, this
position only works when a vehicle is in the P (Park)
position.
To turn on the Automatic Headlamp System, turn the
switch to off/on. To turn them off, turn the switch to off/on
again. This is a momentary control switch that springs
back when released. The Automatic Headlamp System
always turns on at the beginning of an ignition cycle.
The band on the lever on the outboard side of the

steering column operates the exterior lamps.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-13
Headlamps on Reminder Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
If the driver’s door is opened and the ignition is turned Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier for
off while leaving the lamps on, a warning chime will others to see the front of your vehicle during the day.
sound. Fully functional DRL are required on all vehicles first sold
in Canada. The vehicle has a light sensor on top of the
instrument panel that controls the DRL. Do not cover this
Headlamps Off in Park sensor or the head lamps will be on when they are not
This feature works when the ignition is in the ON/RUN needed.
position and it is dark outside. To turn the headlamps The DRL system makes the low-beam headlamps come
off when it is dark outside but keep other exterior lights on at a reduced brightness when the following conditions
on, turn the exterior lamp control to the parking lamp are met:
position.
• The ignition is on.
To turn on the headlamps along with the other lamps
when it is dark outside, turn the exterior lamp control to • The exterior lamps control is in AUTO.
the AUTO or headlamp position. • The exterior lamps control is in the parking lamps
This function does not work for vehicles first sold in only position (This applies only to vehicles that are
Canada. first sold in Canada).
• The light sensor detects daytime light.
Delayed Headlamps • The parking brake is released or the vehicle is not in
P (Park).
The delayed headlamps feature keeps the headlamps
on for 20 seconds after the key is turned to LOCK/OFF, When the DRL system is on, the taillamps, sidemarker
then the headlamps automatically turn off. lamps, parking lamps, and instrument panel lights are
not on unless you turn the exterior lamps control to the
To override the 20 second delayed headlamp feature
parking lamp position.
while it is active turn the turn signal/multifunction
lever up one position and then back to AUTO. The regular headlamp system should be turned on
when they are needed.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-14
Automatic Headlamp System To idle the vehicle with the automatic headlamp system
off, turn the ignition on and set the exterior light switch to
When it is dark enough outside, the automatic headlamp the off/on position. For vehicles first sold in Canada, the
system turns on the headlamps at the normal brightness transmission must stay in P (Park) for this function.
along with other lamps such as the taillamps, sidemarker, The regular headlamps should be used when needed.
parking lamps, and the instrument panel lights. The radio
lights will also be dim.
The vehicle has a light sensor on top of the instrument
Fog Lamps
panel that controls the automatic headlamp system. For vehicles with fog lamps, the button for this feature is
Do not cover the sensor or the automatic headlamp located on the instrument panel, to the left of the
system will turn on when it is not needed. steering wheel.
There is a delay in the transition between the daytime The ignition must be on for the fog lamps to work.
and nighttime operation of the DRL and the automatic
headlamp systems so that driving under bridges or #: Press to turn the fog lamps on or off. An indicator
bright overhead street lights does not affect the system. light comes on when the fog lamps are on.
The DRL and automatic headlamp systems will only be
affected when the light sensor sees a change in lighting The parking lamps automatically turn on and off when
lasting longer than this delay. the fog lamps are turned on and off.
If vehicle is started in a dark garage, the automatic The fog lamps turn off while the high-beam headlamps
headlamp system comes on immediately. Once the are turned on.
vehicle leaves the garage, it takes about one minute for Some localities have laws that require the headlamps to
the automatic headlamp system to change to DRL if it is be on along with the fog lamps.
light outside. During that delay, the instrument panel
cluster may not be as bright as usual. Make sure the
instrument panel brightness control is in the full bright
position. See Instrument Panel Brightness on page 3-16.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-15
Instrument Panel Brightness Entry/Exit Lighting
The lamps inside the vehicle come on when any door is
The knob with this symbol
opened. These lamps fade out about 20 seconds after
is located on the instrument
all of the doors have been closed or when the ignition is
panel to the left of the
turned to ON/RUN. They also come on when the unlock
steering column.
symbol button or the horn symbol is pressed on the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system transmitter.
The lamps inside the vehicle stay on for about
20 seconds after the key is removed from the ignition to
provide light as you exit.
Turn the knob clockwise or counterclockwise to brighten
or dim the lights.
Turn the knob completely clockwise to turn on the
Parade Dimming
interior lamps. Parade dimming is a separate lighting mode that comes
on while the parking lamps are turned on during the day.
Dome Lamps It prevents the display lights and indicator lights from
being dim, while the parking lamps are used during
The dome lamps come on when any door is opened. the day.
They turn off after all the doors are closed.
The dome lamps can also be turned on by turning the Reading Lamps
instrument panel brightness knob, located on the
instrument panel to the left of the steering column, For vehicles with front and rear reading lamps, press
clockwise to the farthest position. In this position, the the lens to turn the lamp on and off, while the doors are
dome lamps remain on whether a door is opened or closed. These lamps come on automatically when any
closed. door is opened.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-16
Electric Power Management A high electrical load occurs when several of the
following are on, such as: headlamps, high beams, fog
The vehicle has Electric Power Management (EPM) that lamps, rear window defogger, climate control fan at
estimates the battery’s temperature and state of charge. high speed, heated seats, engine cooling fans, trailer
It then adjusts the voltage for best performance and loads, and loads plugged into accessory power outlets.
extended life of the battery. EPM works to prevent excessive discharge of the battery.
When the battery’s state of charge is low, the voltage is It does this by balancing the generator’s output and the
raised slightly to quickly bring the charge back up. When vehicle’s electrical needs. It can increase engine idle
the state of charge is high, the voltage is lowered slightly speed to generate more power, whenever needed.
to prevent overcharging. If the vehicle has a voltmeter It can temporarily reduce the power demands of some
gage or a voltage display on the Driver Information accessories.
Center (DIC), you may see the voltage move up or down. Normally, these actions occur in steps or levels, without
This is normal. If there is a problem, an alert will be being noticeable. In rare cases at the highest levels of
displayed. corrective action, this action may be noticeable to the
The battery can be discharged at idle if the electrical driver. If so, a Driver Information Center (DIC) message
loads are very high. This is true for all vehicles. This is might be displayed, such as BATTERY SAVER ACTIVE,
because the generator (alternator) may not be spinning BATTERY VOLTAGE LOW, or LOW BATTERY. If this
fast enough at idle to produce all the power that is message is displayed, it is recommended that the driver
needed for very high electrical loads. reduce the electrical loads as much as possible. See DIC
Warnings and Messages on page 3-46.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-17
Battery Run-Down Protection Accessory Power Outlet(s)
The vehicle has a battery run-down protection feature Accessory power outlets can be used to connect auxiliary
designed to protect the vehicle’s battery. electrical equipment, such as a cellular telephone.
When any interior lamp (trunk, reading, or visor vanity) There are two accessory power outlets. One accessory
is left on while the ignition is turned off, the battery power outlet is located inside the storage bin below the
run-down protection system will automatically shut the climate controls and the other outlet is on the rear of the
lamp(s) off after 20 minutes. This will avoid draining center storage console.
the battery.
To use an outlet, lift the protective cap. When not in use,
To reactivate the interior lamps, do one of the following: always cover the outlet with the protective cap. The
• Turn on the ignition. accessory power outlet is operational at all times.
• Turn the exterior lamp control off and then on. Notice: Leaving electrical equipment plugged in for
an extended period of time while the vehicle is off
• Open a door. will drain the battery. Power is always supplied
• Press any Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to the outlets. Always unplug electrical equipment
button (if equipped). when not in use and do not plug in equipment
that exceeds the maximum 20 ampere rating.
• Press the remote trunk release button.
Certain electrical accessories may not be compatible with
• Press the power door lock switch. the accessory power outlet and could result in blown
The battery run-down feature will also be activated vehicle or adapter fuses. If you experience a problem,
when any door on the vehicle is left open and the see your dealer/retailer for additional information on the
ignition is in LOCK/OFF. accessory power outlet.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-18
Notice: Adding any electrical equipment to your Power Outlet 115 Volt Alternating
vehicle can damage it or keep other components
from working as they should. The repairs would not Current
be covered by your warranty. Do not use equipment
exceeding maximum amperage rating of 20 amperes. The vehicle may have a power outlet that can be used
Check with your dealer/retailer before adding to plug in electrical equipment that uses a maximum
electrical equipment. limit of 150 watts.
When adding electrical equipment, be sure to follow the The power outlet is located
proper installation instructions included with the on the rear of the center
equipment. console.
Notice: Improper use of the power outlet can cause
damage not covered by the warranty. Do not hang
any type of accessory or accessory bracket from the
plug because the power outlets are designed for
accessory power plugs only.
An indicator light on the outlet turns on to show it is in

use. The light comes on when the ignition is in ON/RUN
and equipment requiring less than 150 watts is plugged
into the outlet, and no system fault is detected.
The indicator light does not come on when the ignition
is in LOCK/OFF or if no equipment is plugged into
the outlet.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-19
If you try to connect equipment using more than
150 watts or a system fault is detected, a protection
Climate Controls
circuit shuts off the power supply and the indicator light
turns off. To reset the circuit, unplug the item and plug it Climate Control System
back in or turn the Remote Accessory Power (RAP) off
and then back on. See Retained Accessory Power (RAP) The heating, cooling and ventilation for the vehicle can
on page 2-23. The power restarts when equipment that be controlled with this system.
operates within the limit is plugged into the outlet and a
system fault is not detected.
The power outlet is not designed for the following
electrical equipment and may not work properly if these
items are plugged into the power outlet:
• Equipment with high initial peak wattage such as:
compressor-driven refrigerators and electric
power tools.
• Other equipment requiring an extremely stable
power supply such as: microcomputer-controlled
electric blankets, touch sensor lamps, etc.
A. Fan Control E. Air Delivery Mode
B. Recirculation Control
C. Temperature F. Air Conditioning
Control G. Rear Window
D. Outside Air Defogger
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-20
Operation - (Defog): This mode clears the windows of fog or
moisture. Air is directed to the windshield and floor
Temperature Control: Turn clockwise or outlets, with some air directed to the side windows. When
counterclockwise to increase or decrease the this mode is selected, the system automatically turns off
temperature inside the vehicle. recirculation and runs the air-conditioning compressor
When it is cold outside 0°F (−18°C) or lower, use the unless the outside temperature is at or below freezing.
engine coolant heater, if vehicle has one, to provide The air-conditioning compressor operates although the
warmer air faster to the vehicle. An engine coolant indicator light is not on. The air-conditioning indicator light
heater warms the coolant the engine uses that provides turns off when defog is selected. If the air-conditioning
heat to warm the inside of the vehicle. For more button is pressed while in defog mode, the indicator light
information, see Engine Coolant Heater on page 2-25. will turn on. If the button is pressed again, the light will
turn off. The recirculation mode cannot be selected while
9 (Fan Control): Turn clockwise or counterclockwise in the defog mode. Do not drive the vehicle until all the
to increase or decrease the fan speed. The fan must windows are clear.
be on to run the air-conditioning compressor.
1 (Defrost): This mode quickly clears the windshield
Air Delivery Mode Control: Turn clockwise or of fog or frost. Air is directed to the windshield with some
counterclockwise to change the current airflow mode. air directed to the floor vents. In this mode, outside air is
pulled into the vehicle. The air-conditioning compressor
Select from the following: will not run unless the outside temperature is at or below
freezing. The air-conditioning compressor operates
H (Vent): Air is directed to the instrument panel
although the indicator light is not on. The air-conditioning
outlets. indicator light turns off when defrost is selected. If the
air-conditioning button is pressed while in defrost mode,
) (Bi-Level): Air is divided between the instrument the indicator light turns on. If the button is pressed again,
panel and floor outlets. Some air will be directed toward the light turns off. Recirculation cannot be selected while
the side windows. in the defrost mode.
6 (Floor): Air is directed to the floor outlets with some
air directed to the windshield and side window outlets.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-21
To help clear the windshield quickly, do the following: Using these settings together for long periods of time can
cause the air inside of the vehicle to become too dry.
1. Select 0. To prevent this from happening, after the air in the vehicle
2. Select the highest temperature. has cooled, turn the recirculation mode off.
3. Select the highest fan speed. : (Outside Air): Press to turn the outside air mode
# (Air Conditioning): Press to turn the air conditioning on. An indicator light comes on to show that it is on.
Air from outside the vehicle will circulate throughout
system on or off. An indicator light comes on to show
the vehicle. The outside air mode can be used with all
it is on.
modes, but it cannot be used with the recirculation
The air-conditioning system removes moisture from the mode. Press : to cancel the recirculation mode.
air, so a small amount of water might drip under the
vehicle while it is idling or after the engine is turned off ? (Recirculation): Press to turn the recirculation
is normal. mode on. An indicator light comes on to show that it is
on. This mode recirculates and helps to quickly cool
Maximum Air Conditioning the air inside the vehicle. It can be used to prevent
On hot days, open the windows to let hot inside air outside air and odors from entering the vehicle. The
escape; then close them. This helps reduce the time it recirculation indicator light blinks three times if you try to
takes for the vehicle to cool down. It also helps the use recirculation in a mode in which it cannot function.
air conditioning system operate more efficiently.
Pressing this button cancels the outside air mode. When
For quick cool down on hot days, do the following: switching to the defog or defrost modes the system
automatically moves from recirculation to outside air.
1. Select the C vent mode. When the vehicle or fan is turned off and back on, the
2. Select the highest fan speed. system defaults to outside air automatically. Only use
recirculation mode when it is needed for comfort, since
3. Select # air conditioning. window fogging can occur.
4. Select the ? recirculation mode.
5. Select the coolest temperature.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-22
Rear Window Defogger Notice: Do not use anything sharp on the inside of
the rear window. If you do, you could cut or damage
The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to the warming grid, and the repairs would not be
remove fog or frost from the rear window. covered by the vehicle warranty. Do not attach a
temporary vehicle license, tape, a decal or anything
< REAR: Press to turn the rear window defogger on similar to the defogger grid.
or off. An indicator light comes on to show that the
rear window defogger is on. Be sure to clear as much Remote Start Climate Control Operation
snow from the rear window as possible. For vehicles with the remote start feature, when it is
If driving below 50 mph (80 km/h), the rear window activated the climate control system heats or cools the
defogger turns off about 15 minutes after the button is inside of the vehicle using the modes that were set before
pressed. If turned on again, the defogger only runs for the vehicle was turned off. The climate control knobs will
about seven minutes before turning off. The defogger remain active during a remote start. However, the climate
can also be turned off by turning off the engine. control buttons will be inactive until the ignition is turned
on by the key. If the fan is off, the climate control system
If the vehicle’s speed is maintained above 50 mph
will not operate during remote start. See Remote Keyless
(80 km/h), the rear window defogger remains on once
Entry (RKE) System Operation on page 2-5.
the button is pressed.
If the vehicle has heated outside mirrors, the surface of
the outside mirrors heat when the rear window defogger
is activated. See Outside Power Mirrors on page 2-39.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-23
Automatic Climate Control System Automatic Operation
For vehicles with this system, the heating, cooling, AUTO (Automatic): Select AUTO on both the fan speed
and ventilation can be automatically controlled. control and the air delivery mode control knobs to activate
the automatic system. When automatic operation is
active the system controls the inside temperature and
air delivery.
To place the system in automatic mode do the following:
1. Turn the fan knob and the mode knob to the
AUTO position.
The current set temperature displays. When AUTO
is selected, the air conditioning operation and air
inlet is automatically controlled. The air conditioning
compressor runs while the outside temperature is
over about 40°F (4°C). The air inlet will normally be
set to outside air. If it is hot outside, the air inlet may
A. Fan Control F. Air Delivery Mode automatically switch to recirculate inside air to help
B. Air Conditioning Control quickly cool down the vehicle.
C. Recirculation G. Display
2. Set the temperature.
D. Outside Air H. Temperature
E. Rear Window Control An initial setting of 73°F (23°C) is recommended.
Allow about 20 minutes for the system to regulate.
Defogger
Press w or x to adjust the temperature setting as
necessary. If the temperature is set at 60°F (15°C)
the system remains at the maximum cooling setting.
If the temperature is set at 90°F (32°C) the system
remains at the maximum heat setting. Choosing
either maximum setting does not cause the vehicle to
heat or cool any faster.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-24
Do not to cover the sensor located on the top of the Select from the following:
instrument panel near the windshield. This sensor
regulates air temperature based on the intensity H (Vent): Air is directed to the instrument panel
of the sun. outlets.
Also do not cover the sensor grille on the lower
right side of the climate control faceplate, as ) (Bi-Level): Air is divided between the instrument
this regulates the inside temperature. panel outlets and the floor outlets.
To avoid blowing cold air at engine start-up in cold 6 (Floor): Air is directed to the floor outlets with some
weather, the system delays turning on the fan until air directed to the side window outlets.
warm air is available. The length of delay depends on
the engine coolant temperature. Turning the fan knob - (Defog): This mode clears the windows of fog or
overrides this delay and changes the fan to the moisture. Air is directed to the floor and windshield
selected speed. outlets.
Manual Operation 0 (Defrost): This mode clears the windows of fog or
frost more quickly. The system automatically controls
9 (Off): Select this position on the fan knob to turn off
the fan speed if defrost is selected from the AUTO mode.
the entire climate control system. Outside air still enters If the outside temperature is 40°F (4°C) or warmer, the
the vehicle. The airflow direction and temperature can be air conditioning compressor automatically runs to help
adjusted. dehumidify the air and dry the windshield. The air
conditioning indicator light blinks three times if the
x / w Temperature Control: Press the arrows to
compressor is turned off while in this mode.
increase or decrease the temperature inside the vehicle.
# (Air Conditioning): Press turn the air conditioning
9 (Fan Control): Turn clockwise or counterclockwise on and off. An indicator light turns on to show the
to increase or decrease the fan speed. air conditioning is on.
Air Delivery Mode Control: Turn clockwise or When air conditioning is selected or is in AUTO mode,
counterclockwise to change the direction of the airflow the system runs the air conditioning automatically to
in the vehicle. cool and dehumidify the air entering the vehicle.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-25
On hot days, open the windows long enough to let hot h (Recirculation): Press to turn the recirculation
inside air escape. This reduces the time it takes for the mode on. An indicator light above the button comes on to
vehicle to cool down. Then keep the windows closed for show it is on. This mode recirculates and helps to quickly
the air conditioner to work its best. cool the air inside the vehicle. It can be used to help
On cool, but sunny days while using manual operation of prevent outside air and odors from entering the vehicle.
the automatic system, use bi-level to deliver warm air to The recirculation indicator light blinks three times if you
the floor and cooler air to the instrument panel outlets. try to use recirculation in a mode in which it cannot
To warm or cool the air delivered, press the temperature function.
buttons to the desired setting. Pressing this button cancels the auto recirculation
In AUTO mode the system cools and dehumidifies the air feature. Each time the vehicle is started, the system
inside the vehicle. Also while in AUTO mode, the system reverts to the auto recirculation function.
maximizes its performance by using recirculation as The recirculation mode cannot be used with the floor,
necessary. defrost, or defog modes. If recirculation is selected in
Heating: On cold days when using manual operation these modes, the indicator flashes three times and turns
of the automatic system, use floor mode to deliver air off to indicate that this is not allowed. This is to prevent
to the floor outlets. To warm or cool the air delivered, window fogging.
press x or w to the desired temperature setting. When the weather is cool or damp, operating the system
in recirculation for extended periods of time can cause
To use the automatic mode, turn the knob to AUTO and fogging of the vehicle’s windows. To clear the fog, select
press x or w to adjust the temperature. either defog or defrost. Make sure the air conditioning is
on. Allow the air conditioning to run automatically to help
: (Outside Air): Press to turn the outside air mode dehumidify the air.
on. An indicator light comes on to show it is on. Air from
outside the vehicle will circulate throughout the vehicle.
The outside air mode can be used with all modes, but it
cannot be used with the recirculation mode. Pressing
this button cancels the recirculation mode.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-26
Rear Window Defogger Remote Start Climate Control Operation
The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to For vehicles with remote start, when it is activated the
remove fog from the rear window. climate control system heats and cools the inside of the
vehicle using the previous system settings before the
< (Rear): Press to turn the rear window defogger on vehicle was turned off. The climate control knobs will
or off. An indicator light comes on to show that the remain active during a remote start. However, the climate
rear window defogger is on. control buttons will be inactive until the ignition is turned
on by the key. If the fan is off, the climate control system
If driving below 50 mph (80 km/h), the rear window will not operate during remote start.
defogger turns off about 15 minutes after the button is
pressed. If additional warming time is needed, press the With the automatic climate control system, the
button again. climate control displays “RS” in place of the temperature
to indicate that remote start is activated. For best
If the vehicle’s speed is maintained above 50 mph performance, turn both the fan and mode knobs to AUTO.
(80 km/h), the rear window defogger remains on once If the temperature is cold enough and the mode knob is
the button is pressed. set to AUTO, the system begins in defrost to clear the
For vehicles with heated outside mirrors, the surface of windows. See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System
the outside mirrors will also heat when the rear window Operation on page 2-5.
defogger is activated. See Outside Power Mirrors on
page 2-39. Outlet Adjustment
Notice: Do not use a razor blade or sharp object to
clear the inside rear window. Do not adhere anything Use the lever located in the center of each outlet by
to the defogger grid lines in the rear glass. These moving it either up and down or side-to-side, to change
actions may damage the rear defogger. Repairs the direction and amount of airflow in the vehicle.
would not be covered by your warranty.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-27
Operation Tips Warning Lights, Gages, and
• Clear away any ice, snow, or leaves from the air Indicators
inlets at the base of the windshield that may
block the flow of air into the vehicle. Warning lights and gages can signal that something is
wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause an
• Do not use non-GM approved hood deflectors as expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention to the
they could adversely affect the performance of
warning lights and gages could prevent injury.
the system.
Warning lights come on when there may be or is a
• Keep the path under the front seats clear of objects problem with one of the vehicle’s functions. Some
to help circulate the air inside of the vehicle more warning lights come on briefly when the engine is
effectively. started to indicate they are working.
• When an objectionable odor outside the vehicle is Gages can indicate when there may be or is a problem
encountered, use the recirculation mode, with the with one of the vehicle’s functions. Often gages and
temperature knob at a comfortable setting to prevent warning lights work together to indicate a problem with
the odor from entering the vehicle through the the vehicle.
ventilation system. This can be helpful when driving
through a long tunnel with poor ventilation. However, When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on
extended usage of this mode in cold or cool weather while driving, or when one of the gages shows there may
can cause window fogging. be a problem, check the section that explains what to do.
Follow this manual’s advice. Waiting to do repairs can be
costly and even dangerous.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-28
Instrument Panel Cluster
The instrument panel cluster is designed to show how the vehicle is running. It shows how fast the vehicle is going,
how much fuel the vehicle has used, and many other things needed to drive safely and economically.
United States Base version shown, Canada Similar
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-29
Speedometer and Odometer Tachometer
The speedometer shows the vehicle speed in both The tachometer shows the engine speed in revolutions
miles per hour (mph) and kilometers per hour (km/h). per minute (rpm).
The odometer shows how far the vehicle has been
driven, in either miles (used in the United States) Safety Belt Reminders
or kilometers (used in Canada).
This vehicle has a tamper resistant odometer. The Safety Belt Reminder Light
digital odometer will read 999,999 if it is turned back. When the engine is started, a chime sounds for
If the vehicle needs a new odometer installed, it must be several seconds to remind a driver to fasten the safety
set to the mileage total of the old odometer. If that is not belt, unless the driver safety belt is already buckled.
possible, then it must be set at zero and a label must be
put on the driver door to show the old mileage reading The safety belt light comes
when the new odometer was installed. on and stays on for
several seconds, then
flashes for several more.
Trip Odometer
The trip odometer can show how far the vehicle has
been driven since the odometer was last reset.
The trip odometer is accessed and reset through the
Driver Information Center (DIC). See DIC Operation and This chime and light are repeated if the driver remains
Displays on page 3-44 for more information. unbuckled and the vehicle is in motion. If the driver
safety belt is already buckled, neither the chime nor the
light comes on.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-30
Passenger Safety Belt Reminder Light The front passenger safety belt warning light and chime
may turn on if an object is put on the seat such as a
Several seconds after the engine is started, a briefcase, handbag, grocery bag, laptop or other
chime sounds for several seconds to remind the front electronic device. To turn off the warning light and or
passenger to buckle their safety belt. This only occurs chime, remove the object from the seat or buckle the
if the passenger airbag is enabled. See Passenger safety belt.
Sensing System on page 1-66 for more information.
The passenger safety belt light, located on the instrument Airbag Readiness Light
panel, comes on and stays on for several seconds and
then flashes for several more. The system checks the airbag’s electrical system for
possible malfunctions. If the light stays on it indicates
This chime and light are there is an electrical problem. The system check includes
repeated if the passenger the airbag sensor, the pretensioners, the airbag modules,
remains unbuckled and the wiring and the crash sensing and diagnostic module.
the vehicle is in motion. For more information on the airbag system, see Airbag
System on page 1-58.
If the passenger safety belt is buckled, neither the

chime nor the light comes on.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-31
The airbag readiness light Passenger Airbag Status Indicator
flashes for a few seconds
when the engine is started. The vehicle has a passenger sensing system. See
If the light does not come Passenger Sensing System on page 1-66 for important
on then, have it fixed safety information. The instrument panel has a
immediately. passenger airbag status indicator.
{ CAUTION:
If the airbag readiness light stays on after the
vehicle is started or comes on while driving, it United States Canada
means the airbag system might not be working
properly. The airbags in the vehicle might not When the vehicle is started, the passenger airbag status
inflate in a crash, or they could even inflate indicator will light ON and OFF, or the symbol for on and
without a crash. To help avoid injury, have the off, for several seconds as a system check. If you are
using remote start to start the vehicle from a distance, if
vehicle serviced right away.
equipped, you may not see the system check. Then, after
several more seconds, the status indicator will light either
If there is a problem with the airbag system, an airbag ON or OFF, or either the on or off symbol to let you know
Driver Information Center (DIC) message can also come the status of the right front passenger frontal and
on. See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-46 seat-mounted side impact airbags.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-32
If the word ON or the on symbol is lit on the passenger Charging System Light
airbag status indicator, it means that the right front
passenger frontal airbag and seat-mounted side impact
This light comes on briefly
airbag are enabled (may inflate).
when the ignition key is
If the word OFF or the off symbol is lit on the passenger turned to START, but the
airbag status indicator, it means that the passenger engine is not running, as a
sensing system has turned off the right front passenger check to show it is working.
frontal and seat-mounted side impact airbag.
If, after several seconds, both status indicator lights
remain on, or if there are no lights at all, there may be a
problem with the lights or the passenger sensing system. If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by your
See your dealer/retailer for service. dealer/retailer.
The light should go out once the engine starts. If it stays
on, or comes on while driving, there could be a problem
{ CAUTION: with the charging system. A charging system message
in the Driver Information Center (DIC) can also appear.
If the airbag readiness light ever comes on and See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-46 for
stays on, it means that something may be wrong more information. This light could indicate that there are
with the airbag system. To help avoid injury to problems with a generator drive belt, or that there is an
yourself or others, have the vehicle serviced right electrical problem. Have it checked right away. If the
vehicle must be driven a short distance with the light on,
away. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3-31
turn off accessories, such as the radio and air
for more information, including important safety conditioner.
information.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-33
Brake System Warning Light The Driver Information Center (DIC) may display a
BRAKE FLUID message. See DIC Warnings and
The vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is divided into Messages on page 3-46 for more information.
two parts. If one part is not working, the other part can If the light comes on while driving, pull off the road and
still work and stop the vehicle. For good braking carefully stop. The brake pedal may be harder to push
both parts need to be working. or the pedal may go closer to the floor. It may take longer
If the warning light comes on, there is a brake problem. to stop. Try turning off and restarting the vehicle one or
Have the brake system inspected right away. two times, if the light is still on, have the vehicle towed for
service. See Towing Your Vehicle on page 4-26.
{ CAUTION:
The brake system might not be working properly if
the brake system warning light is on. Driving with
United States Canada the brake system warning light on can lead to a
crash. If the light is still on after the vehicle has
This light comes on briefly when the ignition key is been pulled off the road and carefully stopped,
turned to ON/RUN. If it does not come on then, have it have the vehicle towed for service.
fixed so it will be ready to warn if there is a problem.
When the ignition is on, the brake system warning light
also comes on when the parking brake is set. The light
stays on if the parking brake does not fully release. If it
stays on after the parking brake is fully released, it means
there is a brake problem.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-34
Antilock Brake System (ABS) For vehicles with a Driver Information Center (DIC), see
DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-46 for all
Warning Light brake related DIC messages.
For vehicles with the Electronic Stability Control (ESC)/

Antilock Brake System
(ABS), this light comes on Traction Control System (TCS)
briefly when the engine
is started. Indicator/Warning Light
For vehicles with the
Electronic Stability Control
(ESC) system or the
If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by your Traction Control System
dealer/retailer. If the system is working normally the (TCS), the indicator/
indicator light then goes off. warning light comes on
If the ABS light stays on, turn the ignition off. If the light briefly when the engine is
comes on while driving, stop as soon as it is safely started.
possible and turn the ignition off. Then start the engine
again to reset the system. If the ABS light stays on, or If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by the
comes on again while driving, the vehicle needs service. dealer/retailer. If the system is working normally the
If the regular brake system warning light is not on, the indicator light goes off.
vehicle still has brakes, but not antilock brakes. If the
regular brake system warning light is also on, the vehicle If this light is on while certain DIC messages display,
does not have antilock brakes and there is a problem with this indicates that the ESC and TCS are not working or
the regular brakes. See Brake System Warning Light on are disabled.
page 3-34.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-35
If this light is on and not flashing, the TCS and Engine Coolant Temperature
potentially the ESC system have been disabled. Check
the DIC messaging to determine which feature(s) is Warning Light
no longer functioning and whether it is because of the
driver turning off the feature(s), or because the system is This light comes on briefly
not working properly and the vehicle requires service. while starting the vehicle.
If the TCS is disabled, wheel spin is not limited. If the
ESC system is disabled, the system does not aid in
maintaining directional control of the vehicle.
If the indicator/warning light is on and flashing, the TCS
or the ESC system is actively working. Check the DIC
messaging for details to determine which system is
working. If the LOW TRACTION message appears, If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by the
the system is limiting wheel spin. If the ESC ACTIVE dealer/retailer. If the system is working normally the
message appears, the system is aiding in maintaining indicator light goes off.
directional control of the vehicle.
Notice: Driving with the engine coolant temperature
See Electronic Stability Control (ESC) on page 4-6 and warning light on could cause the vehicle to overheat.
Traction Control System (TCS) on page 4-8 for more See Engine Overheating on page 5-34. The vehicle’s
information. engine could be damaged, and it might not be
See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-46 for covered by the vehicle warranty. Never drive with
more information on the messages associated with the engine coolant temperature warning light on.
this light. The engine coolant temperature warning light comes on
when the engine has overheated.
If this happens pull over and turn off the engine as soon
as possible. See Engine Overheating on page 5-34
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-36
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage Tire Pressure Light
For vehicles with a tire
pressure monitoring
system, this light comes
on briefly when the engine
is started.
It provides information about tire pressures and the Tire

Pressure Monitoring System.
United States Canada
When the Light is On Steady
This gage shows the engine coolant temperature. If the This indicates that one or more of the tires is significantly
pointer moves towards the H (United States) or to the underinflated.
shaded thermostat symbol area (Canada), the engine is
A tire pressure message in the Driver Information Center
too hot.
(DIC), can accompany the light. See DIC Warnings and
A temperature indicator light turns on and a chime Messages on page 3-46 for more information. Stop and
sounds. check the tires as soon as it is safe to do so. If a tire is
The vehicle is operated under normal driving conditions underinflated, inflate to the proper pressure. See Tires on
and the temperature indicator light comes on, pull off the page 5-51 for more information.
road, stop the vehicle, and turn off the engine as soon as
possible.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-37
When the Light Flashes First and Then is If the check engine light comes on and stays on, while
On Steady the engine is running, this indicates that there is an
OBD II problem and service is required.
This indicates that there could be a problem with the Tire
Pressure Monitor System. The light flashes for about a Malfunctions often are indicated by the system before
minute and stays on steady for the remainder of the any problem is apparent. Being aware of the light
ignition cycle. This sequence repeats with every ignition can prevent more serious damage to the vehicle. This
cycle. See Tire Pressure Monitor System on page 5-61 system assists the service technician in correctly
for more information. diagnosing any malfunction.
Notice: If the vehicle is continually driven with
Malfunction Indicator Lamp this light on, after a while, the emission controls
might not work as well, the vehicle’s fuel economy
Check Engine Light might not be as good, and the engine might not
run as smoothly. This could lead to costly repairs
A computer system called OBD II (On-Board that might not be covered by the vehicle warranty.
Diagnostics-Second Generation) monitors operation
Notice: Modifications made to the engine,
of the fuel, ignition, and emission control systems.
transmission, exhaust, intake, or fuel system
It ensures that emissions are at acceptable levels for
of the vehicle or the replacement of the original
the life of the vehicle, helping to produce a cleaner
tires with other than those of the same Tire
environment.
Performance Criteria (TPC) can affect the vehicle’s
This light should come on emission controls and can cause this light to come
when the ignition is on, but on. Modifications to these systems could lead to
the engine is not running, costly repairs not covered by the vehicle warranty.
as a check to show it This could also result in a failure to pass a required
is working. If it does not, Emission Inspection/Maintenance test. See
have the vehicle serviced Accessories and Modifications on page 5-3.
by your dealer/retailer.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-38
This light comes on during a malfunction in one of Light On Steady: An emission control system
two ways: malfunction has been detected on the vehicle. Diagnosis
and service might be required.
Light Flashing: A misfire condition has been detected.
A misfire increases vehicle emissions and could An emission system malfunction might be corrected by
damage the emission control system on the vehicle. doing the following:
Diagnosis and service might be required. • Make sure the fuel cap is fully installed. See Filling
To prevent more serious damage to the vehicle: the Tank on page 5-10. The diagnostic system can
determine if the fuel cap has been left off or
• Reduce vehicle speed. improperly installed. A loose or missing fuel cap
• Avoid hard accelerations. allows fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere.
A few driving trips with the cap properly installed
• Avoid steep uphill grades. should turn the light off.
• If towing a trailer, reduce the amount of cargo being • If the vehicle has been driven through a deep
hauled as soon as it is possible. puddle of water, the vehicle’s electrical system
If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do so, stop might be wet. The condition is usually corrected
the vehicle. Find a safe place to park the vehicle. Turn the when the electrical system dries out. A few driving
key off, wait at least 10 seconds, and restart the engine. trips should turn the light off.
If the light is still flashing, follow the previous steps and
see your dealer/retailer for service as soon as possible.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-39
• Make sure to fuel the vehicle with quality fuel. Poor Emissions Inspection and Maintenance
fuel quality causes the engine not to run as efficiently Programs
as designed and can cause: stalling after start-up,
stalling when the vehicle is changed into gear, Some state/provincial and local governments have or
misfiring, hesitation on acceleration, or stumbling on might begin programs to inspect the emission control
acceleration. These conditions might go away once equipment on the vehicle. Failure to pass this inspection
the engine is warmed up. could prevent getting a vehicle registration.
If one or more of these conditions occurs, change the Here are some things to know to help the vehicle pass
fuel brand used. It will require at least one full tank of an inspection:
the proper fuel to turn the light off.
• The vehicle will not pass this inspection if the check
See Gasoline Octane on page 5-6. engine light is on with the engine running, or if the
If none of the above have made the light turn off, your key is in ON/RUN and the light is not on.
dealer/retailer can check the vehicle. The dealer/retailer • The vehicle will not pass this inspection if the
has the proper test equipment and diagnostic tools to
OBD II (on-board diagnostic) system determines
fix any mechanical or electrical problems that might have
that critical emission control systems have not been
developed.
completely diagnosed by the system. The vehicle
would be considered not ready for inspection. This
can happen if the battery has recently been replaced
or if the battery has run down. The diagnostic system
is designed to evaluate critical emission control
systems during normal driving. This can take several
days of routine driving. If this has been done and the
vehicle still does not pass the inspection for lack of
OBD II system readiness, your dealer/retailer can
prepare the vehicle for inspection.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-40
Oil Pressure Light Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenance
can damage the engine. The repairs would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty. Always follow the
maintenance schedule in this manual for changing
engine oil.
This light comes on briefly while starting the engine.
If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by your dealer/
retailer. If the system is working normally the indicator
light then goes off.
If the light comes on and stays on, it means that oil is not
flowing through the engine properly. The vehicle could be
low on oil and it might have some other system problem.
{ CAUTION:
Security Light
Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is low.
The engine can become so hot that it catches fire. For information regarding
Someone could be burned. Check the oil as soon this light and the vehicle’s
as possible and have the vehicle serviced. security system, see
Content Theft-Deterrent on
page 2-18.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-41
Cruise Control Light Fuel Gage
The cruise control light
comes on whenever the
cruise control is set.
The light goes out when the cruise control is turned off.
See Cruise Control on page 3-10 for more information.
United States Canada
Highbeam On Light
When the ignition is on, the fuel gage shows much fuel is
This light comes on when left in the fuel tank. When the indicator nears empty, a
the high-beam headlamps message in the Driver Information Center (DIC) displays.
are in use. The vehicle still has a little fuel left, but the vehicle should
be fueled soon. An arrow on the fuel gage indicates the
side of the vehicle the fuel door is on.
See Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer on page 3-8

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-42
Here are four things that some owners ask about. The DIC buttons are
These are normal and do not indicate a problem with located on the left side
the fuel gage: of the steering wheel.
• At the service station, the gas pump shuts off
before the gage reads full.
• It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up than the
gage indicated. For example, the gage may have
indicated the fuel tank was half full, but it actually
took a little more or less than half the fuel tank’s
capacity to fill it.
• The indicator moves a little while turning a corner or
speeding up. INFO (Information): Press this button to scroll through
• The gage goes back to empty when the ignition is the vehicle information mode displays.
turned off.
r (Reset): Press this button to reset some vehicle
information mode displays, select a personalization
Driver Information Center (DIC) menu mode setting, or acknowledge a warning
message.
Your vehicle has a Driver Information Center (DIC).
The DIC display gives you the status of many of your Press and hold the information and reset buttons at the
vehicle’s systems. The DIC is also used to display driver same time for one second, then release the buttons
personalization menu modes and warning/status to enter the personalization menu. See DIC Vehicle
messages. All messages will appear in the DIC display, Personalization on page 3-50 for more information.
located at the bottom of the instrument panel cluster.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-43
DIC Operation and Displays Trip Odometer
The DIC comes on when the ignition is on. The DIC has Press the information button until the outside air
different modes which can be accessed by pressing the temperature along with A or B displays. These modes
DIC buttons. The button functions are detailed in the show the current distance traveled since the last
following. reset for each trip odometer in either miles (mi) or
kilometers (km). Both odometers can be used at
Information Modes the same time.
To reset the trip odometer to zero, press and hold the
INFO (Information): Press this button to scroll through reset button for a few seconds while the desired
the following vehicle information modes: trip odometer is displayed.
Outside Air Temperature FUEL RANGE
The outside air temperature will be displayed at the Press the information button until FUEL RANGE displays.
same time as the Odometer and the Trip Odometer. The This mode shows the remaining distance you can drive
temperature outside of the vehicle will be displayed in without refueling in either miles (mi) or kilometers (km).
either degrees Fahrenheit (°F) or degrees Celsius (°C). It is based on fuel economy and the fuel remaining in
The outside air temperature appears on the left side of the tank.
the DIC display and the odometer, or trip odometer,
appears on the right side of the display. When the fuel level is low, FUEL RANGE LOW displays.
The fuel economy data used to determine fuel range
Odometer is an average of recent driving conditions. As your
Press the information button until the outside air driving conditions change, this data is gradually updated.
temperature and the odometer displays. This mode The FUEL RANGE mode cannot be reset.
shows the total distance the vehicle has been driven
in either miles (mi) or kilometers (km).
To change the DIC display to English or metric units,
see “UNITS” under DIC Vehicle Personalization on
page 3-50.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-44
MPG (L/100 KM) AVG (Average) OIL LIFE
Press the information button until MPG (L/100 KM) AVG Press the information button until OIL LIFE displays.
displays. This mode shows how many miles per The engine oil life system shows an estimate of the oil’s
gallon (mpg) or liters per 100 kilometers (L/100 km) remaining useful life. It shows 100% when the system
your vehicle is getting based on current and past is reset after an oil change. It alerts you to change the oil
driving conditions. on a schedule consistent with your driving conditions.
To reset the average fuel economy, press and hold the In addition to the engine oil life system monitoring the
reset button while MPG (L/100 KM) AVG is displayed. oil life, additional maintenance is recommended in
Average fuel economy is then calculated starting from the Maintenance Schedule in this manual. See Engine
that point. If the average fuel economy is not reset, it is Oil on page 5-21 and Scheduled Maintenance on
continually updated each time you drive. page 6-4.
MPG (L/100 KM) INST (Instantaneous) Always reset the engine oil life system after an oil
change. See “How to Reset the Engine Oil Life System”
Press the information button until MPG (L/100 KM) INST under Engine Oil Life System on page 5-24.
displays. This mode shows the current fuel economy at
a particular moment and changes frequently as driving Tire Pressure
conditions change. This mode shows the instantaneous
On vehicles with the Tire Pressure Monitor System
fuel economy in miles per gallon (mpg) or liters per
(TPMS), the pressure for each tire can be viewed in
100 kilometers (L/100 km). Unlike average fuel economy,
the DIC. The tire pressure is shown in either pounds
this screen cannot be reset.
per square inch (psi) or kilopascals (kPa). Press the
AV (Average) SPEED information button until LF ## PSI (kPa) ## RF displays
for the front tires. Press the information button again until
Press the information button until AV SPEED displays. LR ## PSI (kPa) ## RR displays for the rear tires.
This mode shows the vehicle’s average speed in
miles per hour (mph) or kilometers per hour (km/h). If a low tire pressure condition is detected by the system
while driving, a message advising you to check the tire
To reset the average vehicle speed, press and hold the pressure appears in the display. See Inflation - Tire
reset button while AV SPEED is displayed. Pressure on page 5-59 and DIC Warnings and Messages
on page 3-46 for more information.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-45
DIC Warnings and Messages BRAKE FLUID
These messages appear if there is a problem detected This message displays, while the ignition is on, when the
in one of your vehicle’s systems. brake fluid level is low. The brake system warning light on
the instrument panel cluster also comes on. See Brake
A message clears when the vehicle’s condition is no System Warning Light on page 3-34 for more information.
longer present. To acknowledge a message and clear it Have the brake system serviced by your dealer/retailer as
from the display, press and hold any of the DIC buttons. soon as possible.
If the condition is still present, the warning message
comes back on the next time the vehicle is turned off and CHANGE OIL SOON
back on. With most messages, a warning chime sounds This message displays when the life of the engine oil
when the message displays. Your vehicle may have other has expired and it should be changed.
warning messages.
When this message is acknowledged and cleared from
AUTO (Automatic) LIGHTS OFF the display, the engine oil life system must still be
This message displays if the automatic headlamp system reset separately. See Engine Oil Life System on
is disabled with the headlamp switch. See Automatic page 5-24, Engine Oil on page 5-21, and Scheduled
Headlamp System on page 3-15 for more information. Maintenance on page 6-4 for more information.
AUTO (Automatic) LIGHTS ON CHECK GAS CAP

This message displays if the automatic headlamp This message displays if the fuel cap has not been fully
system is enabled with the headlamp switch. See tightened. Recheck the fuel cap to make sure that it
Automatic Headlamp System on page 3-15 for more is on properly. A few driving trips with the cap properly
information. installed should turn the message off.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-46
CHECK TIRE PRESS (Pressure) ENG (Engine) PWR (Power) REDUCED
On vehicles with the Tire Pressure Monitor System This message displays when the vehicle’s engine
(TPMS), this message displays when the pressure in one power is reduced. Reduced engine power can affect the
or more of the vehicle’s tires needs to be checked. If a tire vehicle’s ability to accelerate. If this message is on, but
pressure message appears on the DIC, stop as soon as there is no reduction in performance, proceed to your
you can. Have the tire pressures checked and set to destination. The performance may be reduced the next
those shown on the Tire Loading Information label. See time the vehicle is driven. The vehicle may be driven at a
Tires on page 5-51, Loading the Vehicle on page 4-20, reduced speed while this message is on, but acceleration
and Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-59. The DIC also and speed may be reduced. Anytime this message stays
shows the tire pressure values. See DIC Operation and on, the vehicle should be taken to your dealer/retailer for
Displays on page 3-44. If the tire pressure is low, the low service as soon as possible.
tire pressure warning light comes on. See Tire Pressure
Light on page 3-37. ESC (Electronic Stability Control) ACTIVE
If your vehicle has Electronic Stability Control (ESC),
CRUISE ENGAGED this message displays and the ESC/TCS light on the
This message displays when the cruise control system instrument panel cluster flashes when ESC is assisting
is active. See Cruise Control on page 3-10 for more you with directional control of the vehicle. You may feel or
information. hear the system working and see this message displayed
in the DIC. Slippery road conditions may exist when this
DOOR AJAR message is displayed, so adjust your driving accordingly.
This message displays if one or more of the vehicle’s This message may stay on for a few seconds after ESC
doors are not closed properly. Make sure that the stops assisting you with directional control of the vehicle.
door(s) are closed completely. This is normal when the system is operating. See
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) on page 4-6 and
ENGINE DISABLED Electronic Stability Control (ESC)/Traction Control
System (TCS) Indicator/Warning Light on page 3-35
This message displays if the starting of the engine
is disabled. Have your vehicle serviced by your
dealer/retailer immediately.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-47
ESC (Electronic Stability Control) OFF LOW TRACTION
If your vehicle has Electronic Stability Control (ESC), If your vehicle has the Traction Control System (TCS),
this message displays and the ESC/TCS light on the this message displays and the ESC/TCS light on the
instrument panel cluster comes on solid when ESC is instrument panel cluster flashes when the system is
turned off. Adjust your driving accordingly. See Electronic actively limiting wheel spin. Slippery road conditions may
Stability Control (ESC) on page 4-6 and Electronic exist if this message is displayed, so adjust your driving
Stability Control (ESC)/Traction Control System (TCS) accordingly. This message stays on for a few seconds
Indicator/Warning Light on page 3-35 for more after the system stops limiting wheel spin. See Traction
information. Control System (TCS) on page 4-8 and Electronic
Stability Control (ESC)/Traction Control System (TCS)
ICE POSSIBLE Indicator/Warning Light on page 3-35 for more
This message displays when the outside air temperature information.
is cold enough to create icy road conditions. Adjust your
driving accordingly.
LOW WASHER FLUID
This message displays when the vehicle’s windshield
KEY FOB BATT (Battery) LOW washer fluid is low. Fill the windshield washer fluid
This message displays if the Remote Keyless Entry reservoir to the proper level as soon as possible.
(RKE) transmitter battery is low. Replace the battery See Windshield Washer Fluid on page 5-38.
in the transmitter. See “Battery Replacement” under
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation on
POWER STEERING
page 2-5. On some vehicles, this message displays if a problem
has been detected with the electric power steering. Have
LOW FUEL your vehicle serviced by your dealer/retailer immediately.
This message displays when your vehicle is low on fuel.
Refill the fuel tank as soon as possible. See Fuel Gage
PUSH PARK PEDAL
on page 3-42, Fuel on page 5-5, and Filling the Tank on This message displays if the parking brake is left
page 5-10 for more information. engaged. See Parking Brake on page 2-32 for more
information.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-48
SERVICE AIR BAG SERVICE TRACTION
This message displays when there is a problem with the If your vehicle has the Traction Control System (TCS),
airbag system. Have your vehicle serviced by your this message displays and a chime sounds when the
dealer/retailer immediately. system is not functioning properly. The ESC/TCS light
also appears on the instrument panel cluster. This light
SERVICE ESC (ELECTRONIC STABILITY stays on solid as long as the detected problem remains
CONTROL) present. When this message displays, the system is not
working. Adjust your driving accordingly. See Traction
If your vehicle has Electronic Stability Control (ESC), this
Control System (TCS) on page 4-8 and Electronic
message displays and a chime sounds if there has been
a problem detected with ESC. The ESC/TCS light also
Indicator/Warning Light on page 3-35 for more
appears on the instrument panel cluster. This light stays
information. Have the system serviced by your dealer/
on solid as long as the detected problem remains
retailer as soon as possible.
present. When this message displays, the system is not
working. Adjust your driving accordingly. See Electronic SVC (Service) TIRE MONITOR
Stability Control (ESC) on page 4-6 and Electronic
Stability Control (ESC)/Traction Control System (TCS) On vehicles with the Tire Pressure Monitor System
Indicator/Warning Light on page 3-35 for more (TPMS), this message displays if a part on the TPMS is
information. not working properly. The tire pressure light also flashes
and then remains on during the same ignition cycle. See
If this message turns on while you are driving, pull off the Tire Pressure Light on page 3-37. Several conditions may
road as soon as possible and stop carefully. Try resetting cause this message to appear. See Tire Pressure Monitor
the system by turning the ignition off and then back on. Operation on page 5-62 for more information. If the
If this message still stays on or turns back on again while warning comes on and stays on, there may be a problem
you are driving, your vehicle needs service. Have the with the TPMS. See your dealer/retailer.
ESC inspected by your dealer/retailer as soon as
possible.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-49
TRACTION OFF To change feature settings, use the following procedure:
If your vehicle has the Traction Control System (TCS), Entering Personalization Menu
this message displays and the ESC/TCS light on the
instrument panel cluster comes on solid when the system 1. Turn the ignition on while the vehicle is stopped.
is turned off. Adjust your driving accordingly. See Traction To avoid excessive drain on the battery, it is
Control System (TCS) on page 4-8 and Electronic recommended that the headlamps are turned off.
2. Press and hold the information and reset buttons at
Indicator/Warning Light on page 3-35 for more
the same time for one second, then release to enter
information.
the personalization menu.
TRUNK AJAR If the vehicle speed is greater than 2 mph (3 km/h),
only the UNITS menu will be accessible.
This message displays when the trunk is not closed
completely. Make sure that the trunk is closed 3. Press the information button to scroll through the
completely. See Trunk on page 2-12 for more available personalization menu modes.
information. Press the reset button to scroll through the available
settings for each mode.
DIC Vehicle Personalization If you do not make a selection within ten seconds,
the display will go back to the previous information
Your vehicle has personalization capabilities that allow displayed.
you to program certain features to a preferred setting.
All of the features listed may not be available on your
vehicle. Only the features available will be displayed on
the DIC.
The default settings for the features were set when your
vehicle left the factory, but may have been changed from
their default state since that time.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-50
Personalization Menu Modes REMOTE START
OIL LIFE RESET If your vehicle has remote start, this feature allows
When this feature is displayed, you can reset the engine remote start to be turned off or on. Remote start allows
oil life system. To reset the system, see Engine Oil Life you to start the engine from outside of the vehicle using
System on page 5-24. See “OIL LIFE” under DIC your Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. When
Operation and Displays on page 3-44 for more REMOTE START appears on the display, press and hold
information. the reset button for at least one second to scroll through
the available settings:
UNITS
OFF: The remote start feature will be disabled.
This feature allows you to select the units of
measurement in which the DIC will display the vehicle ON (default): The remote start feature will be enabled.
information. When UNITS appears on the display, press See Remote Vehicle Start on page 2-7 for more
and hold the reset button for at least one second to information.
scroll through the available settings:
To select a setting and move on to the next feature,
ENGLISH (default in United States): All information press the information button while the desired setting is
will be displayed in English units. displayed on the DIC.
METRIC (default in Canada): All information will be
displayed in metric units.
press the information button while the desired setting is
displayed on the DIC.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-51
LOCK HORN UNLOCK HORN
This feature, which allows the vehicle’s horn to chirp This feature, which allows the vehicle’s horn to chirp on
every time the lock button on the Remote Keyless Entry the first press of the unlock button on the Remote Keyless
(RKE) transmitter is pressed, can be enabled or disabled. Entry (RKE) transmitter, can be enabled or disabled.
When LOCK HORN appears on the display, press and When UNLOCK HORN appears on the display, press
hold the reset button for at least one second to scroll and hold the reset button for at least one second to scroll
through the available settings: through the available settings:
OFF (default): The horn will not chirp on the first press OFF (default): The horn will not chirp when the unlock
of the lock button on the RKE transmitter. The horn will button on the RKE transmitter is pressed.
still chirp on the second press.
ON: The horn will chirp on the first press of the unlock
ON: The horn will chirp on the first press of the lock button on the RKE transmitter.
button on the RKE transmitter. See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation on
See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation on page 2-5 for more information.
page 2-5 for more information. To select a setting and move on to the next feature,
To select a setting and move on to the next feature, press the information button while the desired setting is
press the information button while the desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-52
LIGHT FLASH DELAY LOCK
This feature, which allows the vehicle’s exterior hazard/ This feature, which delays the actual locking of the
turn signal lighting to flash every time the lock, unlock, or vehicle, can be enabled or disabled. When DELAY
trunk release buttons on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) LOCK appears on the display, press and hold the reset
transmitter are pressed, can be enabled or disabled. button for at least one second to scroll through the
When LIGHT FLASH appears on the display, press and available settings:
hold the reset button for at least one second to scroll
through the available settings: ON (default): The doors will not lock until five seconds
after the last door is closed. You can temporarily override
OFF: The exterior hazard/turn signal lighting will not delayed locking by pressing the power lock switch or
flash when the lock, unlock, or trunk release buttons on the lock button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
the RKE transmitter are pressed. transmitter a second time.
ON (default): The exterior hazard/turn signal lighting OFF: The doors will lock immediately when pressing
will flash when the lock, unlock, or trunk release buttons the power lock switch or the lock button on the
on the RKE transmitter are pressed. RKE transmitter.
See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation on See Power Door Locks on page 2-10, Delayed Locking
page 2-5 for more information. on page 2-11, and Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System
Operation on page 2-5 for more information.
press the information button while the desired setting is To select a setting and move on to the next feature,
displayed on the DIC. press the information button while the desired setting is
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-53
AUTO UNLK (Unlock) UNLK (Unlock)
This feature, which allows the vehicle to automatically This screen displays only if DRIVER or ALL is selected
unlock certain doors, can be enabled or disabled. When for the AUTO UNLK feature. This feature determines
AUTO UNLK appears on the display, press and hold when the automatic door unlocking will occur. When
the reset button for at least one second to scroll through UNLK appears on the display, press and hold the reset
the available settings: button for at least one second to scroll through the
available settings:
ALL (default): All of the doors will automatically unlock.
KEY OFF: The door(s) will unlock when the key is
DRIVER: The driver’s door will automatically unlock. turned off.
NONE: None of the doors will automatically unlock. SHIFT TO P (Park) (default): The door(s) will unlock
You will need to manually unlock the doors. when the vehicle is shifted into P (Park).
See Programmable Automatic Door Locks on page 2-11 See Programmable Automatic Door Locks on page 2-11
for more information. for more information.
To select a setting and move on to the next feature, To select a setting and move on to the next feature,
press the information button while the desired setting is press the information button while the desired setting is
displayed on the DIC. displayed on the DIC.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-54
EXT (Exterior) LIGHTS LANGUAGE
This feature, which allows the vehicle’s exterior perimeter This feature allows you to select the language in which
lighting to turn on each time the unlock button on the the DIC will display. When LANGUAGE appears on
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is pressed, can the display, press and hold the reset button for at least
be enabled or disabled. When EXT LIGHTS appears on one second to scroll through the available settings:
the display, press and hold the reset button for at least
one second to scroll through the available settings: ENGLISH (default): All messages will appear in
English.
OFF: The exterior perimeter lighting will not turn on when
the unlock button on the RKE transmitter is pressed. FRENCH: All messages will appear in French.
ON (default): The exterior perimeter lighting will turn on SPANISH: All messages will appear in Spanish.
when the unlock button on the RKE transmitter is GERMAN: All messages will appear in German.
pressed.
To select a setting and exit out of the personalization
See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation on menu mode, press the information button while the
page 2-5 for more information. desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
press the information button while the desired setting is Exiting Personalization Menu
displayed on the DIC. The personalization menu will be exited when any of the
following conditions occur:
• A ten second time period has elapsed.
• The ignition is turned off.
• The end of the personalization menu list is reached.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-55
Audio System(s) Notice: Contact your dealer/retailer before adding
any equipment.
Determine which radio the vehicle has and read the Adding audio or communication equipment could
following pages to become familiar with its features. interfere with the operation of the vehicle’s engine,
radio, or other systems, and could damage them.
Follow federal rules covering mobile radio and
{ CAUTION: telephone equipment.
Notice: The chime signals related to safety belts,
Taking your eyes off the road for extended periods parking brake, and other functions of your vehicle
could cause a crash resulting in injury or death to operate through the radio/entertainment system.
you or others. Do not give extended attention to If that equipment is replaced or additional equipment
entertainment tasks while driving. is added to your vehicle, the chimes may not
work. Make sure that replacement or additional
equipment is compatible with your vehicle before
This system provides access to many audio and non installing it. See Accessories and Modifications
audio listings. on page 5-3.
To minimize taking your eyes off the road while driving, The vehicle has Retained Accessory Power (RAP). With
do the following while the vehicle is parked: RAP, the audio system can be played even after the
• Become familiar with the operation and controls of ignition is turned off. See Retained Accessory Power
(RAP) on page 2-23 for more information.
the audio system.
• Set up the tone, speaker adjustments, and preset
radio stations.
For more information, see Defensive Driving on
page 4-2.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-56
Setting the Clock With Date Display
Without Date Display Radio with CD (MP3) and USB Port, and
Radio with Single CD (MP3) Player
AM/FM Base Radio with a Single CD To set the time and date:
Player
1. Turn the ignition key to ACC/ACCESSORY or
To set the time: ON/RUN. Press O to turn the radio on.
2. Press H and the HR, MIN, MM, DD, YYYY (hour,
ON/RUN. Press O to turn the radio on.
minute, month, day, and year) displays.
2. Press H until the hour begins flashing on the 3. Press the softkey located below any one of the tabs
display. Press H a second time and the minute that you want to change.
begins flashing on the display. 4. To increase the time or date do one of the following:
3. While either the hour or the minute numbers are • Press the softkey located below the selected tab.
flashing, turn f to increase or decrease the time.
• Press ¨SEEK, or \ FWD.
4. Press H again until the clock display stops flashing
to set the currently displayed time; otherwise, the
• Turn f clockwise.
flashing stops after five seconds and the current 5. To decrease the time or date do one of the
time displayed is automatically set. following:
To change the time default setting from 12 hour to • Press ©SEEK or s REV.
24 hour, press H and then the pushbutton located below
• Turn f counterclockwise.
the forward arrow tab. Once the time 12H and 24H are
displayed, press the pushbutton located below the The date does not automatically display. To see the date
desired option to select the default. Press H again to press H while the radio is on. The date with display times
apply the selected default, or let the screen time out. out after a few seconds and goes back to the normal
radio and time display.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-57
To change the time default setting from 12 hour to 6. To decrease the time or date do one of the
24 hour or to change the date default setting from following:
month/day/year to day/month/year:
• Press ©SEEK or s REV.
1. Press H and then the softkey located below the
• Turn f counterclockwise.
forward arrow label. Once the time 12H and 24H,
and the date MM/DD/YYYY (month, day, and year) The date does not automatically display. To see the date
and DD/MM/YYYY (day, month, and year) displays. press MENU and then softkey below the H tab while
2. Press the softkey located below the desired option. the radio is on. The date with display times out after a
few seconds and goes back to the normal radio and time
3. Press H again to apply the selected default, or display.
let the screen time out.
To change the time default setting from 12 hour to
Six-Disc CD (MP3) Player 24 hour or to change the date default setting from
month/day/year to day/month/year:
To set the time and date:
1. Press MENU, and then the softkey below the
H tab. The HR, MIN, MM, DD, YYYY displays.
ON/RUN. Press O to turn the radio on.
2. Press the softkey below the forward arrow tab.
2. Press MENU. The time 12H and 24H, and the date MM/DD/YYYY
3. Press the softkey below the H tab. The HR, MIN, (month, day, and year) and DD/MM/YYYY (day,
MM, DD, YYYY displays. month, and year) displays.
4. Press the softkey below any one of the tabs you 3. Press the softkey located below the desired option.
want to change. 4. Press MENU again to apply the selected default,
5. To increase the time or date do one of the following: or let the screen time out.
• Press the softkey located below the selected tab.
• Press ¨SEEK, or \ FWD.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-58
Radio(s)
Radio with CD (MP3) and USB Port shown, Radio

with CD (MP3) similar, Radio with Six-Disc CD (MP3)
Radio with CD (Base) similar
The vehicle has one of these radios as its audio

system.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-59
Radio Data System (RDS) 4. Press the softkey under the desired Speed
Compensated Volume setting (OFF, Low, Med,
The radio may have RDS. The RDS feature is available or High) to select the level of radio volume
for use only on FM stations that broadcast RDS compensation. The display times out after
information. This system relies upon receiving specific approximately 10 seconds. Each higher setting
information from these stations and only works when the allows for more radio volume compensation at
information is available. While the radio is tuned to an faster vehicle speeds.
FM-RDS station, the station name or call letters display.
In rare cases, a radio station could broadcast incorrect Finding a Station
information that causes the radio features to work
improperly. If this happens, contact the radio station. BAND: Press to choose between FM1, FM2, AM, or
XM™ (if equipped) on the Radio with CD (Base). Press
Playing the Radio to choose between FM, AM, XM (if equipped) on the
Radio with CD (MP3) and USB Port, Radio with
O (Power/Volume): Press to turn the system on and CD (MP3), or Radio with Six-Disc CD (MP3).
off. Turn to increase or decrease the volume.
f (Tune): Turn to select radio stations.
Speed Compensated Volume (SCV): Radios
with the Speed Compensated Volume (SCV) feature © SEEK: Press to seek or scan stations with a strong
automatically adjust the radio volume to compensate for signal in the selected band.
road and wind noise as the vehicle speeds up or slows
down, so that the volume level is consistent. • To seek stations, press and release ©SEEK to go
to the previous station and stay there.
To activate SCV:
• To scan stations, press and hold ©SEEK for a
1. Set the radio volume to the desired level. few seconds until the radio beeps once. The radio
2. Press MENU to display the radio setup menu. goes to a station, plays for a few seconds, then
3. Press the softkey under the AUTO VOLUM tab on goes to the next station. Press ©SEEK again to
the radio display. stop scanning.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-60
• To scan preset stations in the selected band, press • To scan preset stations in the selected band, press
and hold ©SEEK for four seconds until a double and hold ¨SEEK for four seconds until a double
beep sounds. The radio goes to a stored preset, beep sounds. The radio goes to a stored preset,
plays for a few seconds, then goes to the next stored plays for a few seconds, then goes to the next stored
preset. Press ©SEEK again to stop scanning preset preset. Press ¨SEEK again to stop scanning preset
stations. stations.
¨ SEEK: Press to seek or scan stations with a strong 4 (Information): For vehicles with the Radio with CD
signal in the selected band. (Base), press to switch the display between the radio
station frequency and the time. While the ignition is off,
• To seek stations, press and release ¨SEEK to go
to the next station and stay there. press 4 to display the time.
• To scan stations, press and hold ¨SEEK for a For vehicles with XM, MP3, WMA, or RDS features,
few seconds until the radio beeps once. The radio press 4 to display additional text information related to the
goes to a station, plays for a few seconds, then current FM-RDS or XM station; or CD, MP3, WMA song.
goes to the next station. Press ¨SEEK again to Song title information will be displayed on the top line of
the display while the artist information will be displayed
stop scanning.
on the bottom line, it the information is available during
XM, CD, MP3, or WMA playback. When information is not
available, “No Info” displays.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-61
Storing Radio Stations To store a station as a favorite:
1. Tune to the desired radio station and set the
Depending on which radio the vehicle has, radio
balance/fade and tone settings to the desired levels.
stations are stored as either favorites or presets.
2. Press FAV to display the page where to store the
Storing a Radio Station as a Favorite station.
Radio that have a FAV button store radio stations as 3. Press and hold one of the six softkeys until a beep
favorites. sounds.
Drivers are encouraged to set up radio station favorites 4. Repeat the steps for each radio station to be stored
while the vehicle is in P (Park). Tune to favorite stations as a favorite.
using the softkeys, favorites button, and steering wheel
To setup the number of favorites pages:
controls. See Defensive Driving on page 4-2.
1. Press MENU to display the radio setup menu.
FAV (Favorites): A maximum of 36 stations can be
stored as favorites using the six softkeys located below 2. Press the softkey located below the FAV 1-6 tab.
the radio station frequency tabs and by using the radio 3. Select the desired number of favorites pages
favorites page button (FAV button). Press FAV to go by pressing the softkey located below the displayed
through up to six pages of favorites, each having six page numbers.
favorite stations available per page. Each page of 4. Press FAV, or let the menu time out, to return to
favorites can contain any combination of AM, FM, or XM the original main radio screen showing the radio
stations. The current balance/fade and tone settings are station frequency tabs and to begin programming
also stored with the favorite stations. favorites.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-62
Auto Text (Satellite Radio Service, CD, MP3, and Storing a Radio Station as a Preset
WMA features): If additional information is available
for the current song being played, Auto Text will Radios that have numbered pushbuttons store radio
automatically page/scroll the information every stations as presets.
three seconds above the FAV presets on the radio If the radio does not have XM, up to 18 stations
display. By default, Auto Text is enabled. (six FM1, six FM2, and six AM), can be programmed
on the six numbered buttons.
To change the Auto Text setting:
To store preset stations:
1. Tune in the desired station.
2. Press the softkey under AUTO TXT tab on the radio
display. 2. Press and hold one of the six numbered buttons for
three seconds until a beep sounds.
3. Press the softkey under the ON or OFF tab on the
radio display. 3. Repeat the Steps 1 and 2 for each numbered
button.
If 4 is pressed and the song title or artist information
is longer than what can be displayed, the extra
information will page every three seconds when
Auto Text is activated.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-63
Setting the Tone 4. To decrease the level of the bass, midrange, or
treble:
(Bass/Midrange/Treble)
• Press ©SEEK, or s REV.
BASS/MID/TREB (Bass, Midrange, or Treble): The
radio may display some or all tones such as BASS, MID, • Turn f counterclockwise.
and TREB. The radio may be capable of adjusting bass, midrange,
or treble to the middle position by pressing the
To adjust the tone settings on the Radio with CD (Base):
softkey below the BASS, MID, or TREB tab for more
Press f until the tone control labels display, then turn f than two seconds. The radio beeps once and the level
to change the setting. adjusts to the middle position.
To adjust the tone settings on the Radio with CD (MP3) The radio may also be capable of adjusting all tone and
and USB Port, Radio with CD (MP3), or Radio with speaker controls to the middle position by pressing f for
Six-Disc CD (MP3): more than two seconds until the radio beeps once.
1. Press f until the tone control tabs display. If a station’s frequency is weak, or has static, decrease
the treble.
2. Press the softkey below the desired tab to be
adjusted. EQ (Equalization): Press this button to select preset
3. To increase the level of the bass, midrange, or equalization settings.
treble: To return to the manual mode, press EQ until Manual
• Press ¨SEEK, or \ FWD. displays or start to manually adjust the bass, midrange,
or treble by pressing f .
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-64
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade) The radio may be capable of adjusting balance or fade to
the middle position by pressing the softkey below the BAL
Depending on which radio the vehicle has, the or FADE tab for more than two seconds. The radio beeps
Balance/Fade can be adjusted using f or ` . once and the level adjusts to the middle position.
To adjust balance or fade using f: The radio may also be capable of adjusting all tone and
speaker controls to the middle position by pressing f for
1. Press f until the speaker control tabs display. more than two seconds until the radio beeps once.
2. Press the softkey under the desired tab, or continue
Finding a Category (CAT) Station
pressing f to highlight the desired tab.
(XM Satellite Radio Service Only)
3. Turn f to adjust the highlighted setting. The
highlighted setting can also be adjusted by pressing CAT (Category): The radio may have the CAT button
either SEEK arrow. feature.
On some radios, \ FWD and s REV can also To select and find a desired category:
be used to adjust the highlighted level. 1. Press BAND until the XM frequency displays.
To adjust balance or fade using `: 2. Press CAT to display the category tabs on the radio
display. Continue pressing the CAT button until the
1. Press ` until the speaker control labels display. desired category name displays.
2. Continue pressing ` until the desired speaker 3. Press either of the two softkeys below the desired
control label displays. category tab to immediately tune to the first XM
station associated with that category.
3. Turn f to adjust the setting. The setting can
also be adjusted by pressing either SEEK arrow,
\ FWD, or s REV.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-65
4. To go to the previous or to the next XM station within Radio Messages
the selected category, do one of the following:
• Turn f . Calibration Error: Displays if the radio is no longer
calibrated properly for the vehicle. The vehicle must be
• Press the softkeys below the right or left arrows returned to your dealer/retailer for service.
on the radio display.
Loc or Locked: Displays when the THEFTLOCK®
• Press ©SEEK or ¨SEEK. system has activated. Take the vehicle to your dealer/
5. To exit the category search mode, press the FAV retailer for service.
button or BAND button to display the favorites again. If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
Undesired XM categories can be removed through the corrected, contact your dealer/retailer.
setup menu. To remove an undesired category:
XM Satellite Radio Service
XM is a satellite radio service that is based in the
2. Press the softkey below the XM CAT tab. 48 contiguous United States and 10 Canadian provinces.
3. Turn f to display the category to be removed. XM Satellite Radio has a wide variety of programming
and commercial-free music, coast-to-coast, and in
4. Press the softkey below the Remove tab until the digital-quality sound. During your trial or when you
category name along with the word Removed subscribe, you will get unlimited access to XM Radio
displays. Online for when you are not in the vehicle. A service fee
5. Repeat the steps to remove additional categories. is required to receive the XM service. For more
information, contact XM at xmradio.com or call
Removed categories can be restored by pressing the 1-800-929-2100 in the U.S. and xmradio.ca or call
softkey under the Add tab when a removed category 1-877-438-9677 in Canada.
displays or by pressing the softkey below the Restore
All tab. Radio Messages for XM Only
Categories cannot be removed or added while the See XM Radio Messages on page 3-77 for more
vehicle is moving faster than 5 mph (8 km/h). information.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-66
Loading a CD Ejecting a CD
Radio’s with a Single CD Player Radio’s with a Single CD Player
Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up.
The player pulls it in and the CD begins playing. Z EJECT: Press to eject the CD. If the CD is not
removed, after several seconds, the CD automatically
When the CD is inserted, the CD symbol displays. As
pulls back into the player.
each new track starts to play, the track number displays.
The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm) single Radio’s with a Six-Disc CD Player
CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and the smaller
CDs are loaded in the same manner. Z EJECT: Press to eject a CD. If the CD is not
removed, after several seconds, the CD automatically
Radio’s with a Six-Disc CD Player pulls back into the player.
LOAD ^ : Press to load CDs into the CD player. To eject the CD that is currently playing:
This CD player holds up to six CDs. 1. Press and release Z . The radio beeps once and
To insert one CD: Ejecting Disc displays
1. Press and release ^. 2. Once the disc is ejected and Remove Disc displays,
remove the CD from the player.
2. Wait for the message to insert the disc.
To eject all CDs:
3. Load a CD. Insert the CD partway into the slot,
label side up. The player pulls the CD in. 1. Press and hold Z for two seconds. A beep
To insert multiple CDs: sounds and Ejecting All Discs displays.
2. Once the disc is ejected and Remove Disc displays,
1. Press and hold ^ for two seconds. A beep sounds
remove the CD from the player.
and Load All Discs displays.
2. Follow the displayed instruction on when to insert
the discs.
3. Press ^ again to cancel loading more CDs.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-67
Playing a CD RDM (Random): Tracks can be listened to in random,
rather than sequential order, on one CD or all CDs
If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD in the in a Six-Disc CD player.
player it stays in the player. When the ignition or radio
is turned on, the CD starts to play where it stopped, if it To use random on the base radio with Single CD player:
was the last selected audio source. 1. Press the softkey below RDM tab until Random
Current Disc displays.
f (Tune): Turn to select tracks on the CD currently
playing. 2. Press the softkey again to turn off random play.
To use random on a radio with a Six-Disc CD player:
© SEEK: Press to go to the start of the current track, if
1. To play tracks from all CDs loaded in random order,
more than ten seconds have played. Press and hold or press the softkey below the RDM tab until
press multiple times to continue moving backward Randomize All Discs displays.
through the tracks on the CD.
2. To play tracks from the CD currently playing in
¨ SEEK: Press to go to the next track. Press and hold random order, press the softkey below the RDM
or press multiple times to continue moving forward tab until Random Current Disc displays.
through the tracks on the CD. 3. To turn off random, press the same softkey again.
s REV (Reverse): Press and hold to reverse playback BAND: Press to listen to the radio while a CD is
quickly within a track. Sound is heard at a reduced playing. The CD remains inside the radio for future
volume and the elapsed time of the track displays. listening.
Release to resume playing the track.
CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press to play a CD while
\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold to advance listening to the radio. The CD icon and a message
playback quickly within a track. Sound is heard at a showing the track number displays when a CD is
reduced volume and the elapsed time of the track in the player. Press this button again and the system
displays. Release to resume playing the track. automatically searches for an auxiliary input device, such
as a portable audio player. If a portable audio player is
not connected, No Aux Input Device Found may display.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-68
Playing an MP3 CD-R or CD-RW Disc Care of CDs
The radio may have the ability to play an MP3 CD-R or Store CD(s) in their original cases or other protective
CD-RW disc. See Using an MP3 on page 3-71 for cases and away from direct sunlight and dust. The
more information. CD player scans the bottom of the disc. If the bottom
of a CD is damaged it may not play properly or at all.
CD Messages Do not touch the bottom of a CD while handling it.
Pick up CDs by grasping the outer edges or the edge
CHECK DISC: If an error message displays and/or the of the hole and the outer edge.
CD comes out, it could be for one of the following If the surface of a CD is dirty, take a soft, lint free cloth or
reasons: dampen a clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral detergent
• The CD player is very hot. When the temperature solution mixed with water, and clean it. Make sure the
returns to normal, the CD should play. wiping process starts from the center to the edge.
• The road is very rough. When the road becomes Care of the CD Player
smoother, the CD should play. Do not add labels to a CD, it could get caught in the CD
• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down. player. Use a marking pen to write on the top of the
CD if a description is needed.
• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour and Do not use CD lens cleaners, they could damage the
try again. CD player.
• A problem may have occurred while burning the CD. Notice: If a label is added to a CD, or more than
• The label could be caught in the CD player. one CD is inserted into the slot at a time, or an
attempt is made to play scratched or damaged CDs,
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason, the CD player could be damaged. While using the
try a known good CD. CD player, use only CDs in good condition without
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot any label, load one CD at a time, and keep the
be corrected, contact your dealer/retailer. If the radio CD player and the loading slot free of foreign
displays an error message, write it down and provide materials, liquids, and debris.
it to your dealer/retailer when reporting the problem. If an error displays, see “CD Messages” earlier in this
section.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-69
Using the Auxiliary Input Jack CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press to play a CD while a
portable audio device is connected to the auxiliary input.
The radio system may have an auxiliary input jack Press again and the system begins playing audio from
located on the lower right side of the faceplate. This is not the connected portable audio player. If a portable audio
an audio output; do not plug the headphone set into the player is not connected, No Aux Input Device may
front auxiliary input jack. An external audio device such display.
as an iPod®, laptop computer, MP3 player, CD changer,
etc. can be connected to the auxiliary input jack for use Using the USB Port
as another audio source.
Radio’s with a USB port can control a USB storage
Drivers are encouraged to set up any auxiliary device device or an iPod® using the radio buttons and knobs.
while the vehicle is in P (Park). See Defensive Driving on See Using an MP3 on page 3-71 for information about
page 4-2 for more information on driver distraction. how to connect and control a USB storage device or
To use a portable audio player, connect a 3.5 mm an iPod.
(1/8 inch) cable to the radio’s front auxiliary input jack. USB Support
When a device is connected, press the radio CD/AUX
button to begin playing audio from the device over the The USB connector is located on the front of the radio
vehicle speakers. and uses the USB 2.0 standard.
O (Power/Volume): Turn to adjust the volume. USB Supported Devices

Additional volume adjustments may have to be made • USB Flash Drives
from the portable device if the volume is too quiet or
not loud. • Portable USB Hard Drives
BAND: Press to listen to the radio while a portable audio
• Fifth generation or later iPod
device is connected to the auxiliary input. The portable • First, Second, or Third generation iPod nano
audio device continues playing until it is stopped or
turned off.
• iPod touch
• iPod classic
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-70
Make sure the iPod has the latest firmware from Apple® CD-R or CD-RW Supported File and Folder
for proper operation. iPod firmware can be updated using Structure
the latest iTunes® application. See apple.com/itunes.
The radio supports:
For help with identifying your iPod, go to
apple.com/support. • Up to 50 folders.
• Up to 8 folders in depth.
Using an MP3 • Up to 50 playlists.
Format • Up to 255 files.
Radios that have the capability of playing MP3’s can • Playlists with an .m3u or .wpl extension.
play .mp3 files that were recorded onto a CD-R or • Files with an .mp3 or .cda file extension.
CD-RW disc. Radios that have a USB port can play .mp3
and .wma files that are stored on a USB storage device USB Supported File and Folder Structure
as well as AAC files that are stored on an iPod®. The radio supports:
Compressed Audio • Up to 700 folders.
The radio can play discs that contain both • Up to 8 folders in depth.
uncompressed CD audio and MP3 files.
• Up to 65,535 files.
Radios with a single CD player read all MP3 files first,
then the uncompressed CD audio files. • Folder and file names up to 64 bytes.
Radios with a six-CD player only read MP3 files unless • Files with an .mp3 or .wma file extension.
the CAT button is pressed to toggle to uncompressed • AAC files stored on an iPod.
audio files.
• FAT16
• FAT32
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-71
Root Directory When play enters a new folder, the display does not
automatically show the new folder name unless the folder
The root directory is treated as a folder. Files are stored mode has been chosen as the default display. The new
in the root directory when the disc or storage device track name displays.
does not contain folders. Files accessed from the root
directory of a CD display as F1 ROOT. File System and Naming
Empty Folder The song name that displays is the song name that is
contained in the ID3 tag. If the song name is not present
Folders that do not contain files are skipped, and the in the ID3 tag, then the radio displays the file name
player advances to the next folder that contains files. without the extension (such as .mp3) as the track name.
Order of Play Track names longer than 32 characters or four pages are
shortened. The display does not show parts of words on
Tracks are played in the following order:
the last page of text and the extension of the filename is
• Play begins from the first track in the first playlist not displayed.
and continues sequentially through all tracks in
each playlist. When the last track of the last playlist Preprogrammed Playlists
has played, play continues from the first track of CDs that have preprogrammed playlists that were
the first playlist. created using WinAmp™, MusicMatch™, or Real
• Play begins from the first track in the first folder and Jukebox™ software can be accessed, however, there
continues sequentially through all tracks in each is no playlist editing capability using the radio. These
folder. When the last track of the last folder has playlists are treated as special folders containing
played, play continues from the first track of the compressed audio song files.
first folder. Playlists that have an .m3u or .pls file extension and are
stored on a USB device may be supported by the radio
with a USB port.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-72
Playing a CD-R or CD-RW MP3 c T (Next Folder): Press the softkey below c T to
go to the first track in the next folder.
f (Tune): Turn to select MP3 files on the CD currently
playing. RDM (Random): MP3 files can be listened to on a CD
in random, rather than sequential order, on one CD
© SEEK: Press to go to the start of the track, if more or all discs in the Six-Disc CD player. To use random:
than ten seconds have played. Press and hold or 1. Press the softkey under the RDM tab until Random
press multiple times to continue moving backward Current Disc displays to play songs from the current
through tracks. CD in random order. Press the same softkey
again to turn off random play.
¨ SEEK: Press to go to the next track. Press and hold
2. Press the softkey under the RDM tab until
or press multiple times to continue moving forward Randomize All Discs displays to play songs from
through tracks. all CDs loaded in the Six-Disc CD player in random
order. Press the same softkey again to turn off
s REV (Reverse): Press and hold to reverse playback
random play.
quickly. Sound is heard at a reduced volume and the
elapsed time of the file displays. Release s REV to h (Music Navigator): Press the softkey below h
resume playing. to have the files played in order by artist or album.
The player scans the disc to sort the files by artist and
\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold to advance album ID3 tag information. It can take several minutes
playback quickly. Sound is heard at a reduced to scan the disc depending on the number of files on the
volume and the elapsed time of the file displays. disc. The radio may begin playing while it is scanning
Release \ FWD to resume playing. The elapsed in the background.
time of the file displays. When the scan is finished, the disc begins playing files
in order by artist. The current artist playing is shown on
S c (Previous Folder): Press the softkey below the second line of the display. Once all songs by that
S c to go to the first track in the previous folder. artist are played, the player moves to the next artist in
alphabetical order and begins playing files by that artist.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-73
To listen to files by another artist, press the softkey Connecting a USB Storage Device
located below either arrow tab. The disc goes to the next
or previous artist in alphabetical order. Continue pressing or iPod®
either softkey below the arrow tab until the desired artist The USB Port can be used to control an iPod or a USB
displays. storage device.
To change from playback by artist to playback by album: To connect a USB storage device, connect the device
1. Press the softkey located below the Sort By tab. to the USB port located on the front of the radio.
2. Press one of the softkeys below the album tab from To connect an iPod, connect one end of the USB cable
the sort screen. that came with the iPod to the iPod’s dock connector and
connect the other end to the USB port located on the front
3. Press the softkey below the back tab to return to
of the radio. If the vehicle is on and the USB connection
the main music navigator screen.
works, “OK to disconnect” and a GM logo may appear on
The album name displays on the second line between the the iPod and iPod appears on the radio’s display. The
arrows and songs from the current album begins to play. iPod music appears on the radio’s display and begins
Once all songs from that album have played, the player playing.
moves to the next album in alphabetical order on the CD
The iPod charges while it is connected to the vehicle
and begins playing MP3 files from that album.
if the vehicle is in the ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN
To exit music navigator mode, press the softkey below position. When the vehicle is turned off, the iPod
the Back tab to return to normal MP3 playback. automatically powers off and will not charge or draw
power from the vehicle’s battery.
If you have an older iPod model that is not supported, it
can still be used by connecting it to the Auxiliary Input
Jack using a standard 3.5 mm (1/8 inch) stereo cable.
See “Using the Auxiliary Input Jack” earlier for more
information.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-74
Using the Radio to Control a USB Using Softkeys to Control a USB
Storage Device or iPod Storage Device or iPod
The radio can control a USB storage device or an iPod The five softkeys below the radio display are used to
using the radio buttons and knobs and display song control the functions listed below.
information on the radio’s display.
To use the softkeys:
f (Tune): Turn to select files. 1. Press the first or fifth softkey below the radio display
to display the functions listed below, or press the
© SEEK: Press to go to the start of the track, if more softkey below the function if it is currently displayed.
than ten seconds have played. Press and hold or press
multiple times to continue moving backward through 2. Press the softkey below the tab with the function on
tracks. it to use that function.
¨ SEEK: Press to go to the next track. Press and j (Pause): Press the softkey below j to pause the
hold or press multiple times to continue moving forward track. The tab appears raised when pause is being used.
through tracks. Press the softkey below j again to resume playback.
s REV (Reverse): Press and hold to reverse playback Back: Press the softkey below the back tab to go back to
quickly. Sound is heard at a reduced volume. Release the main display screen on an iPod, or the root directory
s REV to resume playing. The elapsed time of the file on a USB storage device.
displays.
c (Folder View): Press the softkey below c to view
\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold to advance the contents of the current folder on the USB drive.
To browse and select files:
playback quickly. Sound is heard at a reduced volume.
Release \ FWD to resume playing. The elapsed time of 1. Press the softkey below c.
the file displays.
2. Turn f to scroll through the list of folders.
4 (Information): Press to display additional information
about the selected track.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-75
3. Press f to select the desired folder. If there is • Genres
more then one folder, repeat Steps 1 and 2 until • Songs
the desired folder is reached.
• Composers
4. Turn f to scroll through the files in the selected
folder. To select files:
5. Press f to select the desired file to be played. 1. Press the softkey below h.
To skip through large lists, the five softkeys can be used 2. Turn f to scroll through the list of menus.
to navigate in the following order:
3. Press f to select the desired menu.
• First softkey, first item in the list.
4. Turn f to scroll through the folders or files in the
• Second softkey, 1% through the list each time the selected menu.
softkey is pressed.
• Third softkey, 5% through the list each time the 5. Press f to select the desired file to be played.
softkey is pressed. To skip through large lists, the five softkeys can be used
to navigate in the following order:
• Fourth softkey, 10% through the list each time the
softkey is pressed. • First softkey, first item in the list.
• Fifth softkey, end of the list. • Second softkey, 1% through the list each time the
softkey is pressed.
h (Music Navigator): Press the softkey below h
• Third softkey, 5% through the list each time the
to view and select a file on an iPod, using the iPod’s softkey is pressed.
menu system. Files are sorted by:
• Fourth softkey, 10% through the list each time the
• Playlists softkey is pressed.
• Artists • Fifth softkey, end of the list.
• Albums
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-76
Repeat Functionality < (Shuffle Album): Press the softkey below > to
To use Repeat: shuffle all songs in the current album on an iPod.
Press the softkey below " or ' to select between = (Shuffle Folder): Press the softkey below > to
Repeat All and Repeat Track. shuffle all songs in the current folder on a USB storage
device.
" (Repeat All): Press the softkey below " to repeat
all tracks. The tab appears lowered when Repeat All XM Radio Messages
is being used. This is the default mode when a
USB storage device or iPod is first connected. XL (Explicit Language Channels): These channels, or
any others, can be blocked at a customer’s request,
' (Repeat Track): Press the softkey below ' to
by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
repeat one track. The tab appears raised when Repeat
Track is being used. XM Updating: The encryption code in the receiver is
being updated, and no action is required. This process
Shuffle Functionality should take no longer than 30 seconds.
To use Shuffle:
No XM Signal: The system is functioning correctly, but
Press the softkey below > , 2 , < or = to select the vehicle is in a location that is blocking the XM™
between Shuffle Off, Shuffle All Songs/Shuffle Songs, signal. When the vehicle is moved into an open area,
Shuffle Album, or Shuffle Folder. the signal should return.
> (Shuffle Off): Press the softkey below 2 to turn Loading XM: The audio system is acquiring and
processing audio and text data. No action is needed.
shuffle off. This is the default mode when a USB storage
This message should disappear shortly.
device or iPod is first connected.
Channel Off Air: This channel is not currently in
2 (Shuffle All Songs / Shuffle Songs): Press the service. Tune in to another channel.
softkey below = or < to shuffle all songs on the USB
storage device or iPod. Channel Unauth: This channel is blocked or cannot be
received with your XM Subscription package.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-77
Channel Unavail: This previously assigned channel XM Radio ID: If tuned to channel 0, this message
is no longer assigned. Tune to another station. If this alternates with the XM™ Radio 8 digit radio ID label.
station was one of the presets, choose another station This label is needed to activate the service.
for that preset button.
Unknown: If this message is received when tuned to
No Artist Info: No artist information is available at this channel 0, there could be a receiver fault. Consult
time on this channel. The system is working properly. with your dealer/retailer.
No Title Info: No song title information is available Check XM Receivr: If this message does not clear
at this time on this channel. The system is working within a short period of time, the receiver could have a
properly. fault. Consult with your dealer/retailer.
No CAT Info: No category information is available at XM Not Available: If this message does not clear within
this time on this channel. The system is working properly. a short period of time, the receiver could have a fault.
Consult with your dealer/retailer.
No Information: No text or informational messages are
available at this time on this channel. The system is
working properly. Bluetooth®
CAT Not Found: There are no channels available for Vehicles with a Bluetooth system can use a Bluetooth
the selected category. The system is working properly. capable cell phone with a Hands Free Profile to make and
receive phone calls. The system can be used while the
XM Theftlocked: The XM receiver in the vehicle key is in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY position. The
could have previously been in another vehicle. For range of the Bluetooth system can be up to 30 ft. (9.1 m).
security purposes, XM receivers cannot be swapped Not all phones support all functions, and not all phones
between vehicles. If this message is received after are guaranteed to work with the in-vehicle Bluetooth
having the vehicle serviced, check with your system. See gm.com/bluetooth for more information on
dealer/retailer. compatible phones.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-78
Voice Recognition Bluetooth Controls
The Bluetooth system uses voice recognition to interpret Use the buttons located on the steering wheel to operate
voice commands to dial phone numbers and name tags. the in-vehicle Bluetooth system. See Audio Steering
Wheel Controls on page 3-89 for more information.
Noise: Keep interior noise levels to a minimum. The
system may not recognize voice commands if there is b g (Push To Talk): Press to answer incoming calls,
too much background noise. to confirm system information, and to start speech
When to Speak: A short tone sounds after the system recognition.
responds indicating when it is waiting for a voice
command. Wait until the tone and then speak.
c x (Phone On Hook): Press to end a call, reject a
call, or to cancel an operation.
How to Speak: Speak clearly in a calm and natural
voice. Pairing
Audio System A Bluetooth enabled cell phone must be paired to
the in-vehicle Bluetooth system first and then connected
When using the in-vehicle Bluetooth system, sound to the vehicle before it can be used. See the cell phone
comes through the vehicle’s front audio system speakers manufacturers user guide for Bluetooth functions
and overrides the audio system. Use the audio system before pairing the cell phone. If a Bluetooth phone is not
volume knob, during a call, to change the volume level. connected, calls will be made using OnStar® Hands-Free
The adjusted volume level remains in memory for later Calling, if available. Refer to the OnStar owner’s guide for
calls. To prevent missed calls, a minimum volume level is more information.
used if the volume is turned down too low.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-79
Pairing Information: 4. Start the Pairing process on the cell phone that will
• Up to five cell phones can be paired to the in-vehicle be paired to the vehicle. Reference the cell phone
manufacturers user guide for information on this
Bluetooth system.
process.
• The pairing process is disabled when the vehicle is Locate the device named “General Motors” in the list
moving. on the cellular phone and follow the instructions on
• The in-vehicle Bluetooth system automatically links the cell phone to enter the four digit PIN number that
with the first available paired cell phone in the was provided in Step 3.
order the phone was paired. 5. The system prompts for a name for the phone. Use
• Only one paired cell phone can be connected to the a name that best describes the phone. This name
in-vehicle Bluetooth system at a time. will be used to indicate which phone is connected.
The system then confirms the name provided.
• Pairing should only need to be completed once,
unless changes to the pairing information have 6. The system responds with “<Phone name> has
been made or the phone is deleted. been successfully paired” after the pairing process
is complete.
To link to a different paired phone, see Linking to a
Different Phone later in this section. 7. Repeat Steps 1 through 7 for additional phones to
be paired.
Pairing a Phone Listing All Paired and Connected Phones
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
system responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system responds with
“Bluetooth ready” followed by a tone. 2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system responds with
“Bluetooth ready” followed by a tone.
3. Say “Pair”. The system responds with instructions
and a four digit PIN number. The PIN number will 3. Say “List”. The system lists all the paired Bluetooth
be used in Step 4. devices. If a phone is connected to the vehicle, the
system will say “Is connected” after the connected
phone.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-80
Deleting a Paired Phone 3. Say “Change phone”. The system responds with
“Please wait while I search for other phones”.
• If another phone is found, the response will be
“<Phone name> is now connected”.
2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system responds with
“Bluetooth ready” followed by a tone. • If another phone is not found, the original phone
remains connected.
3. Say “Delete”. The system asks which phone to
delete followed by a tone. Storing Name Tags
4. Say the name of the phone to be deleted. If the The system can store up to thirty phone numbers as
phone name is unknown, use the “List” command for name tags that are shared between the Bluetooth and
a list of all paired phones. The system responds with OnStar systems.
“Would you like to delete <phone name>? Yes or No”
followed by a tone. The system uses the following commands to store and
retrieve phone numbers:
5. Say “Yes” to delete the phone. The system
responds with “OK, deleting <phone name>”. • Store
Linking to a Different Phone • Digit Store
• Directory
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone. Using the Store Command
2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system responds with The store command allows a phone number to be
“Bluetooth ready” followed by a tone. stored without entering the digits individually.
2. Say “Store”. The system responds with “Store,
number please” followed by a tone.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-81
3. Say the complete phone number to be stored at Using the Digit Store Command
once with no pauses.
The digit store command allows a phone number to be
• If the system recognizes the number it responds stored by entering the digits individually.
with “OK, Storing” and repeats the phone number.
• If the system is unsure it recognizes the phone responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
number, it responds with “Store” and repeats the
number followed by “Please say yes or no”. If the 2. Say “Digit Store”. The system responds with
number is correct, say “Yes”. If the number is not “Please say the first digit to store” followed by
correct, say “No”. The system will ask for the a tone.
number to be re-entered. 3. Say the first digit to be stored. The system will
4. After the system stores the phone number, it repeat back the digit it heard followed by a tone.
responds with “Please say the name tag” followed Continue entering digits until the number to be
by a tone. stored is complete.
5. Say a name tag for the phone number. The name • If an unwanted number is recognized by the
tag is recorded and the system responds with system, say “Clear” at any time to clear the
“About to store <name tag>. Does that sound OK?”. last number.
• If the name tag does not sound correct, say • To hear all of the numbers recognized by the
“No” and repeat Step 5. system, say “Verify” at any time and the
system will repeat them.
• If the name tag sounds correct, say “Yes” and
the name tag is stored. After the number is 4. After the complete number has been entered, say
stored the system returns to the main menu. “Store”. The system responds with “Please say the
name tag” followed by a tone.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-82
5. Say a name tag for the phone number. The name Using the Delete Command
tag is recorded and the system responds with
“About to store <name tag>. Does that sound OK?”. The delete command allows specific name tags to be
deleted.
• If the name tag does not sound correct, say
“No” and repeat Step 5. To use the delete command:
• If the name tag sounds correct, say “Yes” and 1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
the name tag is stored. After the number is responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
stored the system returns to the main menu. 2. Say “Delete”. The system responds with “Delete,
please say the name tag” followed by a tone.
Using the Directory Command
3. Say the name tag to be deleted. The system
The directory command lists all of the name tags stored responds with “Would you like to delete, <name
by the system. To use the directory command: tag>? Please say yes or no”.
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system • If the name tag is correct, say “Yes” to delete
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone. the name tag. The system responds with “OK,
2. Say “Directory”. The system responds with deleting <name tag>, returning to the main menu.”
“Directory” and then plays back all of the stored • If the name tag is incorrect, say “No”. The system
name tags. When the list is complete, the system responds with “No. OK, let’s try again, please say
returns to the main menu. the name tag.”
Deleting Name Tags
The system uses the following commands to delete
name tags:
• Delete
• Delete all name tags
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-83
Using the Delete All Name Tags Command Using the Dial Command
The delete all name tags command deletes all stored 1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
phone book name tags and route name tags for OnStar, responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
if present.
2. Say “Dial”. The system responds with “Dial using
To use the delete all name tags command: <phone name>. Number please” followed by a tone.
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system 3. Say the entire number without pausing.
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone. • If the system recognizes the number, it responds
2. Say “Delete all name tags”. The system responds with “OK, Dialing” and dials the number.
with “You are about to delete all name tags stored • If the system does not recognize the number,
in your phone directory and your route destination
it confirms the numbers followed by a tone.
directory. Are you sure you want to do this? Please
If the number is correct, say “Yes”. The system
say yes or no.”
responds with “OK, Dialing” and dials the number.
• Say “Yes” to delete all name tags. If the number is not correct, say “No”. The system
• Say “No” to cancel the function and return to the will ask for the number to be re-entered.
main menu. Using the Digit Dial Command
Making a Call 1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
Calls can be made using the following commands:
2. Say “Digit Dial”. The system responds with “Digit
• Dial
dial using <phone name>, please say the first digit
• Digit Dial to dial” followed by a tone.
• Call 3. Say the digit to be dialed one at a time. Following
each digit, the system will repeat back the digit it
• Re-dial heard followed by a tone.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-84
4. Continue entering digits until the number to be • If the system is unsure it recognizes the right
dialed is complete. After the whole number has name tag, it confirms the name tag followed by a
been entered, say “Dial”. The system responds with tone. If the name tag is correct, say “Yes”. The
“OK, Dialing” and dials the number. system responds with “OK, calling, <name tag>”
• If an unwanted number is recognized by the and dials the number. If the name tag is not
system, say “Clear” at any time to clear the correct, say “No”. The system will ask for the
last number. name tag to be re-entered.
• To hear all of the numbers recognized by the Once connected, the person called will be heard
system, say “Verify” at any time and the system through the audio speakers.
will repeat them. Using the Re-dial Command
Using the Call Command 1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone. 2. After the tone, say “Re-dial”. The system responds
2. Say “Call”. The system responds with “Call using with “Re-dial using <phone name>” and dials the
<phone name>. Please say the name tag” followed last number called from the connected Bluetooth
by a tone. phone.
3. Say the name tag of the person to call. Once connected, the person called will be heard
through the audio speakers.
• If the system clearly recognizes the name tag it
responds with “OK, calling, <name tag>” and Receiving a Call
dials the number.
When an incoming call is received, the audio system
mutes and a ring tone is heard in the vehicle.
• Press b g and begin speaking to answer the call.
• Press c x to ignore a call.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-85
Call Waiting Ending a Call
Call waiting must be supported on the Bluetooth phone Press c x to end a call.
and enabled by the wireless service carrier to work.
• Press b g to answer an incoming call when another Muting a Call
call is active. The original call is placed on hold. During a call, all sounds from inside the vehicle can be
• Press b g again to return to the original call. muted so that the person on the other end of the call
cannot hear them.
• To ignore the incoming call, continue with the original
call with no action. To Mute a call
• Press c x to disconnect the current call and 1. Press b g . The system responds with “Ready”
switch to the call on hold. followed by a tone.
Three-Way Calling 2. Say “Mute Call”. The system responds with “Call
muted”.
Three-Way Calling must be supported on the Bluetooth
phone and enabled by the wireless service carrier To Cancel Mute
to work. 1. Press b g . The system responds with “Ready”
1. While on a call press b g . The system responds followed by a tone.
with “Ready” followed by a tone. 2. After the tone, say “Mute Call”. The system
2. Say “Three-way call”. The system responds with responds with “Resuming call”.
“Three-way call, please say dial or call”.
Transferring a Call
3. Use the dial or call command to dial the number of
the third party to be called. Audio can be transferred between the in-vehicle
Bluetooth system and the cell phone.
4. Once the call is connected, press b g to link all
the callers together.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-86
To Transfer Audio to the Cell Phone Voice Pass-Thru
During a call with the audio in the vehicle: Voice Pass-Thru allows access to the voice recognition
1. Press b g . The system responds with “Ready” commands on the cell phone. See the cell phone
manufacturers user guide to see if the cell phone
followed by a tone.
supports this feature. This feature can be used to
2. Say “Transfer Call.” The system responds with verbally access contacts stored in the cell phone.
“Transferring call” and the audio will switch from
the vehicle to the cell phone. 1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
To Transfer Audio to the In-Vehicle 2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system responds with
Bluetooth System “Bluetooth ready” followed by a tone.
The cellular phone must be paired and connected with 3. Say “Voice”. The system responds with
the Bluetooth system before a call can be transferred. “OK, accessing <phone name>”.
The connection process can take up to two minutes after
the key is turned to the ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY • The cell phone’s normal prompt messages will
position. go through its cycle according to the phone’s
operating instructions.
During a call with the audio on the cell phone,
press b g for more than two seconds. The audio Dual Tone Multi-Frequency (DTMF)
switches from the cell phone to the vehicle. Tones
The in-vehicle Bluetooth system can send numbers and
numbers stored as name tags during a call. This is used
when calling a menu driven phone system. Account
numbers can be programmed into the phonebook for
retrieval during menu driven calls.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-87
Sending a Number During a Call 3. Say the name tag to send.
1. Press b g . The system responds with “Ready” • If the system clearly recognizes the name tag it
followed by a tone. responds with “OK, Sending <name tag>” and
the dial tones are sent and the call continues.
2. Say “Dial”. The system responds with “Say a
number to send tones” followed by a tone. • If the system is not sure it recognized the name
tag properly, it responds “Dial <name tag>,
3. Say the number to send. Please say yes or no?” followed by a tone. If the
• If the system clearly recognizes the number it name tag is correct, say “Yes”. The system
responds with “OK, Sending Number” and the responds with “OK, Sending <name tag>” and
dial tones are sent and the call continues. the dial tones are sent and the call continues.
• If the system is not sure it recognized the number Clearing the System
properly, it responds “Dial Number, Please say
yes or no?” followed by a tone. If the number is Unless information is deleted out of the in-vehicle
correct, say “Yes”. The system responds with Bluetooth system, it will be retained indefinitely. This
“OK, Sending Number” and the dial tones are sent includes all saved name tags in the phonebook and
and the call continues. phone pairing information. For information on how to
delete this information, see the above sections on
Sending a Stored Name Tag During a Call Deleting a Paired Phone and Deleting Name Tags.
1. Press b g . The system responds with “Ready” Other Information
followed by a tone.
The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are owned by the
2. Say “Send name tag.” The system responds with Bluetooth® SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by
“Say a name tag to send tones” followed by a tone. General Motors is under license. Other trademarks and
trade names are those of their respective owners.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-88
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Audio Steering Wheel Controls
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference. Vehicles with audio
2. This device must accept any interference received, steering wheel controls
including interference that may cause undesired could differ depending
operation. on the vehicle’s options.
Some audio controls can
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. be adjusted at the steering
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: wheel.
1. This device may not cause interference.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to e + / e − (Volume): Press to increase or to decrease
use this equipment. the radio volume.
w / x (Next / Previous): Press to change radio

Theft-Deterrent Feature stations, select tracks on a CD, or to select tracks and
THEFTLOCK® is designed to discourage theft of the navigate folders on an iPod® or USB device.
vehicle’s radio by learning a portion of the Vehicle To change radio stations:
Identification Number (VIN). The radio does not operate
if it is stolen or moved to a different vehicle. • Press and release w or x to go to the next or
previous radio station stored as a preset.
• Press and hold w or x to go to the next or
previous radio station in the selected band with a
strong signal.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-89
To select tracks on a CD: 3. Press and release w or x to scroll up or down
Press and release w or x to go to the next or previous the list.
track. • To select a folder, press and hold w when the
To select tracks on an iPod or USB device: folder is highlighted.
• To go back further in the folder list, press and
1. Press and hold w or x while listening to a song hold x.
until the contents of the current folder display on
the radio display. c (End): Press to reject an incoming call, or end a
2. Press and release w or x to scroll up or down current call.
the list, then press and hold w to play the b g (Mute / Voice Recognition): Press to silence the
highlighted track. vehicle speakers only. Press again to turn the sound on.
To navigate folders on an iPod or USB device:
For vehicles with OnStar® or Bluetooth systems press
1. Press and hold w or x while listening to a song and hold b g for longer than two seconds to interact
until the contents of the current folder display on with those systems. See OnStar® System on page 2-40
the radio display. and Bluetooth® on page 3-78 for more information.
2. Press and hold x to go back to the previous
folder list.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-90
Radio Reception XM™ Satellite Radio Service
Frequency interference and static can occur during XM Satellite Radio Service gives digital radio reception
normal radio reception if items such as cell phone from coast-to-coast in the 48 contiguous United States,
chargers, vehicle convenience accessories, and external and in Canada. Just as with FM, tall buildings or hills can
electronic devices are plugged into the accessory power interfere with satellite radio signals, causing the sound to
outlet. If there is interference or static, unplug the item fade in and out. In addition, traveling or standing under
from the accessory power outlet. heavy foliage, bridges, garages, or tunnels may cause
loss of the XM signal for a period of time.
AM
Cellular Phone Usage
The range for most AM stations is greater than for FM,
especially at night. The longer range can cause station Cellular phone usage may cause interference with the
frequencies to interfere with each other. For better radio vehicle’s radio. This interference may occur when making
reception, most AM radio stations boost the power levels or receiving phone calls, charging the phone’s battery,
during the day, and then reduce these levels during the or simply having the phone on. This interference causes
night. Static can also occur when things like storms and an increased level of static while listening to the radio.
power lines interfere with radio reception. When this If static is received while listening to the radio, unplug the
happens, try reducing the treble on the radio. cellular phone and turn it off.
FM Stereo
FM signals only reach about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km).
Although the radio has a built-in electronic circuit that
automatically works to reduce interference, some static
can occur, especially around tall buildings or hills,
causing the sound to fade in and out.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-91
Backglass Antenna XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna
The AM-FM antenna is integrated with the rear window System
defogger, located in the rear window. Make sure that
the inside surface of the rear window is not scratched The XM Satellite Radio antenna is located on the roof of
and that the lines on the glass are not damaged. If the the vehicle. Keep the antenna clear of obstructions for
inside surface is damaged, it could interfere with radio clear radio reception.
reception. For proper radio reception, the antenna If the vehicle has a sunroof, the performance of the XM
connector needs to be properly attached to the post system may be affected if the sunroof is open.
on the glass.
If a cellular telephone antenna needs to be attached to Chime Level Adjustment
the glass, make sure that the grid lines for the AM-FM
antenna are not damaged. There is enough space The radio may be used to adjust the vehicle’s chime
between the grid lines to attach a cellular telephone level. If the radio can be used to change the volume
antenna without interfering with radio reception. level of the chime, press and hold the sixth numbered
pushbutton or the sixth FAV pushbutton with the ignition
Notice: Using a razor blade or sharp object to clear on and the radio power off. The volume level changes
the inside rear window can damage the rear window between Normal and Loud. The selected volume
antenna and/or the rear window defogger. Repairs level appears on the radio display.
would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Do not
clear the inside rear window with sharp objects. Removing the radio and not replacing it with a factory
radio or chime module will disable vehicle chimes.
Notice: Do not apply aftermarket glass tinting
with metallic film. The metallic film in some tinting
materials will interfere with or distort the incoming
radio reception. Any damage caused to your
backglass antenna due to metallic tinting materials
will not be covered by the vehicle warranty.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-92
Section 4 Driving Your Vehicle
Your Driving, the Road, and the Vehicle ............4-2 Driving at Night ............................................4-13
Driving for Better Fuel Economy .......................4-2 Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads ..................4-14
Defensive Driving ...........................................4-2 Before Leaving on a Long Trip .......................4-15
Drunk Driving .................................................4-3 Highway Hypnosis ........................................4-15
Control of a Vehicle ........................................4-4 Hill and Mountain Roads ................................4-16
Braking .........................................................4-4 Winter Driving ..............................................4-17
Antilock Brake System (ABS) ...........................4-5 If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud,
Braking in Emergencies ...................................4-6 Ice, or Snow .............................................4-19
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ......................4-6 Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out .................4-20
Traction Control System (TCS) .........................4-8 Loading the Vehicle ......................................4-20
Steering ......................................................4-10 Towing ..........................................................4-26
Off-Road Recovery .......................................4-11 Towing Your Vehicle .....................................4-26
Passing .......................................................4-12 Recreational Vehicle Towing ...........................4-26
Loss of Control .............................................4-12 Towing a Trailer ...........................................4-29
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
4-1
Your Driving, the Road, and Defensive Driving
the Vehicle Defensive driving means “always expect the
unexpected.” The first step in driving defensively is
to wear your safety belt — See Safety Belts: They Are
Driving for Better Fuel Economy for Everyone on page 1-12.
Driving habits can affect fuel mileage. Here are some
driving tips to get the best fuel economy possible.
• Avoid fast starts and accelerate smoothly.
{ CAUTION:
• Brake gradually and avoid abrupt stops. Assume that other road users (pedestrians,
• Avoid idling the engine for long periods of time. bicyclists, and other drivers) are going to be
careless and make mistakes. Anticipate what they
• When road and weather conditions are appropriate,
might do and be ready. In addition:
use cruise control, if equipped.
• Allow enough following distance between you
• Always follow posted speed limits or drive more and the driver in front of you.
slowly when conditions require. • Focus on the task of driving.
• Keep vehicle tires properly inflated. Driver distraction can cause collisions resulting in
• Combine several trips into a single trip. injury or possible death. These simple defensive
driving techniques could save your life.
• Replace the vehicle’s tires with the same
TPC Spec number molded into the tire’s sidewall
near the size.
• Follow recommended scheduled maintenance.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
4-2
Drunk Driving Police records show that almost 40 percent of all motor
vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most cases,
these deaths are the result of someone who was
drinking and driving. In recent years, more than
{ CAUTION: 17,000 annual motor vehicle-related deaths have been
associated with the use of alcohol, with about
Drinking and then driving is very dangerous. 250,000 people injured.
Your reflexes, perceptions, attentiveness, and For persons under 21, it is against the law in every
judgment can be affected by even a small amount U.S. state to drink alcohol. There are good medical,
of alcohol. You can have a serious — or even psychological, and developmental reasons for
fatal — collision if you drive after drinking. Do not these laws.
drink and drive or ride with a driver who has been The obvious way to eliminate the leading highway
drinking. Ride home in a cab; or if you are with a safety problem is for people never to drink alcohol and
group, designate a driver who will not drink. then drive.
Medical research shows that alcohol in a person’s
Death and injury associated with drinking and driving is system can make crash injuries worse, especially
a global tragedy. injuries to the brain, spinal cord, or heart. This means
that when anyone who has been drinking — driver
Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive a or passenger — is in a crash, that person’s chance of
vehicle: judgment, muscular coordination, vision, and being killed or permanently disabled is higher than if the
attentiveness. person had not been drinking.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
4-3
Control of a Vehicle And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatly
with the surface of the road, whether it is pavement
The following three systems help to control the vehicle or gravel; the condition of the road, whether it is wet,
while driving — brakes, steering, and accelerator. dry, or icy; tire tread; the condition of the brakes;
At times, as when driving on snow or ice, it is easy to ask the weight of the vehicle; and the amount of brake
more of those control systems than the tires and road can force applied.
provide. Meaning, you can lose control of the vehicle. Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive
Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affect in spurts — heavy acceleration followed by heavy
vehicle performance. See Accessories and Modifications braking — rather than keeping pace with traffic.
on page 5-3. This is a mistake. The brakes might not have time to
cool between hard stops. The brakes will wear out
much faster with a lot of heavy braking. Keeping pace
Braking with the traffic and allowing realistic following distances
See Brake System Warning Light on page 3-34. eliminates a lot of unnecessary braking. That means
better braking and longer brake life.
Braking action involves perception time and reaction
time. Deciding to push the brake pedal is perception If the engine ever stops while the vehicle is being driven,
time. Actually doing it is reaction time. brake normally but do not pump the brakes. If the brakes
are pumped, the pedal could get harder to push down.
Average reaction time is about three-fourths of a second. If the engine stops, there will still be some power brake
But that is only an average. It might be less with one assist but it will be used when the brake is applied.
driver and as long as two or three seconds or more with Once the power assist is used up, it can take longer to
another. Age, physical condition, alertness, coordination, stop and the brake pedal will be harder to push.
and eyesight all play a part. So do alcohol, drugs, and
frustration. But even in three-fourths of a second, Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affect
a vehicle moving at 60 mph (100 km/h) travels 66 feet vehicle performance. See Accessories and Modifications
(20 m). That could be a lot of distance in an emergency, on page 5-3.
so keeping enough space between the vehicle and others
is important.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
4-4
Antilock Brake System (ABS) ABS can change the brake pressure to each wheel, as
required, faster than any driver could. This can help
This vehicle has the Antilock Brake System (ABS), an the driver steer around the obstacle while braking hard.
advanced electronic braking system that helps prevent a As the brakes are applied, the computer keeps
braking skid. receiving updates on wheel speed and controls braking
When the engine is started and the vehicle begins to pressure accordingly.
drive away, ABS checks itself. A momentary motor Remember: ABS does not change the time needed to
or clicking noise might be heard while this test is going get a foot up to the brake pedal or always decrease
on, and it might even be noticed that the brake pedal stopping distance. If you get too close to the vehicle in
moves a little. This is normal. front of you, there will not be enough time to apply
If there is a problem with the brakes if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops.
ABS, this warning light Always leave enough room up ahead to stop, even
stays on. See Antilock with ABS.
Brake System (ABS)
Warning Light on Using ABS
page 3-35. Do not pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal
down firmly and let antilock work. The antilock pump or
motor might be heard operating and the brake pedal
Let us say the road is wet and you are driving safely. might be felt to pulsate, but this is normal.
Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front of you. You slam
on the brakes and continue braking. Here is what
happens with ABS:
A computer senses that the wheels are slowing down.
If one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the computer
will separately work the brakes at each wheel.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
4-5
Braking in Emergencies Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
ABS allows the driver to steer and brake at the same The vehicle may have an Electronic Stability Control
time. In many emergencies, steering can help more than (ESC) system which combines antilock brake, traction
even the very best braking. and stability control systems and helps the driver
maintain directional control of the vehicle in most
Brake Assist driving conditions.
This vehicle has a Brake Assist feature designed to When you first start the vehicle and begin to drive away,
assist the driver in stopping or decreasing vehicle speed the system performs several diagnostic checks to ensure
in emergency driving conditions. This feature uses the there are no problems. The system may be heard or felt
stability system hydraulic brake control module to while it is working. This is normal and does not mean
supplement the power brake system under conditions there is a problem with the vehicle. The system should
where the driver has quickly and forcefully applied initialize before the vehicle reaches 20 mph (32 km/h).
the brake pedal in an attempt to quickly stop or slow If the system fails to turn on or activate, the ESC/TCS
down the vehicle. The stability system hydraulic light will be on solid, and the ESC OFF or SERVICE
brake control module increases brake pressure at each ESC message will be displayed.
corner of the vehicle until the ABS activates. Minor For more information, see Driver Information Center
brake pedal pulsations or pedal movement during this (DIC) on page 3-43.
time is normal and the driver should continue to
apply the brake pedal as the driving situation dictates This light will flash on the
The Brake Assist feature will automatically disengage instrument panel cluster
when the brake pedal is released or brake pedal when the ESC system
pressure is quickly decreased. is both on and activated.
The system may be heard or felt while it is working; this

is normal.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
4-6
When the light is on solid and either the SERVICE ESC When the ESC system is turned off, the TRACTION
or ESC OFF message is displayed, the system will OFF and ESC OFF messages will appear, and
not assist the driver in maintaining directional control of the ESC/TCS light will be on solid to warn the driver
the vehicle. Adjust your driving accordingly. See DIC that both traction control and ESC are disabled.
Warnings and Messages on page 3-46. It is recommended to leave the system on for normal
The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system is driving conditions, but it may be necessary to turn
automatically enabled whenever the vehicle is started. the system off if the vehicle is stuck in sand, mud, ice or
To assist the driver with vehicle directional control, snow, and you want to “rock” the vehicle to attempt to
especially in slippery road conditions, the system should free it. It may also be necessary to turn off the system
always be left on. But, ESC can be turned off if needed. when driving in extreme off-road conditions where
high wheel spin is required. See If Your Vehicle is Stuck
If the vehicle is in cruise control when the system begins
in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow on page 4-19.
to assist the driver maintain directional control of the
vehicle, the ESC/TCS light will flash and the cruise ESC may also turn off automatically if it determines that
control will automatically disengage. The cruise control a problem exists with the system. The ESC OFF and
system may be re-engaged when road conditions SERVICE ESC messages and the ESC/TCS light will be
allow. See Cruise Control on page 3-10. on solid to warn the driver that ESC is disabled and
requires service. If the problem does not clear after
The ESC/TCS button is restarting the vehicle, see your dealer/retailer for service.
located on the instrument See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-46 for
panel. more information.
Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affect
the vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and
Modifications on page 5-3 for more information.
The traction control system can be turned off or back on

by pressing the ESC/TCS button. To disable both traction
control and ESC, press and hold the button briefly.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
4-7
Traction Control System (TCS) When this light is on
solid and either the
The vehicle may have a Traction Control System (TCS) SERVICE TRACTION or
that limits wheel spin. This is especially useful in TRACTION OFF message
slippery road conditions. The system operates only if it is displayed, the system
senses that the front wheels are spinning too much will not limit wheel spin.
or are beginning to lose traction. When this happens,
the system works the front brakes and reduces
engine power by closing the throttle and managing
engine spark to limit wheel spin. Adjust your driving accordingly. See DIC Warnings and
Messages on page 3-46 for more information.
This light will flash when
The Traction Control System is automatically enabled
the traction control system
whenever the vehicle is started. To limit wheel spin,
is limiting wheel spin.
especially in slippery road conditions, always leave the
system enabled. TCS can be turned off if needed.
It is recommended to leave the system on for normal
driving conditions, but it may be necessary to turn
the system off if the vehicle is stuck in sand, mud, ice or
snow, and you want to “rock” the vehicle to attempt to
The system may be heard or felt while it is working,
free it. It may also be necessary to turn off the
but this is normal.
system when driving in extreme off-road conditions
If the vehicle is in cruise control when TCS begins to where high wheel spin is required. See If Your Vehicle
limit wheel spin, the cruise control will automatically is Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow on page 4-19.
disengage. The cruise control may be re-engaged when
road conditions allow. See Cruise Control on page 3-10.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
4-8
To turn the system off or the differential could be damaged. The repairs would
on, press and release this not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Reduce
button located on the engine power and do not spin the wheel(s)
center console. excessively while these lights and this message
are displayed.
Notice: When traction control is turned off, it is
possible to lose traction. If you attempt to shift with
the front wheels spinning with a loss of traction,
The DIC will display the appropriate message as it is possible to cause damage to the transmission.
described previously when the button is pressed. Do not attempt to shift when the front wheels do
not have traction. Damage caused by misuse of the
Traction Control Operation vehicle is not covered. See your warranty book
for additional information.
Traction control limits wheel spin by reducing engine
power to the wheels (engine speed management) The traction control system may activate on dry or
and by applying brakes to each individual wheel rough roads or under conditions such as heavy
(brake-traction control) as necessary. acceleration while turning or abrupt upshifts/downshifts
of the transmission. When this happens, a reduction
The traction control system is enabled automatically in acceleration may be noticed, or a noise or vibration
when the vehicle is started, and it will activate and flash may be heard. This is normal.
the ESC/TCS light and display the LOW TRACTION
message if it senses either of the front wheels are If the vehicle is in cruise control when the system
spinning or beginning to lose traction while driving. activates, the ESC/TCS light will flash and the cruise
For more information on the LOW TRACTION message, control will automatically disengage. The cruise control
see Driver Information Center (DIC) on page 3-43. may be re-engaged when road conditions allow.
See Cruise Control on page 3-10.
Notice: If the wheel(s) of one axle are allowed to
spin excessively while the ESC/TCS, ABS and Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affect
Brake warning lights and the SERVICE ESC and/or the vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and
SERVICE TRACTION messages are displayed, Modifications on page 5-3 for more information.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
4-9
Steering Steering Tips
It is important to take curves at a reasonable speed.
Electric Power Steering
Traction in a curve depends on the condition of the tires
If the vehicle has the electric power steering system and and the road surface, the angle at which the curve is
the engine stalls while driving, the power steering assist banked, and vehicle speed. While in a curve, speed is
system will continue to operate until you are able to stop the one factor that can be controlled.
the vehicle. If power steering assist is lost because the
If there is a need to reduce speed, do it before entering
electric power steering system is not functioning, the
the curve, while the front wheels are straight.
vehicle can be steered but it will take more effort.
Try to adjust the speed so you can drive through the
If you turn the steering wheel in either direction several curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed. Wait to
times until it stops, or hold the steering wheel in the accelerate until out of the curve, and then accelerate
stopped position for an extended amount of time, you gently into the straightaway.
may notice a reduced amount of power steering assist.
The normal amount of power steering assist should return Steering in Emergencies
shortly after a few normal steering movements.
There are times when steering can be more effective than
The electric power steering system does not require braking. For example, you come over a hill and find a
regular maintenance. If you suspect steering system truck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly pulls out
problems, contact your dealer/retailer for service repairs. from nowhere, or a child darts out from between parked
See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-46. cars and stops right in front of you. These problems
can be avoided by braking — if you can stop in time.
Hydraulic Power Steering But sometimes you cannot stop in time because there is
If the vehicle has the hydraulic power steering system no room. That is the time for evasive action — steering
and power steering assist is lost because the engine around the problem.
stops or the power steering system is not functioning, The vehicle can perform very well in emergencies
the vehicle can be steered but it will take more effort. like these. First apply the brakes — but, unless
the vehicle has antilock brakes, not enough to
lock the wheels. See Braking on page 4-4.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
4-10
It is better to remove as much speed as possible from a Off-Road Recovery
collision. Then steer around the problem, to the left or
right depending on the space available. The vehicle’s right wheels can drop off the edge of a
road onto the shoulder while driving.
An emergency like this requires close attention and a

quick decision. If holding the steering wheel at the If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the
recommended 9 and 3 o’clock positions, it can be turned pavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off the
a full 180 degrees very quickly without removing accelerator and then, if there is nothing in the way,
either hand. But you have to act fast, steer quickly, and steer so that the vehicle straddles the edge of the
just as quickly straighten the wheel once you have pavement. Turn the steering wheel 3 to 5 inches,
avoided the object. 8 to 13 cm, (about one-eighth turn) until the right front
tire contacts the pavement edge. Then turn the steering
The fact that such emergency situations are always wheel to go straight down the roadway.
possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving
at all times and wear safety belts properly.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
4-11
Passing Skidding
Passing another vehicle on a two-lane road can be In a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.
dangerous. To reduce the risk of danger while passing: Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable
care suited to existing conditions, and by not overdriving
• Look down the road, to the sides, and to crossroads those conditions. But skids are always possible.
for situations that might affect a successful pass.
If in doubt, wait. The three types of skids correspond to the vehicle’s
three control systems. In the braking skid, the wheels
• Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings, and are not rolling. In the steering or cornering skid, too
lines that could indicate a turn or an intersection. much speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip
Never cross a solid or double-solid line on your side and lose cornering force. And in the acceleration skid,
of the lane. too much throttle causes the driving wheels to spin.
• Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to Remember: Any traction control system helps avoid only
pass. Doing so can reduce your visibility. the acceleration skid. If the traction control system is
• Wait your turn to pass a slow vehicle. off, then an acceleration skid is best handled by easing
your foot off the accelerator pedal.
• When you are being passed, ease to the right.
If the vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off the
accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want
Loss of Control the vehicle to go. If you start steering quickly enough,
Let us review what driving experts say about what the vehicle may straighten out. Always be ready for
happens when the three control systems — brakes, a second skid if it occurs.
steering, and acceleration — do not have enough friction Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow, ice,
where the tires meet the road to do what the driver gravel, or other material is on the road. For safety, slow
has asked. down and adjust your driving to these conditions. It is
In any emergency, do not give up. Keep trying to steer important to slow down on slippery surfaces because
and constantly seek an escape route or area of less stopping distance will be longer and vehicle control
danger. more limited.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
4-12
While driving on a surface with reduced traction, • Slow down and keep more space between you and
try your best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration, or other vehicles because headlamps can only light up
braking, including reducing vehicle speed by shifting so much road ahead.
to a lower gear. Any sudden changes could cause
the tires to slide. You may not realize the surface • Watch for animals.
is slippery until the vehicle is skidding. Learn to • When tired, pull off the road.
recognize warning clues — such as enough water, ice,
or packed snow on the road to make a mirrored • Do not wear sunglasses.
surface — and slow down when you have any doubt. • Avoid staring directly into approaching headlamps.
Remember: Any Antilock Brake System (ABS) helps • Keep the windshield and all glass on your vehicle
avoid only the braking skid. clean — inside and out.
• Keep your eyes moving, especially during turns
Driving at Night or curves.
Night driving is more dangerous than day driving because No one can see as well at night as in the daytime.
some drivers are likely to be impaired — by alcohol or But, as we get older, these differences increase.
drugs, with night vision problems, or by fatigue. A 50-year-old driver might need at least twice as much
light to see the same thing at night as a 20-year-old.
Night driving tips include:
• Drive defensively.
• Do not drink and drive.
• Reduce headlamp glare by adjusting the inside
rearview mirror.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
4-13
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads Hydroplaning
Rain and wet roads can reduce vehicle traction Hydroplaning is dangerous. Water can build up under
and affect your ability to stop and accelerate. your vehicle’s tires so they actually ride on the water.
Always drive slower in these types of driving This can happen if the road is wet enough and you are
conditions and avoid driving through large puddles going fast enough. When your vehicle is hydroplaning,
and deep-standing or flowing water. it has little or no contact with the road.
There is no hard and fast rule about hydroplaning.
The best advice is to slow down when the road is wet.
{ CAUTION:
Other Rainy Weather Tips
Wet brakes can cause crashes. They might not Besides slowing down, other wet weather driving tips
work as well in a quick stop and could cause pulling include:
to one side. You could lose control of the vehicle. • Allow extra following distance.
After driving through a large puddle of water or a • Pass with caution.
car/vehicle wash, lightly apply the brake pedal until
the brakes work normally. • Keep windshield wiping equipment in good shape.
Flowing or rushing water creates strong forces. • Keep the windshield washer fluid reservoir filled.
Driving through flowing water could cause your • Have good tires with proper tread depth. See Tires
vehicle to be carried away. If this happens, you and on page 5-51.
other vehicle occupants could drown. Do not ignore • Turn off cruise control.
police warnings and be very cautious about trying to
drive through flowing water.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
4-14
Before Leaving on a Long Trip Highway Hypnosis
To prepare your vehicle for a long trip, consider having Always be alert and pay attention to your surroundings
it serviced by your dealer/retailer before departing. while driving. If you become tired or sleepy, find a
safe place to park your vehicle and rest.
Things to check on your own include:
• Windshield Washer Fluid: Reservoir full? Other driving tips include:
Windows clean — inside and outside? • Keep the vehicle well ventilated.
• Wiper Blades: In good shape? • Keep interior temperature cool.
• Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: All levels checked? • Keep your eyes moving — scan the road
• Lamps: Do they all work and are lenses clean? ahead and to the sides.
• Tires: Are treads good? Are tires inflated to

• Check the rearview mirror and vehicle
instruments often.
recommended pressure?
• Weather and Maps: Safe to travel?
Have up-to-date maps?
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
4-15
Hill and Mountain Roads
Driving on steep hills or through mountains is different { CAUTION:
than driving on flat or rolling terrain. Tips for driving
in these conditions include: Coasting downhill in N (Neutral) or with the ignition
• Keep the vehicle serviced and in good shape. off is dangerous. The brakes will have to do all the
work of slowing down and they could get so hot
• Check all fluid levels and brakes, tires, cooling
that they would not work well. You would then
system, and transmission.
have poor braking or even none going down a hill.
• Going down steep or long hills, shift to a lower gear. You could crash. Always have the engine running
and the vehicle in gear when going downhill.
{ CAUTION: • Stay in your own lane. Do not swing wide or cut

across the center of the road. Drive at speeds
If you do not shift down, the brakes could get so that let you stay in your own lane.
hot that they would not work well. You would then
have poor braking or even none going down a hill. • Top of hills: Be alert — something could be in your
You could crash. Shift down to let the engine lane (stalled car, accident).
assist the brakes on a steep downhill slope. • Pay attention to special road signs (falling rocks
area, winding roads, long grades, passing or
no-passing zones) and take appropriate action.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
4-16
Winter Driving The Antilock Brake System (ABS) on page 4-5
improves vehicle stability during hard stops on a slippery
Driving on Snow or Ice roads, but apply the brakes sooner than when on dry
pavement.
Drive carefully when there is snow or ice between the Allow greater following distance on any slippery road
tires and the road, creating less traction or grip. Wet ice and watch for slippery spots. Icy patches can occur on
can occur at about 32°F (0°C) when freezing rain otherwise clear roads in shaded areas. The surface
begins to fall, resulting in even less traction. Avoid of a curve or an overpass can remain icy when
driving on wet ice or in freezing rain until roads can be the surrounding roads are clear. Avoid sudden steering
treated with salt or sand. maneuvers and braking while on ice.
Drive with caution, whatever the condition. Accelerate Turn off cruise control, if equipped, on slippery surfaces.
gently so traction is not lost. Accelerating too quickly
causes the wheels to spin and makes the surface under
the tires slick, so there is even less traction.
Try not to break the fragile traction. If you accelerate too
fast, the drive wheels will spin and polish the surface
under the tires even more.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
4-17
Blizzard Conditions
Being stuck in snow can be in a serious situation.
Stay with the vehicle unless there is help nearby.
If possible, use the Roadside Assistance Program • Open a window about two inches (5 cm) on
on page 7-7. To get help and keep everyone in the the side of the vehicle that is away from the
vehicle safe: wind to bring in fresh air.
• Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers on page 3-6. • Fully open the air outlets on or under the
instrument panel.
• Tie a red cloth to an outside mirror. • Adjust the Climate Control system to a setting
that circulates the air inside the vehicle and
set the fan speed to the highest setting.
{ CAUTION: See Climate Control System in the Index.
For more information about carbon monoxide,
Snow can trap engine exhaust under the vehicle. see Engine Exhaust on page 2-35.
This may cause exhaust gases to get inside.
Snow can trap exhaust gases under your vehicle.
Engine exhaust contains carbon monoxide (CO)
This can cause deadly CO (carbon monoxide) gas
which cannot be seen or smelled. It can cause to get inside. CO could overcome you and kill you.
unconsciousness and even death. You cannot see it or smell it, so you might not
If the vehicle is stuck in the snow: know it is in your vehicle. Clear away snow from
• Clear away snow from around the base of around the base of your vehicle, especially any
your vehicle, especially any that is blocking that is blocking the exhaust.
the exhaust pipe.
• Check again from time to time to be sure
snow does not collect there.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
4-18
Run the engine for short periods only as needed to If the vehicle has a traction system, it can often help to
keep warm, but be careful. free a stuck vehicle. Refer to the vehicle’s traction
system in the Index. If stuck too severely for the traction
To save fuel, run the engine for only short periods as
system to free the vehicle, turn the traction system off
needed to warm the vehicle and then shut the engine off
and use the rocking method.
and close the window most of the way to save heat.
Repeat this until help arrives but only when you feel
really uncomfortable from the cold. Moving about
to keep warm also helps. { CAUTION:
If it takes some time for help to arrive, now and then
when you run the engine, push the accelerator If you let your vehicle’s tires spin at high speed,
pedal slightly so the engine runs faster than the idle they can explode, and you or others could be
speed. This keeps the battery charged to restart injured. The vehicle can overheat, causing an
the vehicle and to signal for help with the headlamps. engine compartment fire or other damage. Spin
Do this as little as possible to save fuel. the wheels as little as possible and avoid going
above 35 mph (55 km/h) as shown on the
If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, speedometer.
Mud, Ice, or Snow
For information about using tire chains on the vehicle,
Slowly and cautiously spin the wheels to free the see Tire Chains on page 5-74.
vehicle when stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow.
See Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out on page 4-20.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
4-19
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out Loading the Vehicle
Turn the steering wheel left and right to clear the It is very important to know how much weight
area around the front wheels. Turn off any traction your vehicle can carry. This weight is called the
or stability system. Shift back and forth between vehicle capacity weight and includes the weight of
R (Reverse) and a forward gear, spinning the wheels as all occupants, cargo, and all nonfactory-installed
little as possible. To prevent transmission wear, wait options. Two labels on the vehicle show how much
until the wheels stop spinning before shifting gears. weight it may properly carry, the Tire and Loading
Release the accelerator pedal while shifting, and press Information label and the Vehicle Certification label.
lightly on the accelerator pedal when the transmission
is in gear. Slowly spinning the wheels in the forward and
reverse directions causes a rocking motion that could
free the vehicle. If that does not get the vehicle out
{ CAUTION:
after a few tries, it might need to be towed out. If the
vehicle does need to be towed out, see Towing Do not load the vehicle any heavier than the
Your Vehicle on page 4-26. Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), or
either the maximum front or rear Gross Axle
Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do, parts on
the vehicle can break, and it can change
the way your vehicle handles. These could
cause you to lose control and crash.
Also, overloading can shorten the life of
the vehicle.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
4-20
Tire and Loading Information Label The Tire and Loading Information label also lists
the tire size of the original equipment tires (C) and
the recommended cold tire inflation pressures (D).
For more information on tires and inflation, see
Tires on page 5-51 and Inflation - Tire Pressure
on page 5-59.
There is also important loading information on the
Certification label. It tells you the Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating (GVWR) and the Gross Axle
Weight Rating (GAWR) for the front and rear axle,
see “Certification Label” later in this section.
Label Example
A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information

label is attached to the vehicle’s center
pillar (B-pillar). With the driver’s door open,
you will find the label attached below the door
lock post (striker). The Tire and Loading
Information label lists the number of occupant
seating positions (A), and the maximum vehicle
capacity weight (B) in kilograms and pounds.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
4-21
Steps for Determining Correct 5. Determine the combined weight of luggage
and cargo being loaded on the vehicle.
Load Limit That weight may not safely exceed the
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of available cargo and luggage load capacity
occupants and cargo should never exceed calculated in Step 4.
XXX kg or XXX lbs” on your vehicle’s placard. 6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, the load
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver from your trailer will be transferred to your
and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how
vehicle. this reduces the available cargo and luggage
load capacity for your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver
and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs. If your vehicle can tow a trailer, see Towing a
Trailer on page 4-29 for important information
4. The resulting figure equals the available
on towing a trailer, towing safety rules, and
amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. trailering tips.
For example, if the “XXX” amount equals
1400 lbs and there will be five 150 lb
passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity is
650 lbs (1400 − 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
4-22
Example 1 Example 2
Item Description Total Item Description Total

Maximum Vehicle Maximum Vehicle
1,000 lbs 1,000 lbs
A Capacity Weight for A Capacity Weight for
(453 kg) (453 kg)
Example 1 = Example 2 =
Subtract Occupant Subtract Occupant
300 lbs 750 lbs
B Weight 150 lbs (136 kg) B Weight 150 lbs (340 kg)
(68 kg) × 2 = (68 kg) × 5 =
C Available Occupant and 700 lbs C Available Cargo Weight = 250 lbs
Cargo Weight = (317 kg) (113 kg)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
4-23
Certification Label
Example 3
Item Description Total

Maximum Vehicle
1,000 lbs
A Capacity Weight for
(453 kg)
Example 3 =
Subtract Occupant A vehicle specific Certification label is attached to
1,000 lbs the driver side center pillar.
B Weight 200 lbs (453 kg)
(91 kg) × 5 = The label shows the gross weight capacity of your
C Available Cargo Weight = 0 lbs (0 kg) vehicle, called the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR). The GVWR includes the weight of
Refer to the vehicle’s Tire and Loading Information the vehicle, all occupants, fuel, cargo, and tongue
label for specific information about your vehicle’s weight if pulling a trailer.
maximum vehicle capacity weight and seating Never exceed the GVWR for the vehicle or the
positions. The combined weight of the driver, Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for either the
passengers, and cargo should never exceed the front or rear axle.
vehicle’s maximum vehicle capacity weight.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
4-24
Do not load the vehicle any heavier than the Things you put inside the vehicle can strike
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), or and injure people in a sudden stop or turn, or
either the maximum front or rear Gross Axle in a crash.
Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do, parts on • Put things in the trunk of your vehicle.
the vehicle can break, and it can change In a trunk, put them as far forward as you
the way your vehicle handles. These could can. Try to spread the weight evenly.
cause you to lose control and crash.
Also, overloading can shorten the life of the • Never stack heavier things, like
vehicle. suitcases, inside the vehicle so that some
of them are above the tops of the seats.
• Do not leave an unsecured child restraint
Notice: Overloading your vehicle may cause in the vehicle.
damage. Repairs would not be covered by your • When you carry something inside the
warranty. Do not overload your vehicle. vehicle, secure it whenever you can.
If things like suitcases, tools, packages, or • Do not leave a seat folded down unless
anything else are put inside the vehicle, they will you need to.
go as fast as the vehicle goes. If you have to
stop or turn quickly, or if there is a crash, they will
keep going.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
4-25
Towing Here are some important things to consider before
recreational vehicle towing:
• What’s the towing capacity of the towing vehicle?
Towing Your Vehicle Be sure to read the tow vehicle manufacturer’s
recommendations.
To avoid damage, the disabled vehicle should be towed
with all four wheels off the ground. Consult your • How far will the vehicle be towed? Some vehicles
dealer/retailer or a professional towing service if the have restrictions on how far and how long they
disabled vehicle must be towed. See Roadside can tow.
Assistance Program on page 7-7.
• Does the vehicle have the proper towing
To tow the vehicle behind another vehicle for equipment? See your dealer/retailer or trailering
recreational purposes, such as behind a motorhome, professional for additional advice and equipment
see “Recreational Vehicle Towing” following. recommendations.
• Is the vehicle ready to be towed? Just as preparing
Recreational Vehicle Towing the vehicle for a long trip, make sure the vehicle is
prepared to be towed. See Before Leaving on a
Recreational vehicle towing means towing the vehicle Long Trip on page 4-15.
behind another vehicle – such as behind a motorhome.
The two most common types of recreational vehicle Dinghy Towing
towing are known as dinghy towing and dolly towing.
Dinghy towing is towing the vehicle with all four wheels When dinghy towing, the vehicle should be run at the
on the ground. Dolly towing is towing the vehicle with beginning of each day and at each RV fuel stop for
two wheels on the ground and two wheels up on a about five minutes. This will ensure proper lubrication of
device known as a dolly. transmission components.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
4-26
5. Turn the ignition to ACC/ACCESSORY.
6. Shift the transmission to N (Neutral).
7. Release the parking brake.
Remember to reinstall the IGN SENSOR fuse once the
destination has been reached.
Notice: If 65 mph (105 km/h) is exceeded while
towing the vehicle, it could be damaged. Never
exceed 65 mph (105 km/h) while towing the vehicle.
To dinghy tow the vehicle from the front with all four
wheels on the ground:
1. Position the vehicle to tow and then secure it to the
towing vehicle.
2. Shift the transmission to P (Park) and turn the
ignition to LOCK/OFF.
3. Set the parking brake.
4. To prevent the battery from draining while the
vehicle is being towed, remove the following
fuse from the instrument panel fuse block: Notice: Towing the vehicle from the rear could
(IGN SENSOR). See Instrument Panel Fuse Block damage it. Also, repairs would not be covered by the
on page 5-99 for more information. vehicle warranty. Never have the vehicle towed
from the rear.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
4-27
Dolly Towing 5. Remove the key from the ignition.
6. Secure the vehicle to the dolly.
7. Release the parking brake.
Tow the vehicle with the two rear wheels on the ground
and the front wheels on a dolly:
To tow the vehicle with two wheels on the ground and Notice: Towing the vehicle from the rear could
a dolly: damage it. Also, repairs would not be covered by the
1. Put the front wheels on a dolly. vehicle warranty. Never have the vehicle towed from
the rear.
2. Put the gear shift lever in P (Park).
3. Set the parking brake.
4. Clamp the steering wheel in a straight-ahead
position with a clamping device designed for towing.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
4-28
Towing a Trailer The vehicle can tow a trailer if it is equipped with
the proper trailer towing equipment. To identify the
trailering capacity of the vehicle, read the information in
“Weight of the Trailer” that appears later in this section.
{ CAUTION: Trailering is different than just driving the vehicle
by itself. Trailering means changes in handling,
The driver can lose control when pulling a trailer if acceleration, braking, durability and fuel economy.
the correct equipment is not used or the vehicle is Successful, safe trailering takes correct equipment,
not driven properly. For example, if the trailer is and it has to be used properly.
too heavy, the brakes may not work well — or The following information has many time-tested,
even at all. The driver and passengers could be important trailering tips and safety rules. Many of
seriously injured. The vehicle may also be these are important for the safety of the driver and
damaged; the resulting repairs would not be the passengers. So please read this section carefully
covered by the vehicle warranty. Pull a trailer only before pulling a trailer.
if all the steps in this section have been followed. Load-pulling components such as the engine,
Ask your dealer/retailer for advice and information transmission, axles, wheel assemblies and tires are
about towing a trailer with the vehicle. forced to work harder against the drag of the added
weight. The engine is required to operate at relatively
higher speeds and under greater loads, generating
Notice: Pulling a trailer improperly can damage the extra heat. The trailer also adds considerably to wind
vehicle and result in costly repairs not covered resistance, increasing the pulling requirements.
by the vehicle warranty. To pull a trailer correctly,
follow the advice in this section and see your
dealer/retailer for important information about
towing a trailer with the vehicle.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
4-29
Pulling A Trailer Three important considerations have to do with weight:
Here are some important points: • the weight of the trailer,

• There are many different laws, including speed limit • the weight of the trailer tongue
restrictions, having to do with trailering. Make sure • and the total weight on the vehicle’s tires.
the rig will be legal, not only where you live but
also where you will be driving. A good source for Weight of the Trailer
this information can be state or provincial police.
• Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 1,000 miles How heavy can a trailer safely be?
(1600 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine, It should never weigh more than 1,000 lbs (454 kg).
transmission or other parts could be damaged. But even that can be too heavy.
The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle’s It depends on how the rig is used. For example, speed,
warranty. altitude, road grades, outside temperature and how
• Then, during the first 500 miles (800 km) that a much the vehicle is used to pull a trailer are all
trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h) important. It can depend on any special equipment on
and do not make starts at full throttle. This helps the vehicle, and the amount of tongue weight the vehicle
the engine and other parts of the vehicle wear in at can carry. See “Weight of the Trailer Tongue” later in
the heavier loads. this section for more information.
• Obey speed limit restrictions when towing a trailer. Maximum trailer weight is calculated assuming only the
Do not drive faster than the maximum posted driver is in the tow vehicle and it has all the required
speed for trailers, or no more than 55 mph trailering equipment. The weight of additional optional
(90 km/h), to save wear on the vehicle’s parts. equipment, passengers and cargo in the tow vehicle
must be subtracted from the maximum trailer weight.
• Do not tow a trailer when the outside temperature is
above 100°F (38°C).
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
4-30
Ask your dealer/retailer for trailering information or
advice, or write us at our Customer Assistance Offices.
See Customer Assistance Offices on page 7-6 for
more information.
Weight of the Trailer Tongue

The tongue load (A) of any trailer is an important weight
to measure because it affects the total gross weight
of the vehicle. The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW)
includes the curb weight of the vehicle, any cargo
carried in it, and the people who will be riding in the
vehicle. If there are a lot of options, equipment, Using a weight-carrying hitch, the trailer tongue (A)
passengers or cargo in the vehicle, it will reduce the should weigh 10 to 15 percent of the total loaded trailer
tongue weight the vehicle can carry, which will also weight (B).
reduce the trailer weight the vehicle can tow. If towing a
trailer, the tongue load must be added to the GVW After loading the trailer, weigh the trailer and then the
because the vehicle will be carrying that weight, too. tongue, separately, to see if the weights are proper.
See Loading the Vehicle on page 4-20 for more If they are not, adjustments might be made by moving
information about the vehicle’s maximum load capacity. some items around in the trailer.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
4-31
Total Weight on the Vehicle’s Tires Safety Chains
Be sure the vehicle’s tires are inflated to the upper limit Always attach chains between the vehicle and the
for cold tires. These numbers can be found on the trailer. Cross the safety chains under the tongue of
Certification/Tire label. See Loading the Vehicle on the trailer to help prevent the tongue from contacting the
page 4-20. Make sure not to go over the GVW limit for road if it becomes separated from the hitch. Instructions
the vehicle, including the weight of the trailer tongue. about safety chains may be provided by the hitch
manufacturer or by the trailer manufacturer. Follow the
Hitches manufacturer’s recommendation for attaching safety
chains and do not attach them to the bumper. Always
It is important to have the correct hitch equipment.
leave just enough slack so the rig can turn. Never allow
Crosswinds, large trucks going by and rough roads
safety chains to drag on the ground.
are a few reasons why the right hitch is needed.
Here are some rules to follow: Trailer Brakes
• The rear bumper on the vehicle is not intended
Because the vehicle has antilock brakes, do not try to
for hitches. Do not attach rental hitches or
tap into the vehicle’s hydraulic brake system. If you
other bumper-type hitches to it. Use only a
do, both brake systems will not work well, or at all.
frame-mounted hitch that does not attach to the
bumper. Does your trailer have its own brakes? Be sure to read
and follow the instructions for the trailer brakes so
• Will any holes be made in the body of the vehicle you will be able to install, adjust and maintain them
when the trailer hitch is installed? If there are, properly.
then be sure to seal the holes later when the hitch
is removed. If the holes are not sealed, dirt, water,
and deadly carbon monoxide (CO) from the exhaust
can get into the vehicle. See Engine Exhaust on
page 2-35 in the Index for more information.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
4-32
Driving with a Trailer Passing
Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of experience. More passing distance is needed when towing a trailer.
Get to know the rig before setting out for the open Because the rig is longer, it is necessary to go much
road. Get acquainted with the feel of handling and farther beyond the passed vehicle before returning to
braking with the added weight of the trailer. And always the lane.
keep in mind that the vehicle you are driving is now
longer and not as responsive as the vehicle is by itself. Backing Up
Before starting, check all trailer hitch parts and Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand.
attachments, safety chains, electrical connectors, lamps, Then, to move the trailer to the left, move that hand
tires and mirror adjustments. If the trailer has electric to the left. To move the trailer to the right, move your
brakes, start the vehicle and trailer moving and then hand to the right. Always back up slowly and, if possible,
apply the trailer brake controller by hand to be sure the have someone guide you.
brakes are working. This checks the electrical connection
at the same time. Making Turns
During the trip, check occasionally to be sure that the Notice: Making very sharp turns while trailering
load is secure, and that the lamps and any trailer brakes could cause the trailer to come in contact with the
are still working. vehicle. The vehicle could be damaged. Avoid
making very sharp turns while trailering.
Following Distance
When turning with a trailer, make wider turns than
Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead as normal. Do this so the trailer will not strike soft
you would when driving the vehicle without a trailer. shoulders, curbs, road signs, trees or other objects.
This can help to avoid situations that require heavy Avoid jerky or sudden maneuvers. Signal well in
braking and sudden turns. advance.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
4-33
Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer Parking on Hills
The arrows on the instrument panel flash whenever
signaling a turn or lane change. Properly hooked up, the
trailer lamps also flash, telling other drivers the vehicle { CAUTION:
is turning, changing lanes or stopping.
When towing a trailer, the arrows on the instrument Parking the vehicle on a hill with the trailer
panel flash for turns even if the bulbs on the trailer are attached can be dangerous. If something goes
burned out. For this reason you may think other wrong, the rig could start to move. People can be
drivers are seeing the signal when they are not. It is injured, and both the vehicle and the trailer can be
important to check occasionally to be sure the trailer damaged. When possible, always park the rig on a
bulbs are still working. flat surface.
Driving on Grades
Notice: Do not tow on steep continuous grades If parking the rig on a hill:
exceeding 6 miles (9.6 km). Extended, higher 1. Press the brake pedal, but do not shift into P (Park)
than normal engine and transmission temperatures yet. Turn the wheels into the curb if facing downhill
may result and damage the vehicle. Frequent or into traffic if facing uphill.
stops are very important to allow the engine and
transmission to cool. 2. Have someone place chocks under the trailer wheels.
Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before starting 3. When the wheel chocks are in place, release the
down a long or steep downgrade. If the transmission brake pedal until the chocks absorb the load.
is not shifted down, the brakes might have to be used so 4. Reapply the brake pedal. Then apply the parking
much that they would get hot and no longer work well. brake and shift the transmission into P (Park).
On a long uphill grade, shift down and reduce the 5. Release the brake pedal.
vehicle’s speed to around 45 mph (70 km/h) to reduce
the possibility of the engine and the transmission
overheating. If the engine does overheat, see Engine
Overheating on page 5-34.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
4-34
Leaving After Parking on a Hill Engine Cooling When Trailer Towing
1. Apply and hold the brake pedal while you: The cooling system may temporarily overheat during
• start the engine, severe operating conditions. See Engine Overheating on
page 5-34.
• shift into a gear, and
• release the parking brake.
Changing a Tire When Trailer Towing
2. Let up on the brake pedal. If the vehicle gets a flat tire while towing a trailer,
be sure to secure the trailer and disconnect it from the
3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks. vehicle before changing the tire.
4. Stop and have someone pick up and store the
chocks.
Maintenance When Trailer Towing
The vehicle needs service more often when pulling a
trailer. See Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4
for more information. Things that are especially
important in trailer operation are automatic transmission
fluid, engine oil, belts, cooling system and brake
system. It is a good idea to inspect these before and
during the trip.
Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and bolts
are tight.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
4-35
✍ NOTES
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
4-36
Section 5 Service and Appearance Care
Service ............................................................5-3 Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap ..................5-33
Accessories and Modifications ..........................5-3 Engine Overheating .......................................5-34
California Proposition 65 Warning .....................5-4 Overheated Engine Protection
California Perchlorate Materials Requirements .....5-4 Operating Mode ........................................5-36
Doing Your Own Service Work .........................5-4 Power Steering Fluid .....................................5-36
Adding Equipment to the Outside of the Windshield Washer Fluid ................................5-38
Vehicle ......................................................5-5 Brakes ........................................................5-39
Fuel ................................................................5-5 Battery ........................................................5-42
Gasoline Octane ............................................5-6 Jump Starting ...............................................5-43
Gasoline Specifications ....................................5-6 Headlamp Aiming ...........................................5-47
California Fuel ...............................................5-6 Bulb Replacement ..........................................5-47
Additives .......................................................5-7 Halogen Bulbs ..............................................5-47
Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) ..................................5-8 Taillamps, Turn Signal, and Stoplamps ............5-48
Fuels in Foreign Countries .............................5-10 License Plate Lamp ......................................5-49
Filling the Tank ............................................5-10 Replacement Bulbs .......................................5-50
Filling a Portable Fuel Container .....................5-13
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ..............5-50
Checking Things Under the Hood ....................5-14
Hood Release ..............................................5-14 Tires ..............................................................5-51
Engine Compartment Overview .......................5-16 Winter Tires .................................................5-52
Engine Oil ...................................................5-21 Tire Sidewall Labeling ...................................5-53
Engine Oil Life System ..................................5-24 Tire Terminology and Definitions .....................5-56
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter ................................5-26 Inflation - Tire Pressure .................................5-59
Automatic Transmission Fluid .........................5-28 High-Speed Operation ...................................5-60
Cooling System ............................................5-28 Tire Pressure Monitor System .........................5-61
Engine Coolant .............................................5-29 Tire Pressure Monitor Operation .....................5-62
Pressure Cap ...............................................5-33 Tire Inspection and Rotation ...........................5-66
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-1
Section 5 Service and Appearance Care
When It Is Time for New Tires .......................5-67 Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses .....................5-94
Buying New Tires .........................................5-68 Finish Care ..................................................5-94
Different Size Tires and Wheels ......................5-70 Windshield and Wiper Blades .........................5-95
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ..........................5-70 Aluminum Wheels .........................................5-95
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ..................5-72 Tires ...........................................................5-96
Wheel Replacement ......................................5-72 Sheet Metal Damage .....................................5-96
Tire Chains ..................................................5-74 Finish Damage .............................................5-96
If a Tire Goes Flat ........................................5-75 Underbody Maintenance ................................5-97
Changing a Flat Tire .....................................5-76 Chemical Paint Spotting .................................5-97
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ................5-77 Vehicle Identification ......................................5-97
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) .................5-97
Spare Tire ................................................5-79 Service Parts Identification Label .....................5-98
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools ............5-85
Compact Spare Tire ......................................5-89 Electrical System ............................................5-98
Add-On Electrical Equipment ..........................5-98
Appearance Care ............................................5-90 Windshield Wiper Fuses ................................5-98
Interior Cleaning ...........................................5-90 Power Windows and Other Power Options .......5-98
Fabric/Carpet ...............................................5-91 Fuses .........................................................5-99
Leather .......................................................5-92 Instrument Panel Fuse Block ..........................5-99
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other Plastic Engine Compartment Fuse Block ...................5-102
Surfaces ..................................................5-92 Rear Compartment Fuse Block .....................5-105
Care of Safety Belts ......................................5-93
Weatherstrips ...............................................5-93 Capacities and Specifications ........................5-108
Washing Your Vehicle ...................................5-93
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-2
Service Accessories and Modifications
For service and parts needs, visit your dealer/retailer. When non-dealer/non-retailer accessories are added
You will receive genuine GM parts and GM-trained to the vehicle, they can affect vehicle performance and
and supported service people. safety, including such things as airbags, braking, stability,
ride and handling, emissions systems, aerodynamics,
Genuine GM parts have one of these marks: durability, and electronic systems like antilock brakes,
traction control, and stability control. Some of these
accessories could even cause malfunction or damage
not covered by the vehicle warranty.
Damage to vehicle components resulting from the
installation or use of non-GM certified parts, including
control module modifications, are not covered under the
terms of the vehicle warranty and may affect remaining
warranty coverage for affected parts.
GM Accessories are designed to complement and
function with other systems on the vehicle. Your GM
dealer/retailer can accessorize the vehicle using genuine
GM Accessories. When you go to your GM dealer/
retailer and ask for GM Accessories, you will know
that GM-trained and supported service technicians
will perform the work using genuine GM Accessories.
Also, see Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle on page 1-72.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-3
California Proposition 65 Warning Doing Your Own Service Work
Most motor vehicles, including this one, contain and/or
emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause
cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. { CAUTION:
Engine exhaust, many parts and systems (including
some inside the vehicle), many fluids, and some You can be injured and the vehicle could be
component wear by-products contain and/or emit damaged if you try to do service work on a vehicle
these chemicals.
without knowing enough about it.
• Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,
California Perchlorate Materials experience, the proper replacement parts,
Requirements and tools before attempting any vehicle
maintenance task.
Certain types of automotive applications, such as • Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts, and
airbag initiators, seat belt pretensioners, and lithium other fasteners. English and metric fasteners
batteries contained in remote keyless transmitters, can be easily confused. If the wrong fasteners
may contain perchlorate materials. Special handling are used, parts can later break or fall off.
may be necessary. For additional information, see You could be hurt.
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-4
If doing some of your own service work, use the proper
service manual. It tells you much more about how to
Fuel
service the vehicle than this manual can. To order the Use of the recommended fuel is an important part of
proper service manual, see Service Publications Ordering the proper maintenance of this vehicle. To help keep the
Information on page 7-16. engine clean and maintain optimum vehicle performance,
This vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting we recommend the use of gasoline advertised as
to do your own service work, see Servicing Your TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline.
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-71. The 8th digit of the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Keep a record with all parts receipts and list the shows the code letter or number that identifies
mileage and the date of any service work performed. the vehicle’s engine. The VIN is at the top left of
See Maintenance Record on page 6-16. the instrument panel. See Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN) on page 5-97.
Adding Equipment to the Outside of If the vehicle has the 3.5L V6 engine (VIN Code K),
you can use either unleaded gasoline or ethanol fuel
the Vehicle containing up to 85% ethanol (E85). See Fuel E85
(85% Ethanol) on page 5-8. In all other engines, use only
Things added to the outside of the vehicle can affect the
the unleaded gasoline described under Gasoline Octane
airflow around it. This can cause wind noise and can
on page 5-6.
affect fuel economy and windshield washer performance.
Check with your dealer/retailer before adding equipment
to the outside of the vehicle.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-5
Gasoline Octane Gasoline Specifications
If the vehicle has the 2.4L L4 engine (VIN Code B), At a minimum, gasoline should meet ASTM specification
the 3.5L V6 engine (VIN Code K), or the 3.5L V6 engine D 4814 in the United States or CAN/CGSB-3.5 or 3.511 in
(VIN Code N), use regular unleaded gasoline with a Canada. Some gasolines contain an octane-enhancing
posted octane rating of 87 or higher. If the octane rating is additive called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese
less than 87, you might notice an audible knocking noise tricarbonyl (MMT). We recommend against the use of
when you drive, commonly referred to as spark knock. gasolines containing MMT. See Additives on page 5-7
If this occurs, use a gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher for additional information.
as soon as possible. If you are using gasoline rated at
87 octane or higher and you hear heavy knocking, the
engine needs service.
California Fuel
If the vehicle has the 3.6L V6 engine (VIN Code 7), If the vehicle is certified to meet California Emissions
use regular unleaded gasoline with a posted octane Standards, it is designed to operate on fuels that meet
rating of 87 or higher. For best performance or trailer California specifications. See the underhood emission
towing, you could choose to use middle grade 89 octane control label. If this fuel is not available in states adopting
unleaded gasoline. If the octane rating is less than 87, California emissions standards, the vehicle will operate
you might notice an audible knocking noise when you satisfactorily on fuels meeting federal specifications, but
drive, commonly referred to as spark knock. If this occurs, emission control system performance might be affected.
use a gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher as soon as The malfunction indicator lamp could turn on and the
possible. If you are using gasoline rated at 87 octane or vehicle might fail a smog-check test. See Malfunction
higher and you hear heavy knocking, the engine needs Indicator Lamp on page 3-38. If this occurs, return to your
service. authorized dealer/retailer for diagnosis. If it is determined
that the condition is caused by the type of fuel used,
repairs might not be covered by the vehicle warranty.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-6
Additives Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as ethers and
ethanol, and reformulated gasolines might be available in
To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United States your area. We recommend that you use these gasolines,
are now required to contain additives that help prevent if they comply with the specifications described earlier.
engine and fuel system deposits from forming, allowing However, E85 (85% ethanol) and other fuels containing
the emission control system to work properly. In most more than 10% ethanol must not be used in vehicles that
cases, you should not have to add anything to the fuel. were not designed for those fuels.
However, some gasolines contain only the minimum
Notice: This vehicle was not designed for fuel that
amount of additive required to meet U.S. Environmental
contains methanol. Do not use fuel containing
Protection Agency regulations. To help keep fuel injectors
methanol. It can corrode metal parts in the fuel
and intake valves clean, or if the vehicle experiences
system and also damage plastic and rubber parts.
problems due to dirty injectors or valves, look for gasoline
That damage would not be covered under the
that is advertised as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline.
vehicle warranty.
For customers who do not use TOP TIER Detergent
Some gasolines that are not reformulated for
Gasoline regularly, one bottle of GM Fuel System
low emissions can contain an octane-enhancing
Treatment PLUS, added to the fuel tank at every engine
additive called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese
oil change, can help clean deposits from fuel injectors
tricarbonyl (MMT); ask the attendant where you buy
and intake valves. GM Fuel System Treatment PLUS
gasoline whether the fuel contains MMT. We recommend
is the only gasoline additive recommended by General
against the use of such gasolines. Fuels containing MMT
Motors.
can reduce the life of spark plugs and the performance
Also, your dealer/retailer has additives that will help of the emission control system could be affected.
correct and prevent most deposit-related problems. The malfunction indicator lamp might turn on. If this
occurs, return to your dealer/retailer for service.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-7
Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) Many service stations will not have an 85% ethanol fuel
(E85) pump available. The U. S. Department of Energy
The 8th digit of the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) has an alternative fuels website (www.eere.energy.gov/
shows the code letter or number that identifies the afdc/infrastructure/locator.html) that can help you find
vehicle’s engine. The VIN is at the top left of the E85 fuel. Those stations that do have E85 should have
instrument panel. See Vehicle Identification a label indicating ethanol content. Do not use the fuel if
Number (VIN) on page 5-97. the ethanol content is greater than 85%.
If the vehicle has the 3.5L V6 engine (VIN Code K), At a minimum, E85 should meet ASTM Specification
you can use either unleaded gasoline or ethanol D 5798. By definition, this means that fuel labeled E85
fuel containing up to 85% ethanol (E85). See Fuel on will have an ethanol content between 70% and 85%.
page 5-5. In all other engines, use only the unleaded Filling the fuel tank with fuel mixtures that do not meet
gasoline described under Gasoline Octane on page 5-6. ASTM specifications can affect driveability and could
cause the malfunction indicator lamp to come on.
Only vehicles that have the 3.5L V6 engine
(VIN Code K) can use 85% ethanol fuel (E85). To ensure quick starts in the wintertime, the E85 fuel
We encourage the use of E85 in vehicles that are must be formulated properly for your climate according
designed to use it. The ethanol in E85 is a “renewable” to ASTM specification D 5798. If you have trouble
fuel, meaning it is made from renewable sources such starting on E85, it could be because the E85 fuel
as corn and other crops. is not properly formulated for your climate. If this
happens, switching to gasoline or adding gasoline
to the fuel tank can improve starting.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-8
For good starting and heater efficiency below 32°F (0°C), Notice: Some additives are not compatible with
the fuel mix in the fuel tank should contain no more E85 fuel and can harm the vehicle’s fuel system.
than 70% ethanol. It is best not to alternate repeatedly Do not add anything to E85. Damage caused
between gasoline and E85. If you do switch fuels, by additives would not be covered by the vehicle
it is recommended that you add as much fuel as warranty.
possible — do not add less than three gallons (11 L)
when refueling. You should drive the vehicle immediately Notice: This vehicle was not designed for fuel
after refueling for at least seven miles (11 km) to allow the that contains methanol. Do not use fuel containing
vehicle to adapt to the change in ethanol concentration. methanol. It can corrode metal parts in the fuel
system and also damage plastic and rubber parts.
E85 has less energy per gallon than gasoline, so you That damage would not be covered under the vehicle
will need to refill the fuel tank more often when using E85 warranty.
than when you are using gasoline. See Filling the Tank
on page 5-10.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-9
Fuels in Foreign Countries Filling the Tank
If you plan on driving in another country outside the
United States or Canada, the proper fuel might be hard
to find. Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuel { CAUTION:
not recommended in the previous text on fuel. Costly
repairs caused by use of improper fuel would not Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire can
be covered by the vehicle warranty. cause bad injuries. To help avoid injuries to you
To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club, or and others, read and follow all the instructions on
contact a major oil company that does business in the pump island. Turn off the engine when you are
the country where you will be driving. refueling. Do not smoke if you are near fuel or
refueling the vehicle. Do not use cellular phones.
Keep sparks, flames, and smoking materials away
from fuel. Do not leave the fuel pump unattended
when refueling the vehicle. This is against the law
in some places. Do not re-enter the vehicle while
pumping fuel. Keep children away from the fuel
pump; never let children pump fuel.
The fuel door is located on the passenger side of the

vehicle.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-10
To open the fuel door, push the rearward center edge in
and release and it will open.
To remove the tethered fuel cap, turn it slowly
counterclockwise. If the vehicle has E85 fuel capability,
the fuel cap will be yellow and state that E85 or gasoline
can be used. See Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) on page 5-8.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-11
While refueling, hang the tethered fuel cap from the If the vehicle has a Driver Information Center (DIC),
hook on the fuel door. the CHECK GAS CAP message displays if the fuel cap
is not properly installed.
{ CAUTION:
{ CAUTION:
Fuel can spray out on you if you open the fuel cap
too quickly. If you spill fuel and then something If a fire starts while you are refueling, do not
ignites it, you could be badly burned. This spray remove the nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel by
can happen if the tank is nearly full, and is more shutting off the pump or by notifying the station
likely in hot weather. Open the fuel cap slowly and attendant. Leave the area immediately.
wait for any hiss noise to stop. Then unscrew the
cap all the way.
Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure to get
the right type. Your dealer/ retailer can get one
Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not top off or overfill the for you. If you get the wrong type, it might not fit
tank and wait a few seconds after you have finished properly. This can cause the malfunction indicator
pumping the fuel before removing the nozzle. Clean lamp to light and can damage the fuel tank and
fuel from painted surfaces as soon as possible. emissions system. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp
See Washing Your Vehicle on page 5-93. on page 3-38.
When replacing the fuel cap, turn it to the clockwise
until it clicks. Make sure the cap is fully installed.
The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap
has been left off or improperly installed. This would allow
fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere. See Malfunction
Indicator Lamp on page 3-38.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-12
Filling a Portable Fuel Container
{ CAUTION: • Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the inside

of the fill opening before operating the nozzle.
Contact should be maintained until the filling
Never fill a portable fuel container while it is in the is complete.
vehicle. Static electricity discharge from the • Do not smoke while pumping fuel.
container can ignite the fuel vapor. You can be
• Do not use a cellular phone while
badly burned and the vehicle damaged if this
pumping fuel.
occurs. To help avoid injury to you and others:
• Dispense fuel only into approved containers.
• Do not fill a container while it is inside a
vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickup bed, or on
any surface other than the ground.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-13
Checking Things Under Hood Release
the Hood To open the hood, do the following:
1. Pull the hood release
handle with this symbol
{ CAUTION: on it. It is located
inside the vehicle to
An electric fan under the hood can start up and the left of the steering
injure you even when the engine is not running. column.
Keep hands, clothing, and tools away from any
underhood electric fan.
{ CAUTION:
Things that burn can get on hot engine parts and
start a fire. These include liquids like fuel, oil,
coolant, brake fluid, windshield washer and other
fluids, and plastic or rubber. You or others could
be burned. Be careful not to drop or spill things
that will burn onto a hot engine.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-14
3. Lift the hood.
4. After the hood is slightly lifted, it will continue to
open to the full position. Before closing the hood,
be sure all the filler caps are on properly. Lower the
hood until the lifting force of the strut is reduced,
then release the hood to latch fully. Check to make
sure the hood is closed and repeat the process
if necessary.
2. Then go to the front of the vehicle and push the

secondary hood release handle toward the driver
side of the vehicle.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-15
Engine Compartment Overview
When you open the hood on the 2.4L L4 engine, this is what you see:
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-16
A. See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 5-26. F. Pressure Cap. See Cooling System on page 5-28.
B. Engine Cooling Fan. See Cooling System on G. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See “Brake
page 5-28. Fluid” under Brakes on page 5-39.
C. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine Oil” H. See Battery on page 5-42.
under Engine Oil on page 5-21. I. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See “Adding
D. Engine Oil Dipstick (Out of View). See “Checking Washer Fluid” under Windshield Washer Fluid
Engine Oil” under Engine Oil on page 5-21. on page 5-38.
E. Engine Coolant Surge Tank. See Engine Coolant on J. See Engine Compartment Fuse Block on
page 5-29. page 5-102.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-17
When you open the hood on the 3.5L V6 engine, this is what you see:
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-18
A. See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 5-26. G. Pressure Cap. See Cooling System on page 5-28.
B. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir. See Power Steering H. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See “Brake
Fluid on page 5-36. Fluid” under Brakes on page 5-39.
C. Engine Cooling Fan. See Cooling System on I. Automatic Transmission Fluid Cap/Dipstick (Out of
page 5-28. View). See Automatic Transmission Fluid on
D. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine Oil” page 5-28.
under Engine Oil on page 5-21. J. See Battery on page 5-42.
E. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine Oil” K. See Engine Compartment Fuse Block on
under Engine Oil on page 5-21. page 5-102.
F. Engine Coolant Surge Tank. See Engine Coolant on L. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See “Adding
page 5-29. Washer Fluid” under Windshield Washer Fluid
on page 5-38.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-19
When you open the hood on the 3.6L V6 engine, this is what you see:
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-20
A. See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 5-26. Engine Oil
B. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir. See Power Steering
Fluid on page 5-36. Checking Engine Oil
C. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine Oil”
It is a good idea to check the engine oil level at each
under Engine Oil on page 5-21.
fuel fill. In order to get an accurate reading, the oil must
D. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine Oil” be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground.
under Engine Oil on page 5-21.
The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop.
E. Electric Engine Cooling Fans (Out of View). See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-16
See Cooling System on page 5-28. for the location of the engine oil dipstick.
F. Engine Coolant Surge Tank. See Engine Coolant on 1. Turn off the engine and give the oil several minutes
page 5-29. to drain back into the oil pan. If this is not done,
G. Pressure Cap. See Cooling System on page 5-28. the oil dipstick might not show the actual level.
H. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See “Brake 2. Pull the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel or
Fluid” under Brakes on page 5-39. cloth, then push it back in all the way. Remove it
I. Automatic Transmission Fluid Dipstick (Out of View). again, keeping the tip down and check the level.
See “Checking the Fluid Level” under Automatic
Transmission Fluid on page 5-28.
J. See Battery on page 5-42.
K. Underhood Fuse Block. See Engine Compartment
Fuse Block on page 5-102.
L. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See “Adding
Washer Fluid” under Windshield Washer Fluid
on page 5-38.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-21
When to Add Engine Oil Notice: Do not add too much oil. If the engine
has so much oil that the oil level gets above the
upper mark that shows the proper operating range,
the engine could be damaged.
See Engine Compartment

Overview on page 5-16
for the location of the
engine oil fill cap.
L4 Engine
Add enough oil to put the level somewhere in the proper

operating range. Push the dipstick all the way back in
V6 Engine when through.
If the oil is below the MIN mark for the L4 engine or

below the cross-hatched area at the tip of the dipstick
for the V6 engine, add at least one quart/liter of the
recommended oil. This section explains what kind of oil
to use. For engine oil crankcase capacity, see Capacities
and Specifications on page 5-108.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-22
What Kind of Engine Oil to Use • American Petroleum Institute (API) starburst symbol
Look for three things: Oils meeting these
requirements should have
the starburst symbol on
the container. This symbol
indicates that the oil has
been certified by the
American Petroleum
Institute (API).
Notice: Use only engine oil identified as meeting

GM Standard GM6094M and showing the American
Petroleum Institute Certified For Gasoline Engines
starburst symbol. Failure to use the recommended
oil can result in engine damage not covered by
the vehicle warranty.
Cold Temperature Operation

• GM6094M If in an area of extreme cold, where the temperature
Use only an oil that meets GM Standard GM6094M. falls below −20°F (−29°C), use either an SAE 5W-30
• SAE 5W-30 synthetic oil or an SAE 0W-30 engine oil. Both provide
easier cold starting for the engine at extremely low
SAE 5W-30 is best for the vehicle. These numbers temperatures. Always use an oil that meets the required
on an oil container show its viscosity, or thickness. specification, GM6094M. See “What Kind of Engine
Do not use other viscosity oils such as SAE 20W-50. Oil to Use” for more information.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-23
Engine Oil Additives / Engine Oil When the system has calculated that oil life has been
diminished, it indicates that an oil change is necessary.
Flushes A CHANGE OIL SOON message comes on. See DIC
Do not add anything to the oil. The recommended Warnings and Messages on page 3-46. Change the oil
oils with the starburst symbol that meet GM Standard as soon as possible within the next 600 miles (1 000 km).
GM6094M are all that is needed for good performance It is possible that, if driving under the best conditions, the
and engine protection. oil life system might not indicate that an oil change is
necessary for over a year. However, the engine oil and
Engine oil system flushes are not recommended and filter must be changed at least once a year and at this
could cause engine damage not covered by the vehicle time the system must be reset. Your dealer/retailer has
warranty. trained service people who will perform this work using
genuine parts and reset the system. It is also important to
Engine Oil Life System check the oil regularly and keep it at the proper level.
If the system is ever reset accidentally, the oil must be
When to Change Engine Oil changed at 3,000 miles (5 000 km) since the last oil
change. Remember to reset the oil life system whenever
This vehicle has a computer system that indicates
the oil is changed.
when to change the engine oil and filter. This is based
on engine revolutions and engine temperature, and not
on mileage. Based on driving conditions, the mileage at
which an oil change is indicated can vary considerably.
For the oil life system to work properly, the system must
be reset every time the oil is changed.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-24
How to Reset the Engine Oil Life What to Do with Used Oil
System Used engine oil contains certain elements that can be
The Engine Oil Life System calculates when to change unhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer.
the engine oil and filter based on vehicle use. Whenever Do not let used oil stay on your skin for very long. Clean
the oil is changed, reset the system so it can calculate your skin and nails with soap and water, or a good hand
when the next oil change is required. If a situation occurs cleaner. Wash or properly dispose of clothing or rags
where the oil is changed prior to a CHANGE OIL SOON containing used engine oil. See the manufacturer’s
message being turned on, reset the system. warnings about the use and disposal of oil products.
After changing the engine oil, reset the system: Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If you
change your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil from
1. With the engine off, turn the ignition key to ON/RUN. the filter before disposal. Never dispose of oil by putting
2. Press and hold both the INFO and reset buttons it in the trash, pouring it on the ground, into sewers,
for at least one second to access the or into streams or bodies of water. Recycle it by taking
personalization menu and display the OIL LIFE it to a place that collects used oil.
RESET message.
3. Press and hold the reset button for at least
one second. An ACKNOWLEDGED message
will appear when the system has been reset.
4. Turn the key to LOCK/OFF.
If the CHANGE OIL SOON message comes back on
when the vehicle is started, the engine oil life system
has not reset. Repeat the procedure.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-25
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter To inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter, do the
following:
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-16 for
the location of the engine air cleaner/filter.
When to Inspect the Engine Air

Cleaner/Filter
Inspect the air cleaner/filter at the Maintenance II
intervals and replace it at the first oil change after each
50,000 mile (80 000 km) interval. See Scheduled
Maintenance on page 6-4 for more information. If you
are driving in dusty/dirty conditions, inspect the filter at
each engine oil change.
How to Inspect the Engine Air

Cleaner/Filter
To inspect the air cleaner/filter, remove the filter from
the vehicle and lightly shake the filter to release loose 1. Remove the spring clamps that hold the cover on.
dust and dirt. If the filter remains caked with dirt, a new 2. Lift off the cover.
filter is required.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-26
{ CAUTION:
Operating the engine with the air cleaner/filter
off can cause you or others to be burned. The air
cleaner not only cleans the air; it helps to stop
flames if the engine backfires. If it is not there and
the engine backfires, you could be burned. Do not
drive with it off, and be careful working on the
engine with the air cleaner/filter off.
Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is off, a backfire can

cause a damaging engine fire. And, dirt can easily get
3. Inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter. into the engine, which will damage it. Always have
the air cleaner/filter in place when you are driving.
4. Align the filter correctly using the alignment tab.
5. Install the cover by guiding the tabs on the rim of
the top cover into the bottom hinges and turn the
cover down to close it.
6. The spring clips will engage easily, if the cover is
properly seated.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-27
Automatic Transmission Fluid Cooling System
It is not necessary to check the transmission fluid level. The Cooling System allows the engine to maintain the
A transmission fluid leak is the only reason for fluid loss. correct working temperature.
If a leak occurs, take your vehicle to the dealer/retailer
and have it repaired as soon as possible.
Change the fluid and filter at the intervals listed in
Additional Required Services on page 6-6, and be sure
to use the transmission fluid listed in Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12.
Notice: Use of the incorrect automatic transmission
fluid may damage the vehicle, and the damages may
not be covered by the vehicle’s warranty. Always
use the automatic transmission fluid listed in
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12.
For the 2.4L, 3.5L and 3.6L engines, the transmission
fluid will not reach the end of the dipstick unless the
transmission is at operating temperature. If you need
to check the transmission fluid level, please take your 3.5L V6 Engine shown, 2.4L L4,
vehicle to your dealer/retailer. 3.6L V6 Engines similar
A. Engine Cooling Fans

B. Engine Coolant Surge Tank
C. Pressure Cap
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-28
Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL® can
cause premature engine, heater core, or radiator
{ CAUTION: corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant could
require changing sooner, at 30,000 miles (50 000 km)
An electric engine cooling fan under the hood can or 24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs
start up even when the engine is not running and would not be covered by the vehicle warranty.
Always use DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in
can cause injury. Keep hands, clothing, and tools
the vehicle.
away from any underhood electric fan.
Engine Coolant
The cooling system in the vehicle is filled with
{ CAUTION: DEX-COOL® engine coolant. This coolant is designed
to remain in the vehicle for five years or 150,000 miles
(240 000 km), whichever occurs first.
Heater and radiator hoses, and other engine parts,
can be very hot. Do not touch them. If you do, you The following explains the cooling system and how to
can be burned. check and add coolant when it is low. If there is a problem
with engine overheating, see Engine Overheating on
Do not run the engine if there is a leak. If you run page 5-34.
the engine, it could lose all coolant. That could
cause an engine fire, and you could be burned.
Get any leak fixed before you drive the vehicle.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-29
What to Use Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and
DEX-COOL® coolant. If using this mixture, nothing
else needs to be added. This mixture:
{ CAUTION: • Gives freezing protection down to −34°F (−37°C),
outside temperature.
Adding only plain water to the cooling system can • Gives boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C),
be dangerous. Plain water, or some other liquid engine temperature.
such as alcohol, can boil before the proper coolant • Protects against rust and corrosion.
mixture will. The vehicle’s coolant warning system • Will not damage aluminum parts.
is set for the proper coolant mixture. With plain
water or the wrong mixture, the engine could • Helps keep the proper engine temperature.
get too hot but you would not get the overheat Notice: If an improper coolant mixture is used,
warning. The engine could catch fire and you or the engine could overheat and be badly damaged.
others could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of The repair cost would not be covered by the vehicle
clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant. warranty. Too much water in the mixture can freeze
and crack the engine, radiator, heater core, and
other parts.
Notice: If extra inhibitors and/or additives are used
in the vehicle’s cooling system, the vehicle could
be damaged. Use only the proper mixture of
the engine coolant listed in this manual for the
cooling system. See Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 6-12 for more information.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-30
Checking Coolant How to Add Coolant to the
The vehicle must be on a level surface when checking Recovery Tank
the coolant level.
Check to see if coolant is visible in the coolant recovery
tank. If the coolant inside the coolant recovery tank { CAUTION:
is boiling, do not do anything else until it cools down.
If coolant is visible but the coolant level is not at or above You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
the FULL COLD mark, add a 50/50 mixture of clean, engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol
drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant at the coolant
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot enough.
recovery tank, but be sure the cooling system is cool
before this is done. See Engine Coolant on page 5-29 Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.
The coolant level should be at or above the FULL COLD Notice: This vehicle has a specific coolant fill
mark on the coolant surge tank. If it is not, you may have procedure. Failure to follow this procedure could
a leak at the pressure cap or in the radiator hoses, heater cause the engine to overheat and be severely
hoses, radiator, water pump, or somewhere else in the damaged.
cooling system.
If coolant is needed, add the proper DEX-COOL®
coolant mixture at the coolant recovery tank.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-31
How to Add Coolant to the Radiator If coolant is needed, add the proper mixture directly to
the radiator, but be sure the cooling system is cool
before this is done.
{ CAUTION: 1. Remove the coolant surge tank pressure cap when
the cooling system, including the coolant surge tank
pressure cap and upper radiator hose, is no longer
An electric engine cooling fan under the hood can hot. Turn the pressure cap slowly counterclockwise
start up even when the engine is not running and about two or two and one-half turns.
can cause injury. Keep hands, clothing, and tools If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop. This will
away from any underhood electric fan. allow any pressure still left to be vented out
the discharge hose.
2. Then keep turning the
pressure cap slowly,
{ CAUTION: and remove it.
Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling

system can blow out and burn you badly. They are
under pressure, and if you turn the surge tank
pressure cap — even a little — they can come out
at high speed. Never turn the cap when the cooling
system, including the surge tank pressure cap, is
hot. Wait for the cooling system and surge tank
pressure cap to cool if you ever have to turn the
pressure cap.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-32
3. Fill the coolant surge tank with the proper mixture, Pressure Cap
to the FULL COLD mark. Wait about five minutes,
then check to see if the level is below the mark. If the Notice: If the pressure cap is not tightly installed,
level is below the FULL COLD mark, add additional coolant loss and possible engine damage may
coolant to bring the level up to the mark. Repeat this occur. Be sure the cap is properly and tightly
procedure until the level remains constant at the secured.
FULL COLD mark for at least five minutes.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-16 for
4. With the coolant surge tank pressure cap off, start more information on location.
the engine and let it run until you can feel the upper
radiator hose getting hot. Watch out for the engine
cooling fans. Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap
By this time, the coolant level inside the coolant Notice: If the pressure cap is not tightly installed,
surge tank might be lower. If the level is lower than coolant loss and possible engine damage may
the FULL COLD mark, add more of the proper occur. Be sure the cap is properly and tightly
mixture to the coolant surge tank until the level secured.
reaches the FULL COLD mark.
The coolant surge tank pressure cap must be fully
5. Then replace the pressure cap. Be sure the installed on the coolant surge tank. See Engine
pressure cap is hand-tight and fully seated. Compartment Overview on page 5-16 for more
Notice: If the pressure cap is not tightly installed, information on location.
coolant loss and possible engine damage may
occur. Be sure the cap is properly and tightly
secured.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-33
Engine Overheating If Steam Is Coming From The Engine
The vehicle has several indicators to warn of engine Compartment
overheating.
You will find an engine coolant temperature gage as
well as an engine coolant temperature warning light { CAUTION:
on your vehicle’s instrument panel cluster. See Engine
Coolant Temperature Gage on page 3-37 and Engine Steam from an overheated engine can burn you
Coolant Temperature Warning Light on page 3-36. badly, even if you just open the hood. Stay away
You may decide not to lift the hood when this warning from the engine if you see or hear steam coming
appears, but instead get service help right away. from it. Turn it off and get everyone away from the
See Roadside Assistance Program on page 7-7. vehicle until it cools down. Wait until there is no sign
If you do decide to lift the hood, make sure the vehicle of steam or coolant before you open the hood.
is parked on a level surface. If you keep driving when the vehicles engine is
Then check to see if the engine cooling fans are overheated, the liquids in it can catch fire. You or
running. If the engine is overheating, both fans should others could be badly burned. Stop the engine if
be running. If they are not, do not continue to run it overheats, and get out of the vehicle until the
the engine and have the vehicle serviced. engine is cool.
Notice: Engine damage from running the engine See Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode
without coolant is not covered by the warranty. on page 5-36 for information on driving to a safe
Notice: If the engine catches fire while driving place in an emergency.
with no coolant, the vehicle can be badly damaged.
The costly repairs would not be covered by the
vehicle warranty. See Overheated Engine Protection
Operating Mode on page 5-36 for information on
driving to a safe place in an emergency.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-34
If No Steam Is Coming From The If the temperature overheat gage is no longer in the
overheat zone or an overheat warning no longer
Engine Compartment displays, the vehicle can be driven. Continue to drive
If an engine overheat warning is displayed but no steam the vehicle slow for about 10 minutes. Keep a safe
can be seen or heard, the problem may not be too vehicle distance from the car in front of you. If the
serious. Sometimes the engine can get a little too warning does not come back on, continue to drive
hot when the vehicle: normally.
• Climbs a long hill on a hot day. If the warning continues, pull over, stop, and park the
vehicle right away.
• Stops after high-speed driving.
If there is no sign of steam, idle the engine for
• Idles for long periods in traffic. three minutes while parked. If the warning is still
• Tows a trailer. displayed, turn off the engine until it cools down.
Also, see “Overheated Engine Protection Operating
If the overheat warning is displayed with no sign of Mode” following.
steam:
1. Turn the air off.
2. Turn the heater on to the highest temperature and
to the highest fan speed. Open the windows as
necessary.
3. In heavy traffic, let the engine idle in N (Neutral)
while stopped. If it is safe to do so, pull off the
road, shift to P (Park) or N (Neutral) and let
the engine idle.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-35
Overheated Engine Protection Power Steering Fluid
Operating Mode See Engine Compartment
This emergency operating mode allows your vehicle Overview on page 5-16 for
to be driven to a safe place in an emergency situation. reservoir location.
If an overheated engine condition exists, an overheat
protection mode which alternates firing groups of
cylinders helps prevent engine damage. In this mode,
you will notice a significant loss in power and engine
performance. The temperature gage will indicate an
overheat condition exists. Driving extended miles (km)
and/or towing a trailer in the overheat protection mode
should be avoided.
Notice: After driving in the overheated engine
protection operating mode, to avoid engine damage, When to Check Power Steering Fluid
allow the engine to cool before attempting any
repair. The engine oil will be severely degraded. Power steering fluid is used in all vehicles with V6
Repair the cause of coolant loss, change the oil engines. Vehicles with the 4-cylinder engine have electric
and reset the oil life system. See Engine Oil power steering and do not use power steering fluid.
on page 5-21. It is not necessary to regularly check power steering
fluid unless a leak is suspected in the system, or
an unusual noise is heard. A fluid loss in this system
could indicate a problem. Have the system inspected
and repaired.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-36
How to Check Power Steering Fluid at the MAX mark when the engine is hot. If the fluid is
at the MIN mark when the engine is cold or hot, power
To check the power steering fluid, do the following: steering fluid should be added.
1. Turn the key off and let the engine compartment The fluid level should be within the crosshatch area on
cool down. the dipstick.
2. Wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir clean. If the fluid is at or below the ADD or MIN mark on
3. Unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with a the dipstick, add just enough fluid to bring the level
clean rag. within the crosshatch area.
4. Replace the cap and completely tighten it. What to Use
5. Remove the cap again and look at the fluid level on
To determine what kind of fluid to use, see
the dipstick.
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12.
If your vehicle has the 3.5L V6 engine, the fluid level Always use the proper fluid.
should be between the ADD and HOT marks when the
engine is cold, and at the HOT mark when the engine Notice: Use of the incorrect fluid may damage the
is hot. If the fluid is at the ADD mark when the engine vehicle and the damages may not be covered by
is cold or hot, power steering fluid should be added. the vehicle’s warranty. Always use the correct fluid
listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
If your vehicle has the 3.6L V6 engine, the fluid on page 6-12.
level should be between the MIN (Minimum) and
MAX (Maximum) marks when the engine is cold, and
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-37
Windshield Washer Fluid Notice:
• When using concentrated washer fluid, follow
What to Use the manufacturer’s instructions for adding water.
When you need windshield washer fluid, be sure to read • Do not mix water with ready-to-use washer fluid.
the manufacturer’s instructions before use. If you will be Water can cause the solution to freeze and
operating your vehicle in an area where the temperature damage your washer fluid tank and other parts of
may fall below freezing, use a fluid that has sufficient the washer system. Also, water does not clean as
protection against freezing. well as washer fluid.
Adding Washer Fluid • Fill the washer fluid tank only three-quarters
full when it is very cold. This allows for fluid
When the windshield washer fluid reservoir is low, expansion if freezing occurs, which could
a LOW WASHER FLUID message displays on damage the tank if it is completely full.
the Driver Information Center (DIC). See DIC Warnings • Do not use engine coolant (antifreeze) in your
and Messages on page 3-46 for more information.
windshield washer. It can damage the vehicle’s
Open the cap with the windshield washer system and paint.
washer symbol on it.
Add washer fluid until the
tank is full. See Engine
Compartment Overview
on page 5-16 for reservoir
location.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-38
Brakes Do not top off the brake fluid. Adding fluid does not
correct a leak. If fluid is added when the linings
Brake Fluid are worn, there will be too much fluid when new
brake linings are installed. Add or remove brake fluid,
as necessary, only when work is done on the brake
The brake master cylinder
hydraulic system.
reservoir is filled with DOT
3 brake fluid. See Engine
Compartment Overview on
page 5-16 for the location { CAUTION:
of the reservoir.
If too much brake fluid is added, it can spill on
the engine and burn, if the engine is hot enough.
You or others could be burned, and the vehicle
could be damaged. Add brake fluid only when
work is done on the brake hydraulic system.
There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level in
the reservoir might go down: When the brake fluid falls to a low level, the brake
• The brake fluid level goes down because of normal warning light comes on. See Brake System Warning
brake lining wear. When new linings are installed, Light on page 3-34.
the fluid level goes back up.
• A fluid leak in the brake hydraulic system can also
cause a low fluid level. Have the brake hydraulic
system fixed, since a leak means that sooner
or later the brakes will not work well.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-39
What to Add Notice:
Use only new DOT 3 brake fluid from a sealed container. • Using the wrong fluid can badly damage brake
See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12. hydraulic system parts. For example, just a
few drops of mineral-based oil, such as engine
Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the oil, in the brake hydraulic system can damage
area around the cap before removing it. This helps keep brake hydraulic system parts so badly that they
dirt from entering the reservoir. will have to be replaced. Do not let someone
put in the wrong kind of fluid.
{ CAUTION: • If brake fluid is spilled on the vehicle’s painted

surfaces, the paint finish can be damaged.
Be careful not to spill brake fluid on the vehicle.
With the wrong kind of fluid in the brake hydraulic If you do, wash it off immediately. See Washing
system, the brakes might not work well. This could Your Vehicle on page 5-93.
cause a crash. Always use the proper brake fluid.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-40
Brake Wear Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help
prevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated, inspect
This vehicle has disc brakes. Disc brake pads have brake pads for wear and evenly tighten wheel nuts
built-in wear indicators that make a high-pitched warning in the proper sequence to torque specifications
sound when the brake pads are worn and new pads in Capacities and Specifications on page 5-108.
are needed. The sound can come and go or be heard
all the time the vehicle is moving, except when applying Brake linings should always be replaced as complete
the brake pedal firmly. axle sets.
Brake Pedal Travel

{ CAUTION: See your dealer/retailer if the brake pedal does not
return to normal height, or if there is a rapid increase
in pedal travel. This could be a sign that brake service
The brake wear warning sound means that soon might be required.
the brakes will not work well. That could lead to an
accident. When the brake wear warning sound is Brake Adjustment
heard, have the vehicle serviced. Every time the brakes are applied, with or without the
vehicle moving, the brakes adjust for wear.
Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-out brake
pads could result in costly brake repair.
Some driving conditions or climates can cause a brake
squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly applied.
This does not mean something is wrong with the brakes.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-41
Replacing Brake System Parts Vehicle Storage
The braking system on a vehicle is complex. Its many
parts have to be of top quality and work well together if
the vehicle is to have really good braking. The vehicle { CAUTION:
was designed and tested with top-quality brake parts.
When parts of the braking system are replaced — for Batteries have acid that can burn you and gas that
example, when the brake linings wear down and new can explode. You can be badly hurt if you are not
ones are installed — be sure to get new approved
careful. See Jump Starting on page 5-43 for tips
replacement parts. If this is not done, the brakes might
not work properly. For example, if someone puts in on working around a battery without getting hurt.
brake linings that are wrong for the vehicle, the balance
between the front and rear brakes can change — for the Infrequent Usage: If the vehicle is driven infrequently,
worse. The braking performance expected can change in remove the black, negative (−) cable from the battery.
many other ways if the wrong replacement brake parts This helps keep the battery from running down.
are installed.
Extended Storage: For extended storage of the vehicle,
remove the black, negative (−) cable from the battery or
Battery use a battery trickle charger. This helps maintain the
This vehicle has a maintenance free battery. When it is charge of the battery over an extended period of time.
time for a new battery, see your dealer/retailer for one
that has the replacement number shown on the original
battery’s label. See Engine Compartment Overview on
page 5-16 for battery location.
Warning: Battery posts, terminals, and related
accessories contain lead and lead compounds,
chemicals known to the State of California to cause
cancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands after
handling.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-42
Jump Starting Notice: If the other vehicle’s system is not a 12-volt
system with a negative ground, both vehicles can
If the battery has run down, you may want to use be damaged. Only use vehicles with 12-volt systems
another vehicle and some jumper cables to start your with negative grounds to jump start your vehicle.
vehicle. Be sure to use the following steps to do it safely. 2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables
can reach, but be sure the vehicles are not touching
each other. If they are, it could cause a ground
{ CAUTION: connection you do not want. You would not be able
to start your vehicle, and the bad grounding could
Batteries can hurt you. They can be dangerous damage the electrical systems.
because: To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling,
set the parking brake firmly on both vehicles involved
• They contain acid that can burn you. in the jump start procedure. Put an automatic
• They contain gas that can explode or ignite. transmission in P (Park) or a manual transmission
• They contain enough electricity to burn you. in N (Neutral) before setting the parking brake.
If you do not follow these steps exactly, some or Notice: If you leave the radio or other accessories
all of these things can hurt you. on during the jump starting procedure, they could
be damaged. The repairs would not be covered by
the warranty. Always turn off the radio and other
Notice: Ignoring these steps could result in costly accessories when jump starting the vehicle.
damage to the vehicle that would not be covered
by the warranty. 3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplug
unnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarette
Trying to start the vehicle by pushing or pulling it lighter or the accessory power outlet. Turn off the
will not work, and it could damage the vehicle. radio and all lamps that are not needed. This will
1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-volt avoid sparks and help save both batteries. And it
battery with a negative ground system. could save the radio!
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-43
4. Open the hoods and locate the batteries. Find the
positive (+) and negative (−) terminal locations on
each vehicle. Your vehicle’s positive (+) terminal is { CAUTION:
located under a red tethered cap on the battery.
The negative (–) terminal is located under a Using a match near a battery can cause battery
black tethered cap on the battery. See Engine gas to explode. People have been hurt doing this,
Compartment Overview on page 5-16 for more
and some have been blinded. Use a flashlight if
information on location. Flip the caps up to access
the positive (+) and negative (–) terminals. you need more light.
Be sure the battery has enough water. You do not
need to add water to the battery installed in your
{ CAUTION: new vehicle. But if a battery has filler caps, be
sure the right amount of fluid is there. If it is low,
An electric fan can start up even when the engine add water to take care of that first. If you don’t,
is not running and can injure you. Keep hands, explosive gas could be present.
clothing and tools away from any underhood Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you.
electric fan. Do not get it on you. If you accidentally get it in
your eyes or on your skin, flush the place with
water and get medical help immediately.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-44
6. Connect the red positive (+) cable to the positive (+)
terminal of the dead battery. Use a remote
{ CAUTION: positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.
7. Do not let the other end touch metal. Connect it to
Fans or other moving engine parts can injure you the positive (+) terminal of the good battery. Use a
badly. Keep your hands away from moving parts remote positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.
once the engine is running. 8. Now connect the black negative (−) cable to the
negative (−) terminal of the good battery. Use a
5. Check that the jumper cables do not have loose remote negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one.
or missing insulation. If they do, you could get a Do not let the other end touch anything until the
shock. The vehicles could be damaged too. next step. The other end of the negative (−) cable
Before you connect the cables, here are some does not go to the dead battery. It goes to a heavy,
things you should know. Positive (+) will go to unpainted metal engine part or to a remote
positive (+) or to a remote positive (+) terminal if negative (−) terminal on the vehicle with the
the vehicle has one. Negative (−) will go to a dead battery.
heavy, unpainted metal engine part or to a remote
negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one.
Do not connect positive (+) to negative (−) or you
will get a short that would damage the battery and
maybe other parts too. And do not connect the
negative (−) cable to the negative (−) terminal on
the dead battery because this can cause sparks.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-45
Notice: If the jumper cables are connected or
removed in the wrong order, electrical shorting may
occur and damage the vehicle. The repairs would not
be covered by the vehicle warranty. Always connect
and remove the jumper cables in the correct order,
making sure that the cables do not touch each other
or other metal.
9. Connect the other end of the negative (−) cable at

least 18 inches (45 cm) away from the dead battery,
but not near engine parts that move. The electrical
connection is just as good there, and the chance
of sparks getting back to the battery is much less.
10. Now start the vehicle with the good battery and run
the engine for a while. Jumper Cable Removal
11. Try to start the vehicle that had the dead battery.
If it will not start after a few tries, it probably needs A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part or Remote
service. Negative (–) Terminal
B. Good Battery or Remote Positive (+) and Remote
Negative (–) Terminals
C. Dead Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminal
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-46
To disconnect the jumper cables from both vehicles, do
the following:
Bulb Replacement
1. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the For the proper type of replacement bulbs, see
vehicle that had the dead battery. Replacement Bulbs on page 5-50.
2. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the For any bulb changing procedure not listed in this
vehicle with the good battery. section, contact your dealer/retailer.
3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery. Halogen Bulbs
4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the other
vehicle.
5. Return the caps over the positive (+) and { CAUTION:
negative (−) terminals to their original positions.
Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside and
Headlamp Aiming can burst if you drop or scratch the bulb. You or
others could be injured. Be sure to read and follow
Headlamp aim has been preset at the factory and the instructions on the bulb package.
should need no further adjustment.
However, if your vehicle is damaged in a crash, the
headlamp aim may be affected. Aim adjustment to the
low-beam headlamps may be necessary if oncoming
drivers flash their high-beam headlamps at you
(for vertical aim).
If the headlamps need to be re-aimed, it is
recommended that you take the vehicle to your
dealer/retailer for service.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-47
Taillamps, Turn Signal, and
Stoplamps
3. Remove the three wing nuts, which hold the

taillamp assembly, from inside the vehicle.
4. Remove the taillamp assembly.
A. Backup Lamp 5. Remove the wiring harness from the taillamp
B. Stoplamp, Taillamp and Turn Signal Lamp assembly by lifting the release tab.
1. Open the trunk. See Trunk on page 2-12 for more 6. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise to remove it.
information. 7. Pull the bulb from the socket.
2. Remove the convenience net hooks holding the 8. Install a new bulb.
trunk trim.
9. Reverse Steps 2 through 5 to reinstall the taillamp
assembly.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-48
Back-up Lamp License Plate Lamp
To replace the license plate lamp bulb:
1. Open the trunk. See Trunk on page 2-12 for more 1. Remove the license plate assembly by turning the
information. two screws counterclockwise.
2. Remove the push nuts holding the trunk trim. 2. Turn and pull the license plate lamp forward
through the fascia opening.
3. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise to remove
3. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and pull the
from the lamp assembly.
bulb straight out of the socket.
4. Install the new bulb. 4. Push the new bulb in and turn it clockwise to install.
5. Reverse Steps 1 through 3 to reinstall. 5. Replace the license plate lamp by pushing it
through the fascia opening.
6. Turn the two screws that hold the license plate
lamp clockwise to reinstall.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-49
Replacement Bulbs
Exterior Lamp Bulb Number
Back-up Lamp and Taillamp 921
License Plate Lamp 168
Turn Signal Lamp 3156
2. Push the release button.
For replacement bulbs not listed here, contact your
dealer/retailer. 3. Slide the blade forward.
4. Turn the blade toward you and continue to slide
Windshield Wiper Blade forward to remove.
5. Install the new blade onto the arm connector and
Replacement make sure the grooved areas are fully set in the
Inspect the windshield wiper blades for wear or cracking. locked position.
See Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4. For the proper type and size, see Maintenance
To remove the wiper blade: Replacement Parts on page 6-13.
1. Pull the windshield wiper arm connector away from
the windshield.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-50
Tires
Your new vehicle comes with high-quality tires
made by a leading tire manufacturer. If you ever
have questions about your tire warranty and where • Underinflated tires pose the same
to obtain service, see your vehicle Warranty booklet danger as overloaded tires. The resulting
for details. For additional information refer to the tire accident could cause serious injury.
manufacturer. Check all tires frequently to maintain the
recommended pressure. Tire pressure
should be checked when your tires are
cold. See Inflation - Tire Pressure on
{ CAUTION: page 5-59.
• Overinflated tires are more likely to be
• Poorly maintained and improperly used cut, punctured, or broken by a sudden
tires are dangerous. impact — such as when you hit a pothole.
• Overloading your tires can cause Keep tires at the recommended pressure.
overheating as a result of too much • Worn, old tires can cause accidents.
flexing. You could have an air-out and If your tread is badly worn, or if your tires
a serious accident. See Loading the have been damaged, replace them.
Vehicle on page 4-20. See High-Speed Operation on page 5-60 for
CAUTION: (Continued) inflation pressure adjustment for high speed
driving.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-51
Low-Profile Performance Tire Winter Tires
If your vehicle has P225/50R18 or P225/50R17 If you expect to drive on snow or ice covered roads
size tires, they are classified as low-profile often, you may want to get winter tires for your vehicle.
performance tires. These tires are designed for All season tires provide good overall performance
very responsive driving on wet or dry pavement. on most surfaces but they may not offer the traction
You may also notice more road noise with you would like or the same level of performance
low-profile performance tires and that they as winter tires on snow or ice covered roads.
tend to wear faster.
Winter tires, in general, are designed for increased
Notice: If the vehicle has low-profile tires, traction on snow and ice covered roads. With winter tires,
they are more susceptible to damage from road there may be decreased dry road traction, increased road
hazards or curb impact than standard profile noise, and shorter tread life. After switching to winter
tires. Tire and/or wheel assembly damage can tires, be alert for changes in vehicle handling and braking.
occur when coming into contact with road See your dealer/retailer for details regarding winter tire
hazards like, potholes, or sharp edged objects, availability and proper tire selection. Also, see Buying
or when sliding into a curb. The vehicle New Tires on page 5-68.
warranty does not cover this type of damage.
Keep tires set to the correct inflation pressure If you choose to use winter tires:
and, when possible avoid contact with curbs, • Use tires of the same brand and tread type on all
potholes, and other road hazards. four wheel positions.
• Use only radial ply tires of the same size, load
range, and speed rating as the original equipment
tires.
Winter tires with the same speed rating as your original
equipment tires may not be available for H, V, W, Y,
and ZR speed rated tires. If you choose winter tires with
a lower speed rating, never exceed the tire’s maximum
speed capability.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-52
Tire Sidewall Labeling (A) Tire Size: The tire size is a combination of
letters and numbers used to define a particular
Useful information about a tire is molded into tire’s width, height, aspect ratio, construction type,
its sidewall. The examples below show a typical and service description. See the “Tire Size”
passenger vehicle tire and a compact spare illustration later in this section for more detail.
tire sidewall.
(B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria
Specification): Original equipment tires designed
to GM’s specific tire performance criteria have a
TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.
GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed all federal
safety guidelines.
(C) DOT (Department of Transportation):
The Department of Transportation (DOT) code
indicates that the tire is in compliance with the
U.S. Department of Transportation Motor Vehicle
Safety Standards.
(D) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters
and numbers following DOT (Department of
Transportation) code is the Tire Identification
Number (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturer
and plant code, tire size, and date the tire was
manufactured. The TIN is molded onto both sides
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire Example of the tire, although only one side may have the
date of manufacture.
(E) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and
number of plies in the sidewall and under the tread.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-53
(F) Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG): Tire (A) Temporary Use Only: The compact
manufacturers are required to grade tires based on spare tire or temporary use tire has a tread life of
three performance factors: treadwear, traction, and approximately 3,000 miles (5 000 km) and should
temperature resistance. For more information see not be driven at speeds over 65 mph (105 km/h).
Uniform Tire Quality Grading on page 5-70. The compact spare tire is for emergency use when
a regular road tire has lost air and gone flat. If your
(G) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit: vehicle has a compact spare tire, see Compact
Maximum load that can be carried and the Spare Tire on page 5-89 and If a Tire Goes Flat
maximum pressure needed to support that load. on page 5-75.
(B) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and
number of plies in the sidewall and under the tread.
(C) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters
and numbers following the DOT (Department of
Transportation) code is the Tire Identification
Number (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturer
and plant code, tire size, and date the tire was
manufactured. The TIN is molded onto both sides
of the tire, although only one side may have the
date of manufacture.
(D) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit:
Maximum load that can be carried and the
maximum pressure needed to support that load.
(E) Tire Inflation: The temporary use tire or
compact spare tire should be inflated to 60 psi
Compact Spare Tire Example (420 kPa). For more information on tire pressure
and inflation see Inflation - Tire Pressure on
page 5-59.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-54
(F) Tire Size : A combination of letters and (B) Tire Width: The three-digit number indicates
numbers define a tire’s width, height, aspect the tire section width in millimeters from sidewall
ratio, construction type, and service description. to sidewall.
The letter T as the first character in the tire
size means the tire is for temporary use only. (C) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit number that
indicates the tire height-to-width measurements.
(G) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria For example, if the tire size aspect ratio is 60, as
Specification): Original equipment tires designed shown in item C of the illustration, it would mean
to GM’s specific tire performance criteria have a that the tire’s sidewall is 60 percent as high as it
TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall. is wide.
GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed all federal
safety guidelines. (D) Construction Code: A letter code is used
to indicate the type of ply construction in the tire.
Tire Size The letter R means radial ply construction; the
The following illustration shows an example of a letter D means diagonal or bias ply construction;
typical passenger vehicle tire size. and the letter B means belted-bias ply construction.
(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheel in
inches.
(F) Service Description: These characters
represent the load index and speed rating of the
tire. The load index represents the load carry
capacity a tire is certified to carry. The speed
rating is the maximum speed a tire is certified
to carry a load.
(A) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: The United States
version of a metric tire sizing system. The letter P
as the first character in the tire size means a
passenger vehicle tire engineered to standards
set by the U.S. Tire and Rim Association.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-55
Tire Terminology and Definitions Cold Tire Pressure: The amount of air pressure
in a tire, measured in pounds per square inch (psi)
Air Pressure: The amount of air inside the or kilopascals (kPa) before a tire has built up heat
tire pressing outward on each square inch of from driving. See Inflation - Tire Pressure on
the tire. Air pressure is expressed in pounds page 5-59.
per square inch (psi) or kilopascal (kPa). Curb Weight: The weight of a motor vehicle
Accessory Weight: This means the combined with standard and optional equipment including
weight of optional accessories. Some examples of the maximum capacity of fuel, oil, and coolant,
optional accessories are, automatic transmission, but without passengers and cargo.
power steering, power brakes, power windows, DOT Markings: A code molded into the sidewall
power seats, and air conditioning. of a tire signifying that the tire is in compliance
Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire’s height with the U.S. Department of Transportation (DOT)
to its width. motor vehicle safety standards. The DOT code
includes the Tire Identification Number (TIN), an
Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that is alphanumeric designator which can also identify
located between the plies and the tread. Cords the tire manufacturer, production plant, brand,
may be made from steel or other reinforcing and date of production.
materials.
GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating.
Bead: The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped See Loading the Vehicle on page 4-20.
by steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.
GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the
Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the plies front axle. See Loading the Vehicle on page 4-20.
are laid at alternate angles less than 90 degrees
to the centerline of the tread. GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the
rear axle. See Loading the Vehicle on page 4-20.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-56
Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side of an Normal Occupant Weight: The number of
asymmetrical tire, that must always face outward occupants a vehicle is designed to seat multiplied
when mounted on a vehicle. by 150 lbs (68 kg). See Loading the Vehicle on
page 4-20.
Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for air pressure.
Occupant Distribution: Designated seating
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A tire used on positions.
light duty trucks and some multipurpose passenger
vehicles. Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of an
asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that
Load Index: An assigned number ranging faces outward when mounted on a vehicle.
from 1 to 279 that corresponds to the load carrying The side of the tire that contains a whitewall,
capacity of a tire. bears white lettering, or bears manufacturer,
Maximum Inflation Pressure: The maximum brand, and/or model name molding that is higher
air pressure to which a cold tire can be inflated. or deeper than the same moldings on the other
The maximum air pressure is molded onto the sidewall of the tire.
sidewall. Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used on
Maximum Load Rating: The load rating for a tire passenger cars and some light duty trucks and
at the maximum permissible inflation pressure for multipurpose vehicles.
that tire. Recommended Inflation Pressure: Vehicle
Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The sum of manufacturer’s recommended tire inflation pressure
curb weight, accessory weight, vehicle capacity as shown on the tire placard. See Inflation - Tire
weight, and production options weight. Pressure on page 5-59 and Loading the Vehicle
on page 4-20.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-57
Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality Grading
the ply cords that extend to the beads are laid Standards): A tire information system that
at 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread. provides consumers with ratings for a tire’s
traction, temperature, and treadwear. Ratings
Rim: A metal support for a tire and upon which are determined by tire manufacturers using
the tire beads are seated. government testing procedures. The ratings are
Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the tread molded into the sidewall of the tire. See Uniform
and the bead. Tire Quality Grading on page 5-70.
Speed Rating: An alphanumeric code assigned to Vehicle Capacity Weight: The number of
a tire indicating the maximum speed at which a designated seating positions multiplied by 150 lbs
tire can operate. (68 kg) plus the rated cargo load. See Loading
the Vehicle on page 4-20.
Traction: The friction between the tire and the
road surface. The amount of grip provided. Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load on
an individual tire due to curb weight, accessory
Tread: The portion of a tire that comes into weight, occupant weight, and cargo weight.
contact with the road.
Vehicle Placard: A label permanently attached
Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands, sometimes to a vehicle showing the vehicle’s capacity
called wear bars, that show across the tread of a weight and the original equipment tire size and
tire when only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread remains. recommended inflation pressure. See “Tire and
See When It Is Time for New Tires on page 5-67. Loading Information Label” under Loading the
Vehicle on page 4-20.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-58
Inflation - Tire Pressure A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information
label is attached to your vehicle. This label shows
Tires need the correct amount of air pressure to your vehicle’s original equipment tires and the
operate effectively. correct inflation pressures for your tires when they
are cold. The recommended cold tire inflation
Notice: Do not let anyone tell you that pressure, shown on the label, is the minimum
under-inflation or over-inflation is all right. amount of air pressure needed to support your
It is not. If your tires do not have enough air vehicle’s maximum load carrying capacity.
(under-inflation), you can get the following:
For additional information regarding how much
• Too much flexing weight your vehicle can carry, and an example of
• Too much heat the Tire and Loading Information label, see Loading
• Tire overloading the Vehicle on page 4-20. How you load your
vehicle affects vehicle handling and ride comfort.
• Premature or irregular wear Never load your vehicle with more weight than it
• Poor handling was designed to carry.
• Reduced fuel economy When to Check
If your tires have too much air (over-inflation), Check your tires once a month or more. Do not
you can get the following: forget to check the compact spare tire, it should
• Unusual wear be at 60 psi (420 kPa). For additional information
• Poor handling regarding the compact spare tire, see Compact
Spare Tire on page 5-89.
• Rough ride
• Needless damage from road hazards
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-59
How to Check High-Speed Operation
Use a good quality pocket-type gage to check tire
pressure. You cannot tell if your tires are properly
inflated simply by looking at them. Radial tires { CAUTION:
may look properly inflated even when they are
under-inflated. Check the tire’s inflation pressure Driving at high speeds, 100 mph (160 km/h) or
when the tires are cold. Cold means your vehicle
has been sitting for at least three hours or driven higher, puts an additional strain on tires. Sustained
no more than 1 mile (1.6 km). high-speed driving causes excessive heat build up
and can cause sudden tire failure. You could have
Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem. a crash and you or others could be killed. Some
Press the tire gage firmly onto the valve to get a
high-speed rated tires require inflation pressure
pressure measurement. If the cold tire inflation
pressure matches the recommended pressure on adjustment for high speed operation. When speed
the Tire and Loading Information label, no further limits and road conditions are such that a vehicle
adjustment is necessary. If the inflation pressure can be driven at high speeds, make sure the tires
is low, add air until you reach the recommended are rated for high speed operation, in excellent
amount. condition, and set to the correct cold tire inflation
If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on pressure for the vehicle load.
the metal stem in the center of the tire valve.
Re-check the tire pressure with the tire gage. Set the cold tire inflation pressure to 35 psi (241 kPa) for
Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve the front and rear tires, when operating your vehicle at
stems. They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt high-speed conditions. When you end high-speed driving
and moisture. return the tires to the cold inflation pressure shown on
the Tire and Loading Information label. See Loading the
Vehicle on page 4-20 and Inflation - Tire Pressure on
page 5-59.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-60
Tire Pressure Monitor System Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses radio maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation
and sensor technology to check tire pressure levels. has not reached the level to trigger illumination of
The TPMS sensors monitor the air pressure in your the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
vehicle’s tires and transmit tire pressure readings to a Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
receiver located in the vehicle. malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator
checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your approximately one minute and then remain continuously
vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated illuminated. This sequence will continue upon
on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction
should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for exists.
those tires.) When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been system may not be able to detect or signal low tire
equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur
that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one for a variety of reasons, including the installation of
or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle
that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale
check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one
illuminates, you should stop and check your tires
or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the
as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the
pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated
TPMS to continue to function properly.
tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire
failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and See Tire Pressure Monitor Operation on page 5-62 for
tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling additional information.
and stopping ability.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-61
Federal Communications Tire Pressure Monitor Operation
Commission (FCC) and Industry This vehicle may have a Tire Pressure Monitor
and Science Canada System (TPMS). The TPMS is designed to warn
the driver when a low tire pressure condition exists.
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) operates TPMS sensors are mounted onto each tire and wheel
on a radio frequency and complies with Part 15 of the assembly, excluding the spare tire and wheel assembly.
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two The TPMS sensors monitor the air pressure in the
conditions: vehicle’s tires and transmits the tire pressure readings
1. This device may not cause harmful interference. to a receiver located in the vehicle.
When a low tire pressure
condition is detected,
operation.
the TPMS turns on the low
Vehicles with TPMS operate on a radio frequency and tire pressure warning light
comply with RSS-210 of Industry and Science Canada. located on the instrument
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: panel cluster.
1. This device may not cause interference.
including interference that may cause undesired At the same time a message to check the pressure in
operation of the device. a specific tire appears on the Driver Information Center
(DIC) display. The low tire pressure warning light and the
Changes or modifications to this system by other than DIC warning message come on at each ignition cycle
an authorized service facility could void authorization to until the tires are inflated to the correct inflation pressure.
use this equipment. Using the DIC, tire pressure levels can be viewed by the
driver. For additional information and details about the
DIC operation and displays see DIC Operation and
Displays on page 3-44 and DIC Warnings and Messages
on page 3-46.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-62
The low tire pressure warning light may come on in TPMS Malfunction Light and Message
cool weather when the vehicle is first started, and then
turn off as you start to drive. This could be an early The TPMS will not function properly if one or more of
indicator that the air pressure in the tire(s) are getting the TPMS sensors are missing or inoperable. When the
low and need to be inflated to the proper pressure. system detects a malfunction, the low tire warning light
flashes for about one minute and then stays on for the
A Tire and Loading Information label shows the size remainder of the ignition cycle. A DIC warning message
of your vehicle’s original equipment tires and the correct is also displayed. The low tire warning light and DIC
inflation pressure for your vehicle’s tires when they are warning message come on at each ignition cycle until the
cold. See Loading the Vehicle on page 4-20, for an problem is corrected. Some of the conditions that can
example of the Tire and Loading Information label and its cause the malfunction light and DIC message to come
location on your vehicle. Also see Inflation - Tire Pressure on are:
on page 5-59.
• One of the road tires has been replaced with the
Your vehicle’s TPMS system can warn you about a low
spare tire. The spare tire does not have a TPMS
tire pressure condition but it does not replace normal
sensor. The TPMS malfunction light and DIC
tire maintenance. See Tire Inspection and Rotation
message should go off once you re-install the
on page 5-66 and Tires on page 5-51.
road tire containing the TPMS sensor.
Notice: Liquid tire sealants could damage the Tire • The TPMS sensor matching process was started but
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) sensors. Sensor not completed or not completed successfully after
damage caused by using a tire sealant is not covered rotating the vehicle’s tires. The DIC message and
by your warranty. Do not use liquid tire sealants. TPMS malfunction light should go off once the TPMS
sensor matching process is performed successfully.
See “TPMS Sensor Matching Process” later in this
section.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-63
• One or more TPMS sensors are missing or TPMS Sensor Matching Process
damaged. The DIC message and the TPMS
malfunction light should go off when the TPMS Each TPMS sensor has a unique identification code.
sensors are installed and the sensor matching Any time you replace one or more of the TPMS sensors
process is performed successfully. See your or rotate the vehicle’s tires, the identification codes need
dealer/retailer for service. to be matched to the new tire/wheel location. The sensors
are matched, to the tire/wheel locations, in the following
• Replacement tires or wheels do not match your order: driver side front tire, passenger side front tire,
vehicle’s original equipment tires or wheels. Tires passenger side rear tire, and driver side rear tire using
and wheels other than those recommended for your a TPMS diagnostic tool. See your dealer/retailer for
vehicle could prevent the TPMS from functioning service.
properly. See Buying New Tires on page 5-68.
The TPMS sensors can also be matched to each
• Operating electronic devices or being near facilities tire/wheel position by increasing or decreasing the
using radio wave frequencies similar to the TPMS tire’s air pressure. When increasing the tire’s pressure,
could cause the TPMS sensors to malfunction. do not exceed the maximum inflation pressure
If the TPMS is not functioning it cannot detect or indicated on the tire’s sidewall. To decrease the tire’s
signal a low tire condition. See your dealer/retailer for air-pressure use the pointed end of the valve cap,
service if the TPMS malfunction light and DIC message a pencil-style air pressure gage, or a key.
comes on and stays on. You have two minutes to match each tire and wheel
position. If it takes longer than two minutes to match
any tire and wheel position, the matching process stops
and you need to start over.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-64
The TPMS matching process is outlined below: 7. The passenger side rear turn signal comes on to
1. Set the parking brake. indicate that corner sensor is ready to be learned.
Proceed to the passenger side rear tire and
2. Turn the ignition switch to ON/RUN with the repeat the procedure in Step 5.
engine off.
8. The driver side rear turn signal comes on to
3. Press and hold the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) indicate that corner sensor is ready to be learned.
transmitter’s LOCK and UNLOCK buttons, at the Proceed to the driver side rear tire, and repeat
same time, for about five seconds to start the TPMS the procedure in Step 5.
learn mode. The horn sounds twice indicating the
TPMS receiver is ready and in learn mode. 9. After hearing the single horn chirp for the driver
side rear tire, two additional horn chirps sound
4. Start with the driver side front tire. The driver side to indicate the tire learning process is done.
front turn signal also comes on to indicate that Turn the ignition switch to LOCK/OFF.
corner’s sensor is ready to be learned.
If no tires are learned after entering the TPMS learn
5. Remove the valve cap from the tire’s valve mode, or if communication with the receiver stops, or
stem. Activate the TPMS sensor by increasing if the time limit has expired, turn the ignition switch to
or decreasing the tire’s air pressure for about LOCK/OFF and start over beginning with Step 2.
eight seconds. The horn chirp, can take up to
10. Set all four tires to the recommended air pressure
30 seconds to sound. It chirps one time and then
level as indicated on the Tire and Loading
all the turn signals flash one time to confirm the
Information label.
sensor identification code has been matched to
the tire/wheel position. 11. Put the valve caps back on the valve stems.
6. The passenger side front turn signal comes on to
indicate that corner sensor is ready to be learned.
Proceed to the passenger side front tire and
repeat the procedure in Step 5.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-65
Tire Inspection and Rotation
We recommend that you regularly inspect your
vehicle’s tires, including the spare tire, for signs of
wear or damage. See When It Is Time for New
Tires on page 5-67 for more information.
Tires should be rotated every 5,000 to 8,000 miles
(8 000 to 13 000 km). See Scheduled Maintenance
on page 6-4.
The purpose of a regular tire rotation is to
achieve a uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle.
This will ensure that your vehicle continues to
perform most like it did when the tires were new. When rotating the vehicle’s tires, always use the
correct rotation pattern shown here.
Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate the tires
as soon as possible and check wheel alignment. Do not include the compact spare tire in the tire
Also check for damaged tires or wheels. See When rotation.
It Is Time for New Tires on page 5-67 and Wheel After the tires have been rotated, adjust the front
Replacement on page 5-72. and rear inflation pressures as shown on the Tire
and Loading Information label. See Inflation - Tire
Pressure on page 5-59 and Loading the Vehicle on
page 4-20.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-66
Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor System. See Tire When It Is Time for New Tires
Pressure Monitor Operation on page 5-62.
Various factors, such as maintenance, temperatures,
Make certain that all wheel nuts are properly
driving speeds, vehicle loading, and road conditions
tightened. See “Wheel Nut Torque” under
influence when you need new tires.
Capacities and Specifications on page 5-108.
One way to tell when it
is time for new tires is
{ CAUTION: to check the treadwear
indicators, which will
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to appear when your tires
which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts have only 1/16 inch
become loose after time. The wheel could (1.6 mm) or less of tread
come off and cause an accident. When you remaining.
change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from
places where the wheel attaches to the
vehicle. In an emergency, you can use a cloth
or a paper towel to do this; but be sure to use a
scraper or wire brush later, if needed, to get all
the rust or dirt off. See Changing a Flat Tire on
page 5-76.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-67
You need new tires if any of the following statements Buying New Tires
are true:
• You can see the indicators at three or more places GM has developed and matched specific tires for
around the tire. your vehicle. The original equipment tires installed
on your vehicle, when it was new, were designed
• You can see cord or fabric showing through the to meet General Motors Tire Performance Criteria
tire’s rubber. Specification (TPC Spec) system rating. If you need
• The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut, or snagged replacement tires, GM strongly recommends that
deep enough to show cord or fabric. you get tires with the same TPC Spec rating. This
way, your vehicle will continue to have tires that are
• The tire has a bump, bulge, or split. designed to give the same performance and vehicle
• The tire has a puncture, cut, or other damage that safety, during normal use, as the original tires.
cannot be repaired well because of the size or GM’s exclusive TPC Spec system considers
location of the damage. over a dozen critical specifications that impact the
The rubber in tires degrades over time, even if they overall performance of your vehicle, including brake
are not being used. This is also true for the spare tire, system performance, ride and handling, traction
if your vehicle has one. Multiple conditions affect how control, and tire pressure monitoring performance.
fast this aging takes place, including temperatures, GM’s TPC Spec number is molded onto the tire’s
loading conditions, and inflation pressure maintenance. sidewall near the tire size. If the tires have an
With proper care and maintenance tires will typically wear all-season tread design, the TPC Spec number will
out before they degrade due to age. If you are unsure be followed by an MS for mud and snow. See Tire
about the need to replace your tires as they get older, Sidewall Labeling on page 5-53 for additional
consult the tire manufacturer for more information. information.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-68
GM recommends replacing tires in sets of four.
This is because uniform tread depth on all tires will
help keep your vehicle performing most like it did { CAUTION:
when the tires were new. Replacing less than a
full set of tires can affect the braking and handling If you use bias-ply tires on the vehicle, the
performance of your vehicle. See Tire Inspection wheel rim flanges could develop cracks after
and Rotation on page 5-66 for information on many miles of driving. A tire and/or wheel
proper tire rotation. could fail suddenly, causing a crash. Use only
radial-ply tires with the wheels on the vehicle.
{ CAUTION: If you must replace your vehicle’s tires with those
that do not have a TPC Spec number, make sure
Mixing tires could cause you to lose control they are the same size, load range, speed rating,
while driving. If you mix tires of different sizes, and construction type (radial and bias-belted tires)
brands, or types (radial and bias-belted tires), as your vehicle’s original tires.
the vehicle may not handle properly, and you
could have a crash. Using tires of different Vehicles that have a tire pressure monitoring
sizes, brands, or types may also cause system could give an inaccurate low-pressure
damage to your vehicle. Be sure to use the warning if non-TPC Spec rated tires are installed
correct size, brand, and type of tires on all on your vehicle. Non-TPC Spec rated tires may give
wheels. It is all right to drive with your compact a low-pressure warning that is higher or lower than
spare temporarily, as it was developed for use the proper warning level you would get with TPC
on your vehicle. See Compact Spare Tire on Spec rated tires. See Tire Pressure Monitor System
page 5-89. on page 5-61.
Your vehicle’s original equipment tires are listed
on the Tire and Loading Information Label.
See Loading the Vehicle on page 4-20, for more
information about the Tire and Loading Information
Label and its location on your vehicle.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-69
Different Size Tires and Wheels Uniform Tire Quality Grading
If you add wheels or tires that are a different size than Quality grades can be found where applicable
your original equipment wheels and tires, this may affect on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder
the way your vehicle performs, including its braking, and maximum section width. For example:
ride and handling characteristics, stability, and resistance
to rollover. Additionally, if your vehicle has electronic Treadwear 200 Traction AA
systems such as, antilock brakes, traction control, and Temperature A
electronic stability control, the performance of these
systems can be affected. The following information relates to the
system developed by the United States National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA),
{ CAUTION: which grades tires by treadwear, traction, and
temperature performance. This applies only to
vehicles sold in the United States. The grades are
If you add different sized wheels, your vehicle may molded on the sidewalls of most passenger car
not provide an acceptable level of performance and tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG)
safety if tires not recommended for those wheels system does not apply to deep tread, winter-type
are selected. You may increase the chance that you snow tires, space-saver, or temporary use
will crash and suffer serious injury. Only use GM spare tires, tires with nominal rim diameters
specific wheel and tire systems developed for your of 10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm), or to some
vehicle, and have them properly installed by a GM
limited-production tires.
certified technician. While the tires available on General Motors
passenger cars and light trucks may vary with
respect to these grades, they must also conform
See Buying New Tires on page 5-68 and Accessories to federal safety requirements and additional
and Modifications on page 5-3 for additional information. General Motors Tire Performance Criteria (TPC)
standards.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-70
Treadwear Temperature – A, B, C
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating The temperature grades are A (the highest), B,
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the
under controlled conditions on a specified generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat
government test course. For example, a tire when tested under controlled conditions on a
graded 150 would wear one and a half (1.5) times specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained
as well on the government course as a tire high temperature can cause the material of the tire
graded 100. The relative performance of tires to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive
depends upon the actual conditions of their use, temperature can lead to sudden tire failure.
however, and may depart significantly from the The grade C corresponds to a level of performance
norm due to variations in driving habits, service which all passenger car tires must meet under the
practices, and differences in road characteristics Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109.
and climate. Grades B and A represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory test wheel than the
Traction – AA, A, B, C minimum required by law. It should be noted that
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are the temperature grade for this tire is established for
AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive
controlled conditions on specified government test loading, either separately or in combination, can
surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
may have poor traction performance.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-71
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance Wheel Replacement
The tires and wheels on your vehicle were aligned and Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked, or badly
balanced carefully at the factory to give you the longest rusted or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming loose, the
tire life and best overall performance. Adjustments to wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel nuts should be replaced.
wheel alignment and tire balancing will not be necessary If the wheel leaks air, replace it (except some aluminum
on a regular basis. However, if you notice unusual tire wheels, which can sometimes be repaired). See your
wear or your vehicle pulling to one side or the other, dealer/retailer if any of these conditions exist.
the alignment might need to be checked. If you notice
Your dealer/retailer will know the kind of wheel
your vehicle vibrating when driving on a smooth road, you need.
the tires and wheels might need to be rebalanced.
See your dealer/retailer for proper diagnosis. Each new wheel should have the same load-carrying
capacity, diameter, width, offset, and be mounted
the same way as the one it replaces.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-72
If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel bolts, Notice: The wrong wheel can also cause problems
wheel nuts, or Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) with bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer or
sensors, replace them only with new GM original odometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper height,
equipment parts. This way, you will be sure to have the vehicle ground clearance, and tire or tire chain
right wheel, wheel bolts, wheel nuts, and TPMS sensors clearance to the body and chassis.
for your vehicle. See Changing a Flat Tire on page 5-76 for more
information.
{ CAUTION: Used Replacement Wheels
Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheel bolts,

or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be dangerous. { CAUTION:
It could affect the braking and handling of your
vehicle, make your tires lose air and make you Putting a used wheel on the vehicle is dangerous.
lose control. You could have a collision in which You cannot know how it has been used or how
you or others could be injured. Always use the far it has been driven. It could fail suddenly and
correct wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel nuts for cause a crash. If you have to replace a wheel,
replacement. use a new GM original equipment wheel.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-73
Tire Chains
{ CAUTION: conditions. Follow that manufacturer’s instructions.

To help avoid damage to your vehicle, drive
slowly, readjust or remove the device if it is
If your vehicle has P215/60R16, P225/50R17, or contacting your vehicle, and do not spin your
P225/50R18 size tires, do not use tire chains. vehicle’s wheels.
There is not enough clearance.
If you do find traction devices that will fit, install
Tire chains used on a vehicle without the proper them on the front tires.
amount of clearance can cause damage to the
brakes, suspension, or other vehicle parts.
The area damaged by the tire chains could Notice: If your vehicle has P205/65R15 size tires,
cause you to lose control of your vehicle and use tire chains only where legal and only when you
you or others may be injured in a crash. must. Use only SAE Class S-type chains that are the
proper size for your tires. Install them on the front
Use another type of traction device only if its tires and tighten them as tightly as possible with the
manufacturer recommends it for use on your ends securely fastened. Drive slowly and follow the
vehicle and tire size combination and road chain manufacturer’s instructions. If you can hear the
CAUTION: (Continued) chains contacting your vehicle, stop and retighten
them. If the contact continues, slow down until it
stops. Driving too fast or spinning the wheels with
chains on will damage your vehicle.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-74
If a Tire Goes Flat
It is unusual for a tire to blowout while you are driving, { CAUTION:
especially if you maintain your vehicle’s tires properly.
If air goes out of a tire, it is much more likely to leak out Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to do
slowly. But if you should ever have a blowout, here maintenance or repairs is dangerous without the
are a few tips about what to expect and what to do: appropriate safety equipment and training. If a jack
If a front tire fails, the flat tire creates a drag that pulls is provided with the vehicle, it is designed only for
the vehicle toward that side. Take your foot off the changing a flat tire. If it is used for anything else,
accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly. you or others could be badly injured or killed if the
Steer to maintain lane position, and then gently brake vehicle slips off the jack. If a jack is provided with
to a stop well out of the traffic lane.
the vehicle, only use it for changing a flat tire.
A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much like
a skid and may require the same correction you would
use in a skid. In any rear blowout remove your foot from If a tire goes flat, the next part shows how to use the
the accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle under control by jacking equipment to change a flat tire safely.
steering the way you want the vehicle to go. It may be
very bumpy and noisy, but you can still steer. Gently
brake to a stop, well off the road if possible.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-75
Changing a Flat Tire
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damage
by driving slowly to a level place. Turn on the hazard
warning flashers. See Hazard Warning Flashers 3. Turn off the engine and do not restart while
on page 3-6. the vehicle is raised.
4. Do not allow passengers to remain in the
vehicle.
{ CAUTION: To be even more certain the vehicle will not move,
you should put blocks at the front and rear of the
Changing a tire can be dangerous. The vehicle tire farthest away from the one being changed.
can slip off the jack and roll over or fall on you or That would be the tire, on the other side, at the
other people. You and they could be badly injured opposite end of the vehicle.
or even killed. Find a level place to change your
tire. To help prevent the vehicle from moving:
When the vehicle has a flat tire (B), use the following
1. Set the parking brake firmly. example as a guide to assist you in the placement
2. Put the shift lever in P (Park). of wheel blocks (A).
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-76
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools
The equipment you will need is in the trunk.
1. Open the trunk. See Trunk on page 2-12 for more
information.
2. Remove the spare tire cover.
A. Wheel Block
B. Flat Tire
The following information explains how to use the jack
and change a tire.
3. Turn the wing nut counterclockwise and remove it.

Then remove the compact spare tire. See Compact
Spare Tire on page 5-89 for more information.
4. Remove the wing nut holding the jack in place.
5. Remove the jack and wheel wrench from the trunk.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-77
Tire Changing Tools
1. Turn the wing nut counterclockwise to loosen wheel

wrench.
The tools you will be using include the wheel wrench (A)
2. Unhook the wheel wrench from the jack.
and jack (B).
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-78
Removing the Flat Tire and
Installing the Spare Tire
1. Do a safety check before proceeding. See Changing
a Flat Tire on page 5-76.
2. If the vehicle has a wheel cover or hubcap that has
plastic wheel nut caps, loosen the plastic nut caps.
You might need to use the wheel wrench to loosen
them. Do not pry off wheel covers or center caps that
have plastic wheel nut caps.
3. Remove the wheel cover or center cap from the
wheel to locate the wheel nuts.
If the vehicle has a wheel cover or hubcap without
plastic wheel nut caps, gently pry on the edge of the
3. Extend the handle on the wheel wrench by pressing plastic wheel trim to remove it from the wheel to
the button and pulling on the end of the wrench. locate the wheel nuts.
You must do this before using the wheel wrench.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-79
4. Use the wrench to loosen all the wheel nuts. Do not 5. Position the lift head at the jack location nearest
remove them yet. the flat tire. Make sure all of the jack lift head is
touching the jacking flange under the body. Do not
place the jack under a body panel.
6. Put the compact spare tire near the flat tire.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-80
{ CAUTION:
Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up is
dangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack, you
could be badly injured or killed. Never get under
a vehicle when it is supported only by a jack.
{ CAUTION:
Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly
positioned can damage the vehicle and even 7. Raise the vehicle by turning the wrench clockwise.
make the vehicle fall. To help avoid personal injury Raise the vehicle far enough off the ground so there
and vehicle damage, be sure to fit the jack lift is enough room for the compact spare tire to fit.
head into the proper location before raising the
vehicle.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-81
8. Remove all of the
wheel nuts.
{ CAUTION:
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to which
it is fastened, can make wheel nuts become loose
after time. The wheel could come off and cause an
accident. When changing a wheel, remove any rust
or dirt from places where the wheel attaches to the
vehicle. In an emergency, use a cloth or a paper
towel to do this; but be sure to use a scraper or wire
brush later, if needed, to get all the rust or dirt off.
See Changing a Flat Tire on page 5-76.
9. Remove the flat tire.
10. Remove any rust or dirt

from the wheel bolts,
mounting surfaces
and spare wheel.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-82
11. Install the compact spare tire.
{ CAUTION:
Never use oil or grease on bolts or nuts because
the nuts might come loose. The vehicle’s wheel
could fall off, causing a crash.
12. Put the wheel nuts back on with the rounded end
toward the wheel. Tighten each nut by hand or
with the wrench until the wheel is held against
the hub.
13. Lower the vehicle by turning the wrench

counterclockwise. Lower the jack completely.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-83
14. Tighten the wheel nuts
firmly in a crisscross
{ CAUTION: sequence, as shown,
with the wheel wrench.
Wheel nuts that are improperly or incorrectly
tightened can cause the wheels to become loose
or come off. The wheel nuts should be tightened
with a torque wrench to the proper torque
specification after replacing. Follow the torque
specification supplied by the aftermarket
manufacturer when using accessory locking
wheel nuts. See Capacities and Specifications
Notice: Wheel covers will not fit on your vehicle’s
on page 5-108 for original equipment wheel nut compact spare. If you try to put a wheel cover on
torque specifications. the compact spare, the cover or the spare could
be damaged.
Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts can Do not try to put a wheel cover on your compact spare
lead to brake pulsation and rotor damage. To avoid tire. It will not fit. Store the wheel cover and wheel nut
expensive brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheel caps in the trunk until you have the flat tire repaired or
nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper torque replaced.
specification. See Capacities and Specifications on
page 5-108 for the wheel nut torque specification.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-84
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and
Tools
Storing a Flat Tire and Tools
{ CAUTION:
Storing a jack, a tire, or other equipment in the
passenger compartment of the vehicle could
cause injury. In a sudden stop or collision, loose
equipment could strike someone. Store all these
in the proper place.
3. Collapse the wrench using the same button used to
To store the flat tire and jack in the compact spare tire extend it.
compartment: 4. Attach the wrench to the jack by placing the tab on
1. Open the trunk. See Trunk on page 2-12. the wrench into the hole on the side of the jack.
Then place the wrench handle over the tab on the
2. Remove the bolt extension (in the yellow sleeve) side of the jack.
from the jack and remove the center cap from the
wheel.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-85
5. Raise the jack to the 7. With the valve stem up, place the tire on the
height shown and compartment floor with the rear of the tire under the
lock the wrench onto trim panel. The tire may not lay completely flat.
the jack. 8. Line up the bolt with the wheel center.
9. With the yellow cap in place to prevent the wheel
from being scratched, screw the bolt extension
onto the bolt through the wheel center hole.
10. Remove the yellow cap from the bolt extension.
11. Secure the tire and wheel with the larger wing nut.
6. Place the jack over the bolt (A) on the floor, making
sure it contacts the bolt. Thread the jack retainer
nut until it contacts the jack.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-86
A. Cover
B. Wing Nut
C. Extension
D. Flat Tire (valve stem up)
E. Nut
F. Jack
G. Bolt
The compact spare is for temporary use only. Replace

the compact spare tire with a full-size tire as soon
as you can. See Compact Spare Tire on page 5-89.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-87
Storing the Spare Tire and Tools
{ CAUTION:
Storing a jack, a tire, or other equipment in the
passenger compartment of the vehicle could
cause injury. In a sudden stop or collision, loose
equipment could strike someone. Store all these
in the proper place.
1. Open the trunk. See Trunk on page 2-12.
2. Collapse the wrench using the same button used to

extend it.
3. Attach the wrench to the jack by placing the tab on
the wrench into the hole on the side of the jack.
Then place the wrench handle over the tab on the
side of the jack.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-88
4. Raise the jack to the Compact Spare Tire
height shown and
lock the wrench onto
the jack.
{ CAUTION:
Driving with more than one compact spare tire at
a time could result in loss of braking and handling.
This could lead to a crash and you or others could
be injured. Use only one compact spare tire at
a time.
5. Place the jack in the spare tire well. Make sure the
stow bolt goes through the hole in the center of the Although the compact spare tire was fully inflated
wrench on the jack, with the base of the jack towards when the vehicle was new, it can lose air after a time.
the front of the vehicle. Turn the jack retainer nut until Check the inflation pressure regularly. It should be
it firmly contacts the wrench. Do not over tighten. 60 psi (420 kPa).
6. Place the compact spare into the tire compartment After installing the compact spare on the vehicle,
with the stow bolt going through the center hole of stop as soon as possible and make sure the spare
the wheel. tire is correctly inflated. The compact spare is made
to perform well at speeds up to 65 mph (105 km/h)
7. Turn the spare tire retainer nut until it firmly
for distances up to 3,000 miles (5 000 km), so you
contacts the wheel. Do not over tighten.
can finish your trip and have the full-size tire
repaired or replaced at your convenience.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-89
Of course, it is best to replace the spare with a
full-size tire as soon as possible. The spare tire
Appearance Care
will last longer and be in good shape in case it is
needed again. Interior Cleaning
Notice: When the compact spare is installed, The vehicle’s interior will continue to look its best if it is
do not take the vehicle through an automatic car cleaned often. Although not always visible, dust and dirt
wash with guide rails. The compact spare can can accumulate on the upholstery. Dirt can damage
get caught on the rails which can damage the tire, carpet, fabric, leather, and plastic surfaces. Regular
wheel and other parts of the vehicle. vacuuming is recommended to remove particles from
Do not use the compact spare on other vehicles. the upholstery. It is important to keep the upholstery
from becoming and remaining heavily soiled. Soils should
And do not mix the compact spare tire or wheel with be removed as quickly as possible. The vehicle’s interior
other wheels or tires. They will not fit. Keep the may experience extremes of heat that could cause stains
spare tire and its wheel together. to set rapidly.
Notice: Tire chains will not fit the compact spare. Lighter colored interiors may require more frequent
Using them can damage the vehicle and can damage cleaning. Use care because newspapers and garments
the chains too. Do not use tire chains on the that transfer color to home furnishings may also transfer
compact spare. color to the vehicle’s interior.
When cleaning the vehicle’s interior, only use cleaners
specifically designed for the surfaces being cleaned.
Permanent damage may result from using cleaners on
surfaces for which they were not intended. Use glass
cleaner only on glass. Remove any accidental over-spray
from other surfaces immediately. To prevent over-spray,
apply cleaner directly to the cleaning cloth.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-90
Notice: Using abrasive cleaners when cleaning • Laundry detergents or dishwashing soaps with
glass surfaces on the vehicle, could scratch degreasers can leave residue that streaks and
the glass and/or cause damage to the rear window attracts dirt. For liquid cleaners, about 20 drops
defogger. When cleaning the glass on the vehicle, per gallon (3.78 L) of water is a good guide.
use only a soft cloth and glass cleaner. Use only mild, neutral-pH soaps.
Many cleaners contain solvents that may become • Too much cleaner that saturates the upholstery.
concentrated in the vehicle’s breathing space. Before
using cleaners, read and adhere to all safety instructions • Organic solvents such as naptha, alcohol, etc. that
on the label. While cleaning the vehicle’s interior, can damage the vehicle’s interior.
maintain adequate ventilation by opening the vehicle’s
doors and windows. Fabric/Carpet
Dust may be removed from small buttons and knobs
using a small brush with soft bristles. Use a vacuum cleaner with a soft brush attachment
frequently to remove dust and loose dirt. A canister
Products that remove odors from the vehicle’s vacuum with a beater bar in the nozzle may only be used
upholstery and clean the vehicle’s glass can be on floor carpet and carpeted floor mats. For any soil,
obtained from your dealer/retailer. always try to remove it first with plain water or club soda.
Do not clean the vehicle using: Before cleaning, gently remove as much of the soil as
possible using one of the following techniques:
• A knife or any other sharp object to remove a soil
from any interior surface. • For liquids: gently blot the remaining soil with a paper
towel. Allow the soil to absorb into the paper towel
• A stiff brush. It can cause damage to the vehicle’s until no more can be removed.
interior surfaces.
• For solid dry soils: remove as much as possible and
• Heavy pressure or aggressive rubbing with a then vacuum.
cleaning cloth. Use of heavy pressure can damage
the interior and does not improve the effectiveness
of soil removal.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-91
To clean: Leather
1. Saturate a lint-free, clean white cloth with water or
club soda. A soft cloth dampened with water can be used to
remove dust. If a more thorough cleaning is necessary,
2. Wring the cloth to remove excess moisture. a soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solution can be
3. Start on the outside edge of the soil and gently rub used. Allow the leather to dry naturally. Do not use heat
toward the center. Continue cleaning, using a clean to dry. Never use steam to clean leather. Never use spot
area of the cloth each time it becomes soiled. lifters or spot removers on leather. Many commercial
leather cleaners and coatings that are sold to preserve
4. Continue to gently rub the soiled area until the and protect leather may permanently change the
cleaning cloth remains clean. appearance and feel of the leather and are not
5. If the soil is not completely removed, use a mild recommended. Do not use silicone or wax-based
soap solution and repeat the cleaning process products, or those containing organic solvents to
that was used with plain water. clean the vehicle’s interior because they can alter the
If any of the soil remains, a commercial fabric cleaner appearance by increasing the gloss in a non-uniform
or spot lifter may be necessary. When a commercial manner. Never use shoe polish on leather.
upholstery cleaner or spot lifter is to be used, test a small
hidden area for colorfastness first. If the locally cleaned Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other
area gives any impression that a ring formation may
result, clean the entire surface. Plastic Surfaces
After the cleaning process has been completed, a paper A soft cloth dampened with water may be used to
towel can be used to blot excess moisture from the remove dust. If a more thorough cleaning is necessary,
fabric or carpet. a clean soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solution
can be used to gently remove dust and dirt. Never
use spot lifters or removers on plastic surfaces.
Many commercial cleaners and coatings that are
sold to preserve and protect soft plastic surfaces
may permanently change the appearance and
feel of the interior and are not recommended.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-92
Do not use silicone or wax-based products, or those Weatherstrips
containing organic solvents to clean the vehicle’s interior
because they can alter the appearance by increasing the Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last
gloss in a non-uniform manner. longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply
Some commercial products may increase gloss on the silicone grease with a clean cloth. During very cold,
instrument panel. The increase in gloss may cause damp weather frequent application may be required.
annoying reflections in the windshield and even make See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12.
it difficult to see through the windshield under certain
conditions. Washing Your Vehicle
The best way to preserve the vehicle’s finish is to keep
Care of Safety Belts it clean by washing it often.
Keep belts clean and dry. Notice: Certain cleaners contain chemicals that can
damage the emblems or nameplates on the vehicle.
Check the cleaning product label. If it states that
{ CAUTION: it should not be used on plastic parts, do not use it
on the vehicle or damage may occur and it would
not be covered by the warranty.
Do not bleach or dye safety belts. It may severely
weaken them. In a crash, they might not be able Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight. Use a car
to provide adequate protection. Clean safety belts washing soap. Do not use cleaning agents that are
only with mild soap and lukewarm water. petroleum based or that contain acid or abrasives,
as they can damage the paint, metal or plastic on the
vehicle. Approved cleaning products can be obtained
from your dealer/retailer. Follow all manufacturers’
directions regarding correct product usage, necessary
safety precautions and appropriate disposal of any
vehicle care product.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-93
Rinse the vehicle well, before washing and after to If the vehicle has a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish,
remove all cleaning agents completely. If they are the clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the colored
allowed to dry on the surface, they could stain. basecoat. Always use waxes and polishes that are
non-abrasive and made for a basecoat/clearcoat
Dry the finish with a soft, clean chamois or an all-cotton
paint finish.
towel to avoid surface scratches and water spotting.
High pressure car washes may cause water to enter Notice: Machine compounding or aggressive
the vehicle. Avoid using high pressure washes closer polishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish
than 12 inches (30 cm) to the surface of the vehicle. may damage it. Use only non-abrasive waxes and
Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8 274 kPa) polishes that are made for a basecoat/clearcoat
can result in damage or removal of paint and decals. paint finish on the vehicle.
Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, bird
droppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, etc.,
Use only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and a can damage the vehicle’s finish if they remain on
car washing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses. painted surfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon as possible.
Follow instructions under Washing Your Vehicle on If necessary, use non-abrasive cleaners that are marked
page 5-93. safe for painted surfaces to remove foreign matter.
Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging, weather
Finish Care and chemical fallout that can take their toll over a
period of years. To help keep the paint finish looking
Occasional waxing or mild polishing of the vehicle new, keep the vehicle garaged or covered whenever
by hand may be necessary to remove residue from possible.
the paint finish. Approved cleaning products can
be obtained from your dealer/retailer.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-94
Protecting Exterior Bright Metal Parts Aluminum Wheels
Bright metal parts should be cleaned regularly to keep
their luster. Washing with water is all that is usually Notice: Chrome wheels and other chrome trim may
needed. However, chrome polish may be used on be damaged if the vehicle is not washed after driving
chrome or stainless steel trim, if necessary. on roads that have been sprayed with magnesium,
calcium or sodium chloride. These chlorides are
Use special care with aluminum trim. To avoid used on roads for conditions such as ice and dust.
damaging protective trim, never use auto or chrome Always wash the vehicle’s chrome with soap and
polish, steam or caustic soap to clean aluminum. water after exposure.
A coating of wax, rubbed to high polish, is recommended
for all bright metal parts. Notice: Using strong soaps, chemicals, abrasive
polishes, cleaners, brushes, or cleaners that contain
acid on aluminum or chrome-plated wheels, could
Windshield and Wiper Blades damage the surface of the wheel(s). The repairs
would not be covered by the vehicle warranty.
Clean the outside of the windshield with glass cleaner. Use only approved cleaners on aluminum or
Clean the rubber blades using a lint free cloth or chrome-plated wheels.
paper towel soaked with windshield washer fluid or Keep the wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with mild
a mild detergent. Wash the windshield thoroughly soap and water. Rinse with clean water. After rinsing
when cleaning the blades. Bugs, road grime, sap, thoroughly, dry with a soft clean towel. A wax may then
and a buildup of vehicle wash/wax treatments may be applied.
cause wiper streaking. Replace the wiper blades if
they are worn or damaged. Notice: Using chrome polish on aluminum wheels
Wipers can be damaged by: could damage the wheels. The repairs would not
be covered by the vehicle warranty. Use chrome
• Extreme dusty conditions polish on chrome wheels only.
• Sand and salt
• Heat and sun
• Snow and ice, without proper removal
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-95
The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted Sheet Metal Damage
surface of the vehicle. Do not use strong soaps,
chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners, If the vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal
cleaners with acid, or abrasive cleaning brushes repair or replacement, make sure the body repair shop
on them because the surface could be damaged. applies anti-corrosion material to parts repaired or
Do not use chrome polish on aluminum wheels. replaced to restore corrosion protection.
Notice: Driving the vehicle through an automatic Original manufacturer replacement parts will provide
car wash that has silicone carbide tire cleaning the corrosion protection while maintaining the vehicle
brushes, could damage the aluminum or warranty.
chrome-plated wheels. The repairs would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty. Never drive a Finish Damage
vehicle that has aluminum or chrome-plated wheels
through an automatic car wash that uses silicone Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in the
carbide tire cleaning brushes. finish should be repaired right away. Bare metal will
corrode quickly and may develop into major repair
Tires expense.
Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with
To clean the tires, use a stiff brush with tire cleaner. touch-up materials available from your dealer/retailer.
Notice: Using petroleum-based tire dressing Larger areas of finish damage can be corrected in
products on the vehicle may damage the paint finish your dealer’s/retailer’s body and paint shop.
and/or tires. When applying a tire dressing, always
wipe off any overspray from all painted surfaces
on the vehicle.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-96
Underbody Maintenance Vehicle Identification
Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust
control can collect on the underbody. If these are Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
not removed, corrosion and rust can develop on the
underbody parts such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan,
and exhaust system even though they have corrosion
protection.
At least every spring, flush these materials from the
underbody with plain water. Clean any areas where
mud and debris can collect. Dirt packed in close areas
of the frame should be loosened before being flushed.
Your dealer/retailer or an underbody car washing system
can do this. This is the legal identifier for the vehicle. It appears on
a plate in the front corner of the instrument panel, on the
Chemical Paint Spotting driver side. It can be seen through the windshield from
outside the vehicle. The VIN also appears on the Vehicle
Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create Certification and Service Parts labels and the certificates
a chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall upon and of title and registration.
attack painted surfaces on the vehicle. This damage can
take two forms: blotchy, ring-shaped discolorations, and Engine Identification
small, irregular dark spots etched into the paint surface.
The eighth character in the VIN is the engine code.
Although no defect in the paint job causes this, we This code helps identify the vehicle’s engine,
will repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces specifications, and replacement parts. See “Engine
of new vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within Specifications” under Capacities and Specifications
12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of purchase, on page 5-108 for the vehicle’s engine code.
whichever occurs first.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-97
Service Parts Identification Label Add-on equipment can drain the vehicle battery, even if
the vehicle is not operating.
This label is on the inside of the glove box. It is The vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting to
very helpful if parts need to be ordered. The label add anything electrical to the vehicle, see Servicing
has the following information: Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-71.
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
• Model designation Windshield Wiper Fuses
• Paint information The windshield wiper motor is protected by a circuit
• Production options and special equipment breaker and a fuse. If the motor overheats due to heavy
snow, etc., the wiper will stop until the motor cools. If the
Do not remove this label from the vehicle. overload is caused by some electrical problem, have it
fixed.
Electrical System
Power Windows and Other Power
Add-On Electrical Equipment Options
Notice: Do not add anything electrical to the Fuses in the fuse block protect the power windows.
vehicle unless you check with your dealer/retailer When the current load is too heavy, the fuse opens
first. Some electrical equipment can damage the protecting the circuit until the problem is fixed.
vehicle and the damage would not be covered
by the vehicle’s warranty. Some add-on electrical
equipment can keep other components from working
as they should.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-98
Fuses Instrument Panel Fuse Block
The wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected from
short circuits by a combination of fuses, circuit breakers
and fusible links. This greatly reduces the chance of
damage caused by electrical problems.
Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse. If the
band is broken or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure
to replace a bad fuse with a new one of the identical
size and rating.
There are three fuse blocks in your vehicle: one in
the center of the instrument panel, one in the engine
compartment and one in the trunk.
There is a fuse puller located on the instrument panel
fuse block. It can be used to easily remove fuses
from the fuse block.
The instrument panel fuse block is located on the

instrument panel near the floor on the passenger
side of the vehicle.
Remove the panel cover to access the fuse block, then
remove the fuse block cover to access the fuses.
The vehicle might not have all the fuses and features
listed.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-99
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-100
Fuses Usage Fuses Usage
POWER Power Mirrors IGN SENSOR Ignition Switch
MIRRORS
STRG WHL Steering Wheel Illumination
EPS Electronic Power Steering ILLUM
Cruise Control Switch, Passenger NOT
RUN/CRANK Airbag Status Indicator INSTALLED Not Used
HVAC Heating Ventilation Air Conditioning RADIO Audio System

BLOWER HIGH Blower - High Speed Relay
INTERIOR
CLUSTER/ Instrument Panel Cluster, LIGHTS Interior Lamps
THEFT Theft Deterrent System
NOT Not Used
ONSTAR OnStar® INSTALLED
NOT POWER
INSTALLED Not Used Power Windows
WINDOWS
AIRBAG (IGN) Airbag (Ignition) HVAC CTRL Heating Ventilation Air Conditioning
(IGN) Control (Ignition)
Heating Ventilation Air Conditioning
HVAC CTRL Control Diagnostic Link Connector
(BATT) HVAC Heating Ventilation Air Conditioning
(Battery) BLOWER Blower Switch
PEDAL Not Used DOOR LOCK Door Locks
WIPER SW Windshield Wiper/Washer Switch ROOF/HEAT
SEAT Sunroof, Heated Seat
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-101
Fuses Usage Engine Compartment Fuse Block
NOT Not Used The vehicle may not be equipped with all the fuses and
INSTALLED features listed.
NOT The engine compartment fuse block is located on the
INSTALLED Not Used
driver side of the engine compartment, near the battery.
AIRBAG Airbag (Battery) Notice: Spilling liquid on any electrical components
(BATT) on the vehicle may damage it. Always keep the
SPARE FUSE covers on any electrical component.
Spare Fuse Holder
HOLDER
SPARE FUSE
HOLDER Spare Fuse Holder
SPARE FUSE
SPARE FUSE
FUSE PULLER Fuse Puller
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-102
1 Air Conditioner Clutch 4 Transmission Control Module
2 Electronic Throttle Control Ignition 1
Engine Control Module IGN 1 5 Mass Airflow Sensor (LY7)
3
(LZ4 & LZE) 6 Emission
7 Left Headlamp Low-Beam
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-103
8 Horn 25 Body Control Module 2
9 Right Headlamp Low-Beam 26 Starter
10 Front Fog Lamps 41 Electric Power Steering
11 Left Headlamp High-Beam 42 Transmission Control Module
12 Right Headlamp High-Beam Battery
Engine Control Module BATT 43 Ignition Module (LZ4, LZE & LE5);
13 Injectors, Ignition Coils Odd (LY7)
(LY7 & LE5)
14 Windshield Wiper Injectors (LZ4, LZE & LE5);
44 Injectors, Ignition Coils Even (LY7)
15 Antilock Brake System (IGN 1)
45 Post Cat 02 Sensor Heaters
Engine Control Module IGN 1 (LY7, LZ4 & LZE)
16
(LY7 & LE5)
46 Daytime Running Lamps
17 Cooling Fan 1
47 Center High-Mounted Stoplamp
18 Cooling Fan 2
50 Driver Power Window
Run Relay, Heating, Ventilation,
19 Air Conditioning Blower Engine Control Module BATT
51
(LZ4 & LZE)
20 Body Control Module 1
52 AIR Solenoid
21 Body Control Module Run/Crank
54 Regulated Voltage Control
22 Rear Electrical Center 1
55 DC/AC Inverter
23 Rear Electrical Center 2
56 Antilock Brake System BATT
24 Antilock Brake System
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-104
Relays Usage Rear Compartment Fuse Block
28 Cooling Fan 1
29 Cooling Fan Series/Parallel
30 Cooling Fan 2
31 Starter
32 Run/Crank, Ignition
33 Powertrain
34 Air Conditioning Clutch
35 High Beam
36 Front Fog Lamps
37 Horn
38 Low-Beam Headlamp
39 Windshield Wiper 1
40 Windshield Wiper 2
48 Daytime Running Lamps
49 Stoplamps The rear compartment fuse block is located in the trunk
of the vehicle. Access the fuse block through the
53 AIR Solenoid
trunk panel on the driver side of the rear cargo area.
Diodes Usage
27 Wiper
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-105
1 Passenger Seat Controls 5 Emission 2, Canister Vent Solenoid
2 Driver Seat Controls 6 Park Lamps, Instrument Panel
3 Not Used Dimming
4 Not Used 7 Not Used
8 Not Used
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-106
Fuses Usage Relays Usage
9 Not Used 26 Rear Window Defogger
10 Sunroof Controls 27 Park Lamps
13 Audio Amplifier 30 Not Used
14 Heated Seat Controls 31 Not Used
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) 33 Back-up Lamps
16 System, XM™ Satellite 34 Not Used
Radio, UGDO
35 Not Used
17 Back-up Lamps
36 Trunk Release
18 Not Used
37 Fuel Pump
19 Not Used
38 (Diode) Cargo Lamp
20 Auxiliary Power Outlets
21 Not Used
22 Trunk Release
23 Rear Defog
24 Heated Mirrors
25 Fuel Pump
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-107
Capacities and Specifications
The following approximate capacities are given in English and metric conversions. Please refer to Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12 for more information.
Capacities
Application English Metric
For the air conditioning system refrigerant charge
amount, see the refrigerant caution label located
Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a
under the hood. See your dealer/retailer for more
information.
Automatic Transmission*
Automatic Transmission 4-Speed (Bottom Pan Removal) 7.0 qt 6.6 L
Automatic Transmission 6-Speed (Drain and Refill) 5.3 qt 5.0 L
Cooling System
2.4L L4 Engine 7.5 qt 7.1 L
3.5L V6 and 3.6L V6 Engine 9.7 qt 9.2 L
Engine Oil with Filter
2.4L L4 Engine 5.0 qt 4.7 L
3.5L V6 Engine 4.0 qt 3.8 L
3.6L V6 Engine 5.5 qt 5.2 L
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-108
Capacities
Application English Metric
Fuel Tank 16.3 gal 61.7 L
Wheel Nut Torque 100 lb ft 140 Y
*Transmission fluid capacity is approximate. See Automatic Transmission Fluid on page 5-28 for information on
checking fluid level.
All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in this
manual.
Engine Specifications
Engine VIN Code Transmission Spark Plug Gap
2.4L L4 B Automatic 0.040 in (1.01 mm)
3.5L V6 K Automatic 0.040 in (1.01 mm)
3.5L V6 N Automatic 0.040 in (1.01 mm)
3.6L V6 7 Automatic 0.044 in (1.10 mm)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-109
✍ NOTES
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-110
Section 6 Maintenance Schedule
Maintenance Schedule ......................................6-2 Owner Checks and Services ............................6-8
Introduction ...................................................6-2 At Each Fuel Fill ............................................6-8
Maintenance Requirements ..............................6-2 At Least Once a Month ...................................6-9
Your Vehicle and the Environment ....................6-2 At Least Once a Year .....................................6-9
Using the Maintenance Schedule ......................6-2 Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ...............6-12
Scheduled Maintenance ...................................6-4 Maintenance Replacement Parts .....................6-13
Additional Required Services ............................6-6 Engine Drive Belt Routing ..............................6-14
Maintenance Footnotes ...................................6-7 Maintenance Record .....................................6-16
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
6-1
Maintenance Schedule Your Vehicle and the Environment
Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep
Introduction the vehicle in good working condition, but also helps
the environment. All recommended maintenance is
Important: Keep engine oil at the proper level and important. Improper vehicle maintenance can even affect
change as recommended. the quality of the air we breathe. Improper fluid levels or
the wrong tire inflation can increase the level of emissions
from the vehicle. To help protect the environment, and to
keep the vehicle in good condition, be sure to maintain
the vehicle properly.
Using the Maintenance Schedule

We want to help keep this vehicle in good working
Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan? The Plan condition. But we do not know exactly how you will drive
supplements the vehicle warranties. See the Warranty it. You might drive very short distances only a few times
and Owner Assistance booklet or your dealer/retailer for a week. Or you might drive long distances all the time in
details. very hot, dusty weather. You might use the vehicle in
making deliveries. Or you might drive it to work, to do
errands, or in many other ways.
Maintenance Requirements
Because of all the different ways people use their
Notice: Maintenance intervals, checks, inspections, vehicles, maintenance needs vary. You might need
replacement parts, and recommended fluids and more frequent checks and replacements. So please read
lubricants as prescribed in this manual are necessary the following and note how you drive. If you have any
to keep this vehicle in good working condition. Any questions on how to keep the vehicle in good condition,
damage caused by failure to follow scheduled see your dealer/retailer.
maintenance might not be covered by the vehicle
warranty.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
6-2
This schedule is for vehicles that: Some maintenance services can be complex. So, unless
• carry passengers and cargo within recommended you are technically qualified and have the necessary
equipment, have your dealer/retailer do these jobs.
limits on the Tire and Loading Information label.
See Loading the Vehicle on page 4-20. When you go to your dealer/retailer for service, trained
and supported service technicians will perform the work
• are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal using genuine parts.
driving limits.
To purchase service information, see Service
• use the recommended fuel. See Gasoline Octane Publications Ordering Information on page 7-16.
on page 5-6.
Owner Checks and Services on page 6-8 tells what
The services in Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4 should be checked, when to check it, and what can easily
should be performed when indicated. See Additional be done to help keep the vehicle in good condition.
Required Services on page 6-6 and Maintenance
Footnotes on page 6-7 for further information. The proper replacement parts, fluids, and lubricants to
use are listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
on page 6-12 and Maintenance Replacement Parts on
{ CAUTION: page 6-13. When the vehicle is serviced, make sure
these are used. All parts should be replaced and all
necessary repairs done before you or anyone else drives
Performing maintenance work on a vehicle can be the vehicle. We recommend the use of genuine parts
dangerous. In trying to do some jobs, you can be from your dealer/retailer.
seriously injured. Do your own maintenance work
only if you have the required know-how and the
proper tools and equipment for the job. If you have
any doubt, see your dealer/retailer to have a
qualified technician do the work. See Doing Your
Own Service Work on page 5-4.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
6-3
Scheduled Maintenance When the CHANGE OIL SOON message appears,
certain services, checks, and inspections are required.
When the CHANGE OIL SOON message displays in Required services are described in the following for
the Driver Information Center (DIC), service is required “Maintenance I” and “Maintenance II.” Generally, it is
for the vehicle. Have the vehicle serviced as soon as recommended that the first service be Maintenance I, the
possible within the next 600 miles (1 000 km). It is second service be Maintenance II, and then alternate
possible that, if driving under the best conditions, the Maintenance I and Maintenance II thereafter. However,
engine oil life system may not indicate that vehicle in some cases, Maintenance II may be required more
service is necessary for over a year. However, the engine often.
oil and filter must be changed at least once a year and at Maintenance I — Use Maintenance I if the message
this time the system must be reset. Your dealer/retailer displays within 10 months since the vehicle was
has trained service technicians who will perform this work purchased or Maintenance II was performed.
using genuine parts and reset the system.
Maintenance II — Use Maintenance II if the previous
If the engine oil life system is ever reset accidentally, service performed was Maintenance I. Always use
service the vehicle within 3,000 miles (5 000 km) since Maintenance II whenever the message displays
the last service. Remember to reset the oil life system 10 months or more since the last service or if the
whenever the oil is changed. See Engine Oil Life System message has not come on at all for one year.
on page 5-24 for information on the Engine Oil Life
System and resetting the system.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
6-4
Scheduled Maintenance
Service Maintenance I Maintenance II
Change engine oil and filter. See Engine Oil on page 5-21. Reset oil life system.
• •
See Engine Oil Life System on page 5-24. An Emission Control Service.
Visually check for any leaks or damage. See footnote (j). • •
Inspect engine air cleaner filter. If necessary, replace filter. See Engine Air
•
Cleaner/Filter on page 5-26. See footnote (k).
Rotate tires and check inflation pressures and wear. See Tire Inspection and
Rotation on page 5-66 and “Tire Wear Inspection” in At Least Once a Month on • •
page 6-9.
Inspect brake system. See footnote (a). • •
Check engine coolant and windshield washer fluid levels and add fluid as
• •
needed.
Perform any needed additional services. See “Additional Required Services”
• •
in this section.
Inspect suspension and steering components. See footnote (b). •
Inspect engine cooling system. See footnote (c). •
Inspect wiper blades. See footnote (d). •
Inspect restraint system components. See footnote (e). •
Lubricate body components. See footnote (f). •
3.6L Engine Only: Check automatic transmission fluid level and add fluid as
•
needed.
Inspect throttle system. See footnote (g). •
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
6-5
Additional Required Services
The following services should be performed at the first maintenance service (I or II) after the indicated miles
(kilometers) shown for each item.
Additional Required Services

25,000 50,000 75,000 100,000 125,000 150,000
Service and Miles (Kilometers)
(40 000) (80 000) (120 000) (160 000) (200 000) (240 000)
Inspect fuel system for damage or leaks. • • • • • •
Inspect exhaust system for loose or
• • • • • •
damaged components.
Replace engine air cleaner filter. See
• • •
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 5-26.
Change automatic transmission fluid
(severe service only). Change filter • • •
(except 6-speed). See footnote (h).
Replace spark plugs. Inspect spark plug
wires (V6 only). An Emission Control •
Service.
Engine cooling system service (or every
five years, whichever occurs first).
•
An Emission Control Service.
See footnote (i).
Inspect engine accessory drive belt.
An Emission Control Service. •
See footnote (l).
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
6-6
Maintenance Footnotes (e) Make sure the safety belt reminder light and safety
belt assemblies are working properly. Look for any other
(a) Visually inspect brake lines and hoses for proper loose or damaged safety belt system parts. If you see
hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Inspect anything that might keep a safety belt system from doing
disc brake pads for wear and rotors for surface its job, have it repaired. Have any torn or frayed safety
condition. Inspect other brake parts, including calipers, belts replaced. Also see Checking the Restraint Systems
parking brake, etc. on page 1-73.
(b) Visually inspect front and rear suspension and (f) Lubricate all key lock cylinders, door hinges and
steering system for damaged, loose, or missing parts or latches, hood hinges and latches, and trunk lid hinges
signs of wear. Inspect electric power steering cables for and latches. More frequent lubrication may be required
proper hook-up, binding, cracks, chafing, etc. Inspect when exposed to a corrosive environment. Applying
hydraulic power steering lines and hoses for proper silicone grease on weatherstrips with a clean cloth will
hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. make them last longer, seal better, and not stick or
squeak.
(c) Visually inspect hoses and have them replaced if they
(g) Check system for interference or binding and for
are cracked, swollen, or deteriorated. Inspect all pipes,
damaged or missing parts. Replace parts as needed.
fittings and clamps; replace with genuine parts as
Replace any components that have high effort or
needed. To help ensure proper operation, a pressure test
excessive wear. Do not lubricate accelerator or cruise
of the cooling system and pressure cap and cleaning the
control cables.
outside of the radiator and air conditioning condenser is
recommended at least once a year. (h) Change automatic transmission fluid and filter
(except 6-speed) if the vehicle is mainly driven under
(d) Inspect wiper blades for wear, cracking, or
one or more of these conditions:
contamination. Clean the windshield and wiper blades,
if contaminated. Replace wiper blades that are worn − In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature
or damaged. See Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or higher.
on page 5-50 and Windshield and Wiper Blades on − In hilly or mountainous terrain.
page 5-95 for more information. − When doing frequent trailer towing.
− Uses such as found in taxi, police, or delivery
service.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
6-7
(i) Drain, flush, and refill cooling system. This service can At Each Fuel Fill
be complex; you should have your dealer/retailer perform
this service. See Engine Coolant on page 5-29 for what to It is important to perform these underhood checks at
use. Inspect hoses. Clean radiator, condenser, pressure each fuel fill.
cap, and filler neck. Pressure test the cooling system and
pressure cap. Engine Oil Level Check
(j) A fluid loss in any vehicle system could indicate a Notice: It is important to check the engine oil
problem. Have the system inspected and repaired and regularly and keep it at the proper level. Failure to
the fluid level checked. Add fluid if needed. keep the engine oil at the proper level can cause
(k) If driving regularly under dusty conditions, inspect damage to the engine not covered by the vehicle
the filter at each engine oil change. warranty.
(l) Visually inspect belt for fraying, excessive cracks, or Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil if
obvious damage. Replace belt if necessary. necessary. See Engine Oil on page 5-21.
Engine Coolant Level Check

Owner Checks and Services
Check the engine coolant level and add DEX-COOL®
These owner checks and services should be performed coolant mixture if necessary. See Engine Coolant
at the intervals specified to help ensure vehicle safety, on page 5-29.
dependability, and emission control performance. Your
dealer/retailer can assist with these checks and services. Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check
Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once. Check the windshield washer fluid level in the windshield
Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to the washer fluid reservoir and add the proper fluid if
vehicle, make sure they are the proper ones, as shown necessary.
in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
6-8
At Least Once a Month At Least Once a Year
Tire Inflation Check Starter Switch Check
Inspect the vehicle’s tires and make sure they are
inflated to the correct pressures. Do not forget to
check the spare tire. See Inflation - Tire Pressure on { CAUTION:
page 5-59. Check to make sure the spare tire is stored
securely. See Changing a Flat Tire on page 5-76. When you are doing this inspection, the vehicle
Tire Wear Inspection could move suddenly. If the vehicle moves, you or
others could be injured.
Tire rotation may be required for high mileage highway
drivers prior to the Engine Oil Life System service
notification. Check the tires for wear and, if necessary, 1. Before starting this check, be sure there is enough
rotate the tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on room around the vehicle.
page 5-66. 2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and the regular
brake. See Parking Brake on page 2-32.
Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be ready to
turn off the engine immediately if it starts.
3. Try to start the engine in each gear. The vehicle
should start only in P (Park) or N (Neutral). If the
vehicle starts in any other position, contact
your dealer/retailer for service.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
6-9
Automatic Transmission Shift Lock 3. With the engine off, turn the ignition to ON/RUN,
but do not start the engine. Without applying the
Control System Check regular brake, try to move the shift lever out
of P (Park) with normal effort. If the shift lever
moves out of P (Park), contact your dealer/retailer
{ CAUTION: for service.
Ignition Transmission Lock Check

When you are doing this inspection, the vehicle
could move suddenly. If the vehicle moves, you or While parked, and with the parking brake set, try to turn
others could be injured. the ignition to LOCK/OFF in each shift lever position.
• The ignition should turn to LOCK/OFF only
when the shift lever is in P (Park).
1. Before starting this check, be sure there is enough
room around the vehicle. It should be parked on a • The ignition key should come out only in
level surface. LOCK/OFF.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake. See Parking Brake Contact your dealer/retailer if service is required.
on page 2-32.
Be ready to apply the regular brake immediately if
the vehicle begins to move.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
6-10
Parking Brake and Automatic Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing downhill.
Keeping your foot on the regular brake, set the parking
Transmission P (Park) Mechanism brake.
Check • To check the parking brake’s holding ability: With the
engine running and the transmission in N (Neutral),
slowly remove foot pressure from the regular brake
{ CAUTION: pedal. Do this until the vehicle is held by the parking
brake only.
When you are doing this check, the vehicle could • To check the P (Park) mechanism’s holding ability:
begin to move. You or others could be injured and With the engine running, shift to P (Park). Then
property could be damaged. Make sure there is release the parking brake followed by the regular
room in front of the vehicle in case it begins to roll. brake.
Be ready to apply the regular brake at once Contact your dealer/retailer if service is required.
should the vehicle begin to move.
Underbody Flushing Service
At least every spring, use plain water to flush any
corrosive materials from the underbody. Take care to
clean thoroughly any areas where mud and other debris
can collect.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
6-11
Recommended Fluids and Usage Fluid/Lubricant
Lubricants Hydraulic
Power Steering
GM Power Steering Fluid
System (GM Part No. U.S. 89021184,
Fluids and lubricants identified below by name, part in Canada 89021186).
number, or specification can be obtained from your (if equipped)
dealer/retailer. Automatic DEXRON®-VI Automatic
Transmission Transmission Fluid.
Usage Fluid/Lubricant Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
Key Lock (GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,
Engine oil which meets GM Cylinders
in Canada 10953474).
Standard GM6094M and displays
the American Petroleum Institute Hood Latch
Certified for Gasoline Engines Assembly, Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol
Engine Oil Secondary (GM Part No. U.S. 12346293,
starburst symbol. To determine the
proper viscosity for your vehicle’s Latch, Pivots, in Canada 992723) or lubricant
engine, see Engine Oil on Spring meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
page 5-21. Anchor, and Category LB or GC-LB.
Release Pawl
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
Hood and Door Multi-Purpose
® Lubricant, Superlube
Engine Coolant water and use only DEX-COOL (GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,
Coolant. See Engine Coolant on Hinges
page 5-29. in Canada 109435474).
Weatherstrip Lubricant
Hydraulic Brake DOT
3 Hydraulic Brake Fluid
(GM Part No. U.S. 88862806, (GM Part No. U.S. 3634770,
System Weatherstrip in Canada 10953518) or
in Canada 88862807).
Conditioning Dielectric Silicone Grease
Windshield Optikleen® Washer Solvent. (GM Part No. U.S. 12345579,
Washer in Canada 992887).
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
6-12
Maintenance Replacement Parts
Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer/retailer.
Part Part Numbers ACDelco Part Numbers

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter 22676970 A1627C
Engine Oil Filter
2.4L L4 Engine 12605566 PF457G
3.5L V6 Engine 89017342 PF61
3.6L V6 Engine 89017524 PF48
Spark Plugs
2.4L L4 Engine 12625058 41-103
3.5L V6 Engine 12591131 41-100
3.6L V6 Engine 12597464 41-990
Wiper Blades
Driver Side – 23.6 in (60.0 cm) 25800624 —
Passenger Side – 21.0 in (53.0 cm) 25800623 —
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
6-13
Engine Drive Belt Routing
3.5L V6 Engine
2.4L I4 Engine
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
6-14
3.6L V6 Engine
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
6-15
Maintenance Record
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and the
type of services performed in the boxes provided. See Maintenance Requirements on page 6-2. Any additional
information from Owner Checks and Services on page 6-8 can be added on the following record pages. You should
retain all maintenance receipts.
Maintenance Record
Odometer Maintenance I or
Date Serviced By Services Performed
Reading Maintenance II
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
6-16
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
6-17
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
6-18
Section 7 Customer Assistance Information
Customer Assistance and Information ...............7-2 Reporting Safety Defects ................................7-15
Customer Satisfaction Procedure ......................7-2 Reporting Safety Defects to the
Online Owner Center ......................................7-5 United States Government ..........................7-15
Customer Assistance for Text Telephone Reporting Safety Defects to the
(TTY) Users ...............................................7-6 Canadian Government ................................7-16
Customer Assistance Offices ............................7-6 Reporting Safety Defects to
GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ................7-7 General Motors .........................................7-16
Roadside Assistance Program ..........................7-7 Service Publications Ordering Information .........7-16
Scheduling Service Appointments ....................7-10 Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy ................7-17
Courtesy Transportation .................................7-10 Event Data Recorders ...................................7-18
Collision Damage Repair ................................7-12 OnStar® ......................................................7-19
Navigation System ........................................7-19
Radio Frequency
Identification (RFID) ...................................7-19
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
7-1
Customer Assistance and STEP TWO: If after contacting a member of dealership
management, it appears your concern cannot be
Information resolved by the dealership without further help, in the
U.S., call the Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center
at 1-800-222-1020. In Canada, call General Motors
Customer Satisfaction Procedure of Canada Customer Communication Centre at
1-800-263-3777 (English), or 1-800-263-7854 (French).
Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to
your dealer and to Chevrolet. Normally, any concerns We encourage you to call the toll-free number in order to
with the sales transaction or the operation of the vehicle give your inquiry prompt attention. Have the following
will be resolved by the dealer’s sales or service information available to give the Customer Assistance
departments. Sometimes, however, despite the best Representative:
intentions of all concerned, misunderstandings can • Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). This is available
occur. If your concern has not been resolved to your
from the vehicle registration or title, or the plate at the
satisfaction, the following steps should be taken:
top left of the instrument panel and visible through
STEP ONE: Discuss your concern with a member of the windshield.
dealership management. Normally, concerns can • Dealership name and location.
be quickly resolved at that level. If the matter has
already been reviewed with the sales, service, or parts • Vehicle delivery date and present mileage.
manager, contact the owner of the dealership or the When contacting Chevrolet, remember that your
general manager. concern will likely be resolved at a dealer’s facility.
That is why we suggest following Step One first.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
7-2
STEP THREE — U.S. Owners: Both General Motors You may contact the BBB Auto Line Program using the
and your dealer are committed to making sure you are toll-free telephone number or write them at the following
completely satisfied with your new vehicle. However, if address:
you continue to remain unsatisfied after following the BBB Auto Line Program
procedure outlined in Steps One and Two, you can file Council of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.
with the Better Business Bureau (BBB) Auto Line 4200 Wilson Boulevard
Program to enforce your rights. Suite 800
The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of court program Arlington, VA 22203-1838
administered by the Council of Better Business Bureaus Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
to settle automotive disputes regarding vehicle repairs or dr.bbb.org/goauto
the interpretation of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. This program is available in all 50 states and the District
Although you may be required to resort to this informal of Columbia. Eligibility is limited by vehicle age, mileage,
dispute resolution program prior to filing a court action, and other factors. General Motors reserves the right to
use of the program is free of charge and your case will change eligibility limitations and/or discontinue its
generally be heard within 40 days. If you do not agree participation in this program.
with the decision given in your case, you may reject it and
proceed with any other venue for relief available to you.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
7-3
STEP THREE — Canadian Owners: In the event For further information concerning eligibility in the
that you do not feel your concerns have been addressed Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP), call
after following the procedure outlined in Steps 1 and 2, toll-free 1-800-207-0685, or call the General Motors
General Motors of Canada Limited wants you to be aware Customer Communication Centre, 1-800-263-3777
of its participation in a no-charge Mediation/Arbitration (English), 1-800-263-7854 (French), or write to:
Program. General Motors of Canada Limited has The Mediation/Arbitration Program
committed to binding arbitration of owner disputes c/o Customer Communication Centre
involving factory-related vehicle service claims. The General Motors of Canada Limited
program provides for the review of the facts involved by Mail Code: CA1-163-005
an impartial third party arbiter, and may include an 1908 Colonel Sam Drive
informal hearing before the arbiter. The program is Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
designed so that the entire dispute settlement process,
from the time you file your complaint to the final decision, Your inquiry should be accompanied by the Vehicle
should be completed in about 70 days. We believe our Identification Number (VIN).
impartial program offers advantages over courts in most
jurisdictions because it is informal, quick, and free of
charge.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
7-4
Online Owner Center My GM Canada (Canada) — www.gm.ca
My GM Canada is a password-protected section of
Online Owner Center (U.S.) — www.gm.ca where you can save information on GM
www.gmownercenter.com/chevrolet vehicles, get personalized offers, and use handy tools
and forms with greater ease.
Information and services customized for your specific
vehicle — all in one convenient place. Here are a few of the valuable tools and services you
will have access to:
• Digital owner manual, warranty information,
and more • My Showroom: Find and save information on
vehicles and current offers in your area.
• Online service and maintenance records
• My Dealers/Retailers: Save details such as address
• Find Chevrolet dealers for service nationwide and phone number for each of your preferred GM
• Exclusive privileges and offers dealers/retailers.
• Recall notices for your specific vehicle • My Driveway: Access quick links to parts and
service estimates, check trade-in values, or
• ®
OnStar and GM Cardmember Services Earnings schedule a service appointment by adding the
summaries vehicles you own to your driveway profile.
Other Helpful Links: • My Preferences: Manage your profile and use tools
Chevrolet — www.chevrolet.com and forms with greater ease.
Chevrolet Merchandise — www.chevymall.com To sign up, visit the My GM Canada section within
www.gm.ca.
Help Center — www.chevrolet.com/helpcenter
• FAQ
• Contact Us
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
7-5
Customer Assistance for Text From Puerto Rico:
1-800-496-9992 (English)
Telephone (TTY) Users 1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)
To assist customers who are deaf, hard of hearing, or From U.S. Virgin Islands:
speech-impaired and who use Text Telephones (TTYs), 1-800-496-9994
Chevrolet has TTY equipment available at its Customer Canada — Customer Assistance
Assistance Center. Any TTY user in the U.S. can
communicate with Chevrolet by dialing: 1-800-833-CHEV General Motors of Canada Limited
(2438). (TTY users in Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.) Customer Communication Centre, CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Customer Assistance Offices gmcanada.com
Chevrolet encourages customers to call the toll-free 1-800-263-3777 (English)
number for assistance. However, if a customer wishes 1-800-263-7854 (French)
to write or e-mail Chevrolet, the letter should be 1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
addressed to: Roadside Assistance: 1-800-268-6800
United States — Customer Assistance Overseas — Customer Assistance

Chevrolet Motor Division Please contact the local General Motors Business Unit.
Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33170
Detroit, MI 48232-5170
Chevrolet.com
1-800-222-1020
1-800-833-2438 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-CHEV-USA (243-8872)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
7-6
Mexico, Central America and Caribbean The offer is available for a very limited period of time
from the date of vehicle purchase/lease. For more
Islands/Countries (Except Puerto Rico details, or to determine your vehicle’s eligibility, visit
and U.S. Virgin Islands) — Customer gmmobility.com or call the GM Mobility Assistance
Assistance Center at 1-800-323-9935. Text telephone (TTY) users,
call 1-800-833-9935.
General Motors de Mexico, S. de R.L. de C.V. General Motors of Canada also has a Mobility Program.
Customer Assistance Center
Call 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) for details. TTY users
Paseo de la Reforma # 2740
Col. Lomas de Bezares call 1-800-263-3830.
C.P. 11910, Mexico, D.F.
01-800-508-0000 Roadside Assistance Program
Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0 800
For U.S. purchased vehicles, call 1-800-CHEV-USA
GM Mobility Reimbursement (1-800-243-8872); (Text telephone (TTY):
1-888-889-2438).
Program For Canadian purchased vehicles, call 1-800-268-6800.
Service is available 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.
This program, available to qualified applicants, can

reimburse you up to $1,000 of the cost of eligible
aftermarket adaptive equipment required for your vehicle,
such as hand controls or a wheelchair/scooter lift.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
7-7
Calling for Assistance Coverage
When calling Roadside Assistance, have the following Services are provided up to 5 years/100,000 miles
information ready: (160 000 km), whichever comes first.
• Your name, home address, and home telephone In the U.S., anyone driving the vehicle is covered.
number In Canada, a person driving the vehicle without
permission from the owner is not covered.
• Telephone number of your location
Roadside Assistance is not a part of the New Vehicle
• Location of the vehicle Limited Warranty. Chevrolet and General Motors of
• Model, year, color, and license plate number of the Canada Limited reserve the right to make any changes
vehicle or discontinue the Roadside Assistance program at
any time without notification.
• Odometer reading, Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN), and delivery date of the vehicle Chevrolet and General Motors of Canada Limited reserve
the right to limit services or payment to an owner or driver
• Description of the problem if they decide the claims are made too often, or the same
type of claim is made many times.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
7-8
Services Provided Services Not Included in Roadside
• Emergency Fuel Delivery: Delivery of enough fuel Assistance
for the vehicle to get to the nearest service station. • Impound towing caused by violation of any laws.
• Lock-Out Service: Service is provided to unlock the • Legal fines.
vehicle if you are locked out. A remote unlock may be
available if you have OnStar®. For security reasons, • Mounting, dismounting or changing of snow tires,
the driver must present identification before this chains, or other traction devices.
service is given. • Towing or services for vehicles driven on a
• Emergency Tow From a Public Road or Highway: non-public road or highway.
Tow to the nearest Chevrolet dealer for warranty
service, or if the vehicle was in a crash and cannot Services Specific to Canadian
be driven. Assistance is also given when the vehicle Purchased Vehicles
is stuck in the sand, mud, or snow.
• Fuel delivery: Reimbursement is approximately
• Flat Tire Change: Service is provided to change a $5 Canadian. Diesel fuel delivery may be restricted.
flat tire with the spare tire. The spare tire, if equipped, Propane and other fuels are not provided through
must be in good condition and properly inflated. this service.
It is the owner’s responsibility for the repair or
replacement of the tire if it is not covered by the • Lock-Out Service: Vehicle registration is required.
warranty. • Trip Routing Service: Detailed maps of North
• Battery Jump Start: Service is provided to jump America are provided when requested either with the
start a dead battery. most direct route or the most scenic route. There
is a limit of six requests per year. Additional travel
• Trip Interruption Benefits and Assistance: If your information is also available. Allow three weeks for
trip is interrupted due to a warranty failure, incidental delivery.
expenses may be reimbursed during the 5 years/
100,000 miles (160 000 km) Powertrain warranty
period. Items considered are hotel, meals, and
rental car.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
7-9
• Trip Interruption Benefits and Assistance: Must Scheduling Service Appointments
be over 250 kilometres from where your trip was
started to qualify. General Motors of Canada Limited When your vehicle requires warranty service, contact
requires pre-authorization, original detailed receipts, your dealer/retailer and request an appointment. By
and a copy of the repair orders. Once authorization scheduling a service appointment and advising your
has been received, the Roadside Assistance advisor service consultant of your transportation needs, your
will help you make arrangements and explain how to dealer/retailer can help minimize your inconvenience.
receive payment. If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into the service
• Alternative Service: If assistance cannot be department immediately, keep driving it until it can be
provided right away, the Roadside Assistance scheduled for service, unless, of course, the problem is
advisor may give you permission to get local safety-related. If it is, please call your dealership/retailer,
emergency road service. You will receive payment, let them know this, and ask for instructions.
up to $100, after sending the original receipt to If the dealer/retailer requests you to bring the vehicle for
Roadside Assistance. Mechanical failures may be service, you are urged to do so as early in the work day
covered, however any cost for parts and labor for as possible to allow for the same day repair.
repairs not covered by the warranty are the owner
responsibility.
Courtesy Transportation
To enhance your ownership experience, we and our
participating dealers are proud to offer Courtesy
Transportation, a customer support program for vehicles
with the Bumper to Bumper (Base Warranty Coverage
period in Canada) and extended powertrain, and hybrid
specific warranty in both the U.S. and Canada.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
7-10
Several courtesy transportation options are available to Public Transportation or Fuel
assist in reducing your inconvenience when warranty Reimbursement
repairs are required.
If your vehicle requires overnight warranty repairs, and
Courtesy Transportation is not a part of the New Vehicle public transportation is used instead of the dealer’s
Limited Warranty. A separate booklet entitled “Warranty shuttle service, the expense must be supported by
and Owner Assistance Information” furnished with original receipts and can only be up to the maximum
each new vehicle provides detailed warranty coverage amount allowed by GM for shuttle service. In addition,
information. for U.S. customers, should you arrange transportation
Transportation Options through a friend or relative, limited reimbursement for
reasonable fuel expenses may be available. Claim
Warranty service can generally be completed while you amounts should reflect actual costs and be supported
wait. However, if you are unable to wait, GM helps to by original receipts. See your dealer for information
minimize your inconvenience by providing several regarding the allowance amounts for reimbursement
transportation options. Depending on the circumstances, of fuel or other transportation costs.
your dealer can offer you one of the following:
Shuttle Service
Shuttle service is the preferred means of offering
Courtesy Transportation. Dealers may provide you
with shuttle service to get you to your destination with
minimal interruption of your daily schedule. This includes
one-way or round trip shuttle service within reasonable
time and distance parameters of the dealer’s area.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
7-11
Courtesy Rental Vehicle Collision Damage Repair
Your dealer may arrange to provide you with a courtesy If your vehicle is involved in a collision and it is damaged,
rental vehicle or reimburse you for a rental vehicle that have the damage repaired by a qualified technician
you obtain if your vehicle is kept for an overnight warranty using the proper equipment and quality replacement
repair. Rental reimbursement will be limited and must be parts. Poorly performed collision repairs diminish your
supported by original receipts. This requires that you vehicle’s resale value, and safety performance can be
sign and complete a rental agreement and meet state/ compromised in subsequent collisions.
provincial, local, and rental vehicle provider requirements.
Requirements vary and may include minimum age Collision Parts
requirements, insurance coverage, credit card, etc.
You are responsible for fuel usage charges and may Genuine GM Collision parts are new parts made with the
also be responsible for taxes, levies, usage fees, same materials and construction methods as the parts
excessive mileage, or rental usage beyond the with which your vehicle was originally built. Genuine GM
completion of the repair. Collision parts are your best choice to ensure that your
vehicle’s designed appearance, durability, and safety
It may not be possible to provide a like-vehicle as a are preserved. The use of Genuine GM parts can help
courtesy rental. maintain your GM New Vehicle Warranty.
Additional Program Information Recycled original equipment parts may also be used for
repair. These parts are typically removed from vehicles
All program options, such as shuttle service, may not be that were total losses in prior crashes. In most cases, the
available at every dealer. Please contact your dealer parts being recycled are from undamaged sections of the
for specific information about availability. All Courtesy vehicle. A recycled original equipment GM part, may be
Transportation arrangements will be administered by an acceptable choice to maintain your vehicle’s originally
appropriate dealer personnel. designed appearance and safety performance, however,
General Motors reserves the right to unilaterally modify, the history of these parts is not known. Such parts are not
change or discontinue Courtesy Transportation at any covered by your GM New Vehicle Limited Warranty, and
time and to resolve all questions of claim eligibility any related failures are not covered by that warranty.
pursuant to the terms and conditions described herein
at its sole discretion.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
7-12
Aftermarket collision parts are also available. These are Insuring Your Vehicle
made by companies other than GM and may not have
been tested for your vehicle. As a result, these parts may Protect your investment in your GM vehicle with
fit poorly, exhibit premature durability/corrosion problems, comprehensive and collision insurance coverage.
and may not perform properly in subsequent collisions. There are significant differences in the quality of
Aftermarket parts are not covered by your GM New coverage afforded by various insurance policy terms.
Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any vehicle failure related Many insurance policies provide reduced protection to
to such parts are not covered by that warranty. your GM vehicle by limiting compensation for damage
repairs by using aftermarket collision parts. Some
Repair Facility insurance companies will not specify aftermarket collision
parts. When purchasing insurance, we recommend that
We recommend that you choose a collision repair facility you assure your vehicle will be repaired with GM original
that meets your needs before you ever need collision equipment collision parts. If such insurance coverage is
repairs. Your dealer/retailer may have a collision repair not available from your current insurance carrier,
center with GM-trained technicians and state of the art consider switching to another insurance carrier.
equipment, or be able to recommend a collision repair
center that has GM-trained technicians and comparable If your vehicle is leased, the leasing company may
equipment. require you to have insurance that assures repairs with
Genuine GM Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM)
parts or Genuine Manufacturer replacement parts. Read
your lease carefully, as you may be charged at the
end of your lease for poor quality repairs.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
7-13
If a Crash Occurs • Gather the important information you will need from
the other driver. Things like name, address, phone
Here is what to do if you are involved in a crash. number, driver’s license number, vehicle license
• Check to make sure that you are all right. If you plate, vehicle make, model and model year, Vehicle
are uninjured, make sure that no one else in your Identification Number (VIN), insurance company and
vehicle, or the other vehicle, is injured. policy number, and a general description of the
damage to the other vehicle.
• If there has been an injury, call emergency services
for help. Do not leave the scene of a crash until all • If possible, call your insurance company from
matters have been taken care of. Move your vehicle the scene of the crash. They will walk you through
only if its position puts you in danger or you are the information they will need. If they ask for a
instructed to move it by a police officer. police report, phone or go to the police department
headquarters the next day and you can get a copy of
• Give only the necessary and requested information the report for a nominal fee. In some states/provinces
to police and other parties involved in the crash. with “no fault” insurance laws, a report may not be
Do not discuss your personal condition, mental frame necessary. This is especially true if there are no
of mind, or anything unrelated to the crash. This will injuries and both vehicles are driveable.
help guard against post-crash legal action.
• Choose a reputable collision repair facility for your
• If you need roadside assistance, call GM Roadside vehicle. Whether you select a dealer/retailer or a
Assistance. See Roadside Assistance Program on private collision repair facility to fix the damage,
page 7-7 for more information. make sure you are comfortable with them.
• If your vehicle cannot be driven, know where the Remember, you will have to feel comfortable
towing service will be taking it. Get a card from the with their work for a long time.
tow truck operator or write down the driver’s name, • Once you have an estimate, read it carefully and
the service’s name, and the phone number. make sure you understand what work will be
• Remove any valuables from your vehicle before it is performed on your vehicle. If you have a question,
towed away. Make sure this includes your insurance ask for an explanation. Reputable shops welcome
information and registration if you keep these items this opportunity.
in your vehicle.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
7-14
Managing the Vehicle Damage Repair Reporting Safety Defects
Process
In the event that your vehicle requires damage repairs, Reporting Safety Defects to the
GM recommends that you take an active role in its repair.
If you have a pre-determined repair facility of choice, take
United States Government
your vehicle there, or have it towed there. Specify to the If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which
facility that any required replacement collision parts be could cause a crash or could cause injury or
original equipment parts, either new Genuine GM parts or death, you should immediately inform the National
recycled original GM parts. Remember, recycled parts Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA)
will not be covered by your GM vehicle warranty. in addition to notifying General Motors.
Insurance pays the bill for the repair, but you must If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open
live with the repair. Depending on your policy limits, an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect
your insurance company may initially value the repair exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall
using aftermarket parts. Discuss this with your repair and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot
professional, and insist on Genuine GM parts. Remember become involved in individual problems between
if your vehicle is leased you may be obligated to have the you, your dealer/retailer, or General Motors.
vehicle repaired with Genuine GM parts, even if your
insurance coverage does not pay the full cost. To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY:
If another party’s insurance company is paying for the 1-800-424-9153); go to safercar.gov; or write to:
repairs, you are not obligated to accept a repair valuation
based on that insurance company’s collision policy Administrator, NHTSA
repair limits, as you have no contractual limits with that 1200 New Jersey Avenue, S.E.
company. In such cases, you can have control of the Washington D.C., 20590
repair and parts choices as long as cost stays within You can also obtain other information about motor
reasonable limits. vehicle safety from safercar.gov.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
7-15
Reporting Safety Defects to the Service Publications Ordering
Canadian Government Information
If you live in Canada, and you believe that your
vehicle has a safety defect, notify Transport Canada Service Manuals
immediately, in addition to notifying General Motors of Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair
Canada Limited. Call them at 1-800-333-0510 or write to: information on engines, transmission, axle suspension,
Transport Canada brakes, electrical, steering, body, etc.
Road Safety Branch
2780 Sheffield Road Service Bulletins
Ottawa, Ontario K1B 3V9 Service Bulletins give additional technical service
information needed to knowledgeably service
Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors cars and trucks. Each bulletin
contains instructions to assist in the diagnosis and
General Motors service of your vehicle.
In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada) in
a situation like this, please notify General Motors. Owner Information
Call 1-800-222-1020, or write: Owner publications are written specifically for owners
Chevrolet Motor Division and intended to provide basic operational information
Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center about the vehicle. The owner manual includes the
P.O. Box 33170 Maintenance Schedule for all models.
Detroit, MI 48232-5170 In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner Manual, and
In Canada, call 1-800-263-3777 (English) or Warranty Booklet.
1-800-263-7854 (French), or write: RETAIL SELL PRICE: $35.00 (U.S.) plus processing fee
General Motors of Canada Limited
Without Portfolio: Owner Manual only.
Customer Communication Centre, CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive RETAIL SELL PRICE: $25.00 (U.S.) plus processing fee
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
7-16
Current and Past Model Order Forms Vehicle Data Recording and
Technical Service Bulletins and Manuals are available for Privacy
current and past model GM vehicles. To request an order
form, specify year and model name of the vehicle. Your GM vehicle has a number of sophisticated
computers that record information about the vehicle’s
ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123 performance and how it is driven. For example, your
Monday-Friday 8:00 AM - 6:00 PM vehicle uses computer modules to monitor and control
Eastern Time engine and transmission performance, to monitor the
conditions for airbag deployment and deploy airbags in a
For Credit Card Orders Only crash and, if so equipped, to provide antilock braking to
(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit Helm, Inc. help the driver control the vehicle. These modules may
on the World Wide Web at: helminc.com store data to help your dealer/retailer technician service
Or you can write to: your vehicle. Some modules may also store data about
how you operate the vehicle, such as rate of fuel
Helm, Incorporated
consumption or average speed. These modules may also
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207 retain the owner’s personal preferences, such as radio
pre-sets, seat positions, and temperature settings.
Prices are subject to change without notice and without
incurring obligation. Allow ample time for delivery.
Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices are
quoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents are to make
checks payable in U.S. funds.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
7-17
Event Data Recorders Important: EDR data is recorded by your vehicle only
if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data is recorded
This vehicle has an Event Data Recorder (EDR). by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no
The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash
crash or near crash-like situations, such as an airbag location) is recorded. However, other parties, such as law
deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type
in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a
The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle crash investigation.
dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment
typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is
designed to record such data as: needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special
equipment, can read the information if they have access
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts to the vehicle or the EDR.
were buckled/fastened
GM will not access this data or share it with others
• How far, if at all, the driver was pressing the except: with the consent of the vehicle owner or, if the
accelerator and/or brake pedal vehicle is leased, with the consent of the lessee; in
• How fast the vehicle was traveling response to an official request of police or similar
government office; as part of GM’s defense of litigation
This data can help provide a better understanding of the through the discovery process; or, as required by law.
circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur. Data that GM collects or receives may also be used for
GM research needs or may be made available to others
for research purposes, where a need is shown and the
data is not tied to a specific vehicle or vehicle owner.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
7-18
OnStar® Radio Frequency
If your vehicle has OnStar and you subscribe to the Identification (RFID)
OnStar services, please refer to the OnStar Terms and
Conditions for information on data collection and use. RFID technology is used in some vehicles for functions
See also OnStar® System on page 2-40 in this manual such as tire pressure monitoring and ignition system
for more information. security, as well as in connection with conveniences
such as key fobs for remote door locking/unlocking and
starting, and in-vehicle transmitters for garage door
Navigation System openers. RFID technology in GM vehicles does not use
or record personal information or link with any other
If your vehicle has a navigation system, use of the GM system containing personal information.
system may result in the storage of destinations,
addresses, telephone numbers, and other trip
information. Refer to the navigation system operating
manual for information on stored data and for deletion
instructions.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
7-19
✍ NOTES
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
7-20
A Antenna
Backglass ................................................... 3-92
Accessories and Modifications ............................ 5-3 Antenna, XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna
Accessory Power ............................................ 2-23 System ...................................................... 3-92
Accessory Power Outlets ................................. 3-18 Antilock Brake System (ABS) ............................. 4-5
Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped Warning Light ............................................. 3-35
Vehicle ....................................................... 1-72 Appearance Care
Additional Required Services, Scheduled Aluminum Wheels ........................................ 5-95
Maintenance ................................................. 6-6 Care of Safety Belts .................................... 5-93
Additives, Fuel ................................................. 5-7 Chemical Paint Spotting ............................... 5-97
Add-On Electrical Equipment ............................ 5-98 Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses .................... 5-94
Adjustment Fabric/Carpet .............................................. 5-91
Chime Level ............................................... 3-92 Finish Care ................................................. 5-94
Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine ................................. 5-26 Finish Damage ............................................ 5-96
Air Conditioning .............................................. 3-20 Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other
Airbag Plastic Surfaces ....................................... 5-92
Readiness Light .......................................... 3-31 Interior Cleaning .......................................... 5-90
Airbag System ................................................ 1-58 Leather ...................................................... 5-92
Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped Sheet Metal Damage ................................... 5-96
Vehicle ................................................... 1-72 Tires .......................................................... 5-96
How Does an Airbag Restrain? ...................... 1-64 Underbody Maintenance ............................... 5-97
Passenger Sensing System ........................... 1-66 Washing Your Vehicle ................................... 5-93
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .......... 1-71 Weatherstrips .............................................. 5-93
What Makes an Airbag Inflate? ...................... 1-64 Windshield and Wiper Blades ........................ 5-95
What Will You See After an Airbag Inflates? ........ 1-64 Assistance Program, Roadside ........................... 7-7
When Should an Airbag Inflate? .................... 1-63 Audio System ................................................. 3-56
Where Are the Airbags? ............................... 1-60 Audio Steering Wheel Controls ...................... 3-89
Airbags Setting the Clock ......................................... 3-57
Passenger Status Indicator ........................... 3-32 XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ............ 3-92
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
1
Audio System(s) ............................................. 3-59 Break-In, New Vehicle ..................................... 2-21
Audio Systems Bulb Replacement ........................................... 5-50
Radio Reception .......................................... 3-91 Fog Lamp .................................................. 3-15
Theft-Deterrent Feature ................................ 3-89 Halogen Bulbs ............................................ 5-47
Automatic Climate Control System ..................... 3-24 Headlamp Aiming ........................................ 5-47
Automatic Headlamp System ............................ 3-15 Headlamps ................................................. 5-47
Automatic Transmission License Plate Lamps .................................... 5-49
Fluid .......................................................... 5-28 Taillamps, Turn Signal, and Stoplamps ............ 5-48
Operation ........................................... 2-26, 2-28 Buying New Tires ........................................... 5-68
B C
Backglass Antenna .......................................... 3-92 Calibration ..................................................... 2-38
Battery .......................................................... 5-42 California
Electric Power Management .......................... 3-17 Perchlorate Materials Requirements ................. 5-4
Run-Down Protection ................................... 3-18 California Fuel .................................................. 5-6
Belt Routing, Engine ....................................... 6-14 California Proposition 65 Warning ....................... 5-4
Bluetooth® ..................................................... 3-78 Canadian Owners ................................................ ii
Brake Capacities and Specifications .......................... 5-108
Emergencies ................................................ 4-6 Carbon Monoxide
Brake Fluid .................................................... 5-39 Engine Exhaust ........................................... 2-35
Brakes .......................................................... 5-39 Trunk ......................................................... 2-12
Antilock ....................................................... 4-5 Winter Driving ............................................. 4-17
Parking ...................................................... 2-32 Care of
System Warning Light .................................. 3-34 Safety Belts ................................................ 5-93
Braking ........................................................... 4-4 CD, MP3 ....................................................... 3-71
Braking in Emergencies ..................................... 4-6 Center Console Storage ................................... 2-50
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
2
Chains, Tire ................................................... 5-74 Cleaning (cont.)
Charging System Light .................................... 3-33 Underbody Maintenance ............................... 5-97
Check Washing Your Vehicle ................................... 5-93
Engine Lamp .............................................. 3-38 Weatherstrips .............................................. 5-93
Checking Things Under the Hood ...................... 5-14 Windshield and Wiper Blades ........................ 5-95
Chemical Paint Spotting ................................... 5-97 Climate Control System ................................... 3-20
Child Restraints Outlet Adjustment ........................................ 3-27
Infants and Young Children ........................... 1-35 Climate Control Systems
Lower Anchors and Tethers for Automatic ................................................... 3-24
Children .................................................. 1-44 Clock, Setting ................................................. 3-57
Older Children ............................................. 1-32 Collision Damage Repair .................................. 7-12
Securing a Child Restraint in a Compact Spare Tire ........................................ 5-89
Rear Seat Position ................................... 1-52 Compass ....................................................... 2-38
Securing a Child Restraint in the Content Theft-Deterrent .................................... 2-18
Right Front Seat Position .......................... 1-54 Control of a Vehicle .......................................... 4-4
Systems ..................................................... 1-39 Convenience Net ............................................ 2-51
Where to Put the Restraint ........................... 1-42 Coolant
Chime Level Adjustment .................................. 3-92 Engine ....................................................... 5-29
Cleaning Engine Temperature Gage ............................ 3-37
Aluminum Wheels ........................................ 5-95 Engine Temperature Warning Light ................. 3-36
Exterior Lamps/Lenses ................................. 5-94 Surge Tank Pressure Cap ............................. 5-33
Fabric/Carpet .............................................. 5-91 Cooling System .............................................. 5-28
Finish Care ................................................. 5-94 Courtesy Transportation ................................... 7-10
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other Cruise Control ................................................ 3-10
Plastic Surfaces ....................................... 5-92 Cruise Control Light ........................................ 3-42
Interior ....................................................... 5-90 Cupholders .................................................... 2-50
Leather ...................................................... 5-92
Tires .......................................................... 5-96
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3
Customer Assistance ......................................... 7-6 Driver Information Center (DIC) ......................... 3-43
Offices ......................................................... 7-6 DIC Operation and Displays .......................... 3-44
Text Telephone (TTY) Users ........................... 7-6 DIC Vehicle Personalization .......................... 3-50
Customer Information DIC Warnings and Messages ........................ 3-46
Service Publications Ordering Information ........ 7-16 Driver Storage Compartment ............................ 2-51
Customer Satisfaction Procedure ........................ 7-2 Driving
At Night ..................................................... 4-13
Before a Long Trip ...................................... 4-15
D Defensive ..................................................... 4-2
Drunk .......................................................... 4-3
Damage Repair, Collision ................................. 7-12
Highway Hypnosis ....................................... 4-15
Data Recorders
Hill and Mountain Roads .............................. 4-16
Event ......................................................... 7-18
In Rain and on Wet Roads ........................... 4-14
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) ......................... 3-14
Loss of Control ........................................... 4-12
Defensive Driving ............................................. 4-2
Off-Road Recovery ...................................... 4-11
Delayed Headlamps ........................................ 3-14
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out ................. 4-20
Delayed Locking ............................................. 2-11
Winter ........................................................ 4-17
Disc, MP3 ...................................................... 3-71
Driving for Better Fuel Economy ......................... 4-2
Doing Your Own Service Work ........................... 5-4
Dome Lamps ................................................. 3-16
Door
Ajar Reminder ............................................. 2-11 E
Delayed Locking .......................................... 2-11 E85 Fuel ......................................................... 5-8
Locks ........................................................ 2-10 EDR ............................................................. 7-17
Power Door Locks ....................................... 2-10 Electrical Equipment
Programmable Automatic Door Locks ............. 2-11 Add-On Equipment ...................................... 5-98
Rear Door Security Locks ............................. 2-12
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
4
Electrical System Engine (cont.)
Engine Compartment Fuse Block ................. 5-102 Overheated Protection Operating Mode ........... 5-36
Fuses ........................................................ 5-99 Overheating ................................................ 5-34
Instrument Panel Fuse Block ......................... 5-99 Starting ...................................................... 2-24
Power Windows and Other Power Options ...... 5-98 Entry/Exit Lighting ........................................... 3-16
Rear Compartment Fuse Block .................... 5-105 Event Data Recorders ..................................... 7-18
Windshield Wiper Fuses ............................... 5-98 Extender, Safety Belt ....................................... 1-32
Electronic Immobilizer
PASS-Key® III+ ........................................... 2-19
Electronic Immobilizer Operation
PASS-Key® III+ ........................................... 2-20
F
Filter
Electronic Stability Control ................................. 4-6
Engine Air Cleaner ...................................... 5-26
Electronic Stability Control Indicator Light ........... 3-35
Finish Damage ............................................... 5-96
Engine
Flashers, Hazard Warning .................................. 3-6
Air Cleaner/Filter ......................................... 5-26
Flash-to-Pass ................................................... 3-8
Check and Service Engine Soon Lamp ........... 3-38
Flat Tire ........................................................ 5-75
Compartment Overview ................................ 5-16
Flat Tire, Changing ......................................... 5-76
Coolant ...................................................... 5-29
Flat Tire, Storing ............................................. 5-85
Coolant Heater ............................................ 2-25
Fluid
Coolant Temperature Gage ........................... 3-37
Automatic Transmission ................................ 5-28
Coolant Temperature Warning Light ................ 3-36
Power Steering ........................................... 5-36
Cooling System ........................................... 5-28
Windshield Washer ...................................... 5-38
Drive Belt Routing ....................................... 6-14
Fog Lamp
Exhaust ..................................................... 2-35
Fog ........................................................... 3-15
Oil ............................................................. 5-21
Folding Rear Seat ........................................... 1-10
Oil Life System ........................................... 5-24
Front Storage Area ......................................... 2-50
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5
Fuel ............................................................... 5-5 Garage Door Opener ....................................... 2-43
Additives ...................................................... 5-7 Gasoline
California Fuel .............................................. 5-6 Octane ........................................................ 5-6
E85 (85% Ethanol) ........................................ 5-8 Specifications ............................................... 5-6
Economy Driving ........................................... 4-2 Glove Box ..................................................... 2-50
Filling a Portable Fuel Container .................... 5-13 GM Mobility Reimbursement Program .................. 7-7
Filling the Tank ........................................... 5-10
Fuels in Foreign Countries ............................ 5-10
Gage ......................................................... 3-42
Gasoline Octane ........................................... 5-6
H
Halogen Bulbs ................................................ 5-47
Gasoline Specifications .................................. 5-6
Hazard Warning Flashers ................................... 3-6
Fuses ........................................................... 5-99
Head Restraints ............................................... 1-2
Engine Compartment Fuse Block ................. 5-102
Headlamp
Instrument Panel Fuse Block ......................... 5-99
Aiming ....................................................... 5-47
Rear Compartment Fuse Block .................... 5-105
Headlamps .................................................... 3-13
Windshield Wiper ......................................... 5-98
Bulb Replacement ....................................... 5-47
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) ..................... 3-14
Delayed ..................................................... 3-14
G Flash-to-Pass ............................................... 3-8
Gage High/Low Beam Changer ................................ 3-8
Speedometer .............................................. 3-30 On Reminder .............................................. 3-14
Tachometer ................................................. 3-30 Headlamps Off in Park .................................... 3-14
Gages Heated Seats ................................................... 1-5
Engine Coolant Temperature ......................... 3-37 Heater ........................................................... 3-20
Fuel .......................................................... 3-42 Engine Coolant ........................................... 2-25
Trip Odometer ............................................. 3-30 Highbeam On Light ......................................... 3-42
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
6
High-Speed Operation, Tires ............................. 5-60
Highway Hypnosis ........................................... 4-15 K
Hill and Mountain Roads .................................. 4-16 Keyless Entry, Remote Operation ........................ 2-5
Hood Keyless Entry System ....................................... 2-4
Checking Things Under ................................ 5-14 Keys ............................................................... 2-3
Release ..................................................... 5-14
Horn ............................................................... 3-6
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ................... 1-17 L
Labeling, Tire Sidewall ..................................... 5-53
Lamp
I Malfunction Indicator .................................... 3-38
Ignition Positions ............................................. 2-22 Lamps
Infants and Young Children, Restraints ............... 1-35 Daytime Running (DRL) ................................ 3-14
Inflation - Tire Pressure ................................... 5-59 Dome ........................................................ 3-16
Instrument Panel License Plate .............................................. 5-49
Brightness .................................................. 3-16 Reading ..................................................... 3-16
Cluster ....................................................... 3-29 Lap-Shoulder Belt ........................................... 1-26
Overview ..................................................... 3-4 LATCH System for Child Restraints ................... 1-44
Storage Area .............................................. 2-50 Latches, Seatback ............................................ 1-8
Introduction ...................................................... 6-2 Lift Seat, Power ............................................... 1-9
Lighting
Entry/Exit ................................................... 3-16
J Parade Dimming .......................................... 3-16
Jump Starting ................................................. 5-43
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
7
Lights ............................................................ 3-13
Airbag Readiness ........................................ 3-31 M
Antilock Brake System (ABS) Warning ............ 3-35 Maintenance
Brake System Warning ................................. 3-34 Footnotes ..................................................... 6-7
Charging System ......................................... 3-33 Maintenance Schedule
Cruise Control ............................................. 3-42 Additional Required Services ........................... 6-6
Engine Coolant Temperature Warning ............. 3-36 At Each Fuel Fill ........................................... 6-8
Flash-to-Pass ............................................... 3-8 At Least Once a Month .................................. 6-9
Highbeam On ............................................. 3-42 At Least Once a Year .................................... 6-9
High/Low Beam Changer ................................ 3-8 Maintenance Record .................................... 6-16
Oil Pressure ............................................... 3-41 Maintenance Replacement Parts .................... 6-13
On Reminder .............................................. 3-14 Maintenance Requirements ............................. 6-2
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator .................. 3-32 Owner Checks and Services ........................... 6-8
Safety Belt Reminders .................................. 3-30 Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ............. 6-12
Security ..................................................... 3-41 Scheduled Maintenance ................................. 6-4
Tire Pressure .............................................. 3-37 Using .......................................................... 6-2
Loading Your Vehicle ....................................... 4-20 Your Vehicle and the Environment ................... 6-2
Locks Malfunction Indicator Lamp ............................... 3-38
Delayed Locking .......................................... 2-11 Manual Lumbar Controls .................................... 1-4
Door .......................................................... 2-10 Manual Seats ................................................... 1-3
Lockout Protection ....................................... 2-12 Message
Power Door ................................................ 2-10 DIC Warnings and Messages ........................ 3-46
Programmable Automatic Door Locks ............. 2-11 Mirrors
Rear Door Security Locks ............................. 2-12 Automatic Dimming Rearview ........................ 2-37
Loss of Control ............................................... 4-12 Manual Rearview Mirror ................................ 2-37
Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children ............. 1-44 Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror ................. 2-39
Lumbar Outside Heated Mirrors ................................ 2-40
Manual Controls ............................................ 1-4 Outside Power Mirrors .................................. 2-39
MP3 ............................................................. 3-71
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
8
N Overheated Engine Protection
Operating Mode .......................................... 5-36
Navigation System, Privacy .............................. 7-19 Owner Checks and Services .............................. 6-8
Net Owners, Canadian ............................................... ii
Convenience ............................................... 2-51
New Vehicle Break-In ...................................... 2-21
P
O Paint, Damage ............................................... 5-96
Parade Dimming ............................................. 3-16
Odometer ...................................................... 3-30
Odometer, Trip ............................................... 3-30 Park
Off-Road Headlamps Off in Park ................................. 3-14
Recovery .................................................... 4-11 Shifting Into ................................................ 2-33
Oil Shifting Out of ............................................ 2-34
Engine ....................................................... 5-21 Parking
Engine Oil Life System ................................. 5-24 Over Things That Burn ................................. 2-34
Pressure Light ............................................. 3-41 Parking Brake ................................................ 2-32
Older Children, Restraints ................................ 1-32 Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ..................... 3-32
Online Owner Center ........................................ 7-5 Passenger Sensing System .............................. 1-66
OnStar, Privacy .............................................. 7-19 Passing ......................................................... 4-12
OnStar® System, see OnStar® Manual ............... 2-40 PASS-Key® III+ Electronic Immobilizer ............... 2-19
Operation, Universal Home Remote System ........ 2-44 PASS-Key® III+ Electronic Immobilizer
Outlet Adjustment ............................................ 3-27 Operation ................................................... 2-20
Outlets Perchlorate Materials Requirements,
Accessory Power ......................................... 3-18 California ..................................................... 5-4
Outside Phone
Automatic Dimming Mirror ............................. 2-39 Bluetooth® .................................................. 3-78
Heated Mirrors ............................................ 2-40
Power Mirrors ............................................. 2-39
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
9
Power Reading Lamps .............................................. 3-16
Door Locks ................................................. 2-10 Rear Door Security Locks ................................ 2-12
Electrical System ......................................... 5-98 Rearview Mirror, Automatic Dimming .................. 2-37
Lift Seat ....................................................... 1-9 Rearview Mirrors ............................................. 2-37
Outlet 115 Volt Alternating Current ................. 3-19 Reclining Seatbacks .......................................... 1-6
Retained Accessory (RAP) ............................ 2-23 Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ................. 6-12
Seat ............................................................ 1-4 Recreational Vehicle Towing ............................. 4-26
Steering Fluid ............................................. 5-36 Reimbursement Program, GM Mobility ................. 7-7
Windows .................................................... 2-16 Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System .................. 2-4
Pregnancy, Using Safety Belts .......................... 1-31 Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System,
Pressure Cap ................................................. 5-33 Operation ..................................................... 2-5
Privacy .......................................................... 7-17 Remote Vehicle Start ........................................ 2-7
Navigation System ....................................... 7-19 Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the
OnStar ....................................................... 7-19 Spare Tire .................................................. 5-79
Radio Frequency Identification (RFID) ............. 7-19 Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ................... 5-77
Programmable Automatic Door Locks ................. 2-11 Replacement Bulbs ......................................... 5-50
Proposition 65 Warning, California ....................... 5-4 Replacement Parts, Maintenance ...................... 6-13
Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors ....... 7-16
Reporting Safety Defects to the Canadian
R Government ................................................ 7-16
Reporting Safety Defects to the United States
Radio Frequency Identification (RFID),
Government ................................................ 7-15
Privacy ...................................................... 7-19
Restraint System Check
Radio(s) ........................................................ 3-59
Checking the Restraint Systems .................... 1-73
Radios
Replacing Restraint System Parts
Reception ................................................... 3-91
After a Crash .......................................... 1-74
Setting the Clock ......................................... 3-57
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ...................... 2-23
Theft-Deterrent ............................................ 3-89
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
10
Ride Control Systems ....................................... 4-6 Seatback Latches ............................................. 1-8
Electronic Stability (ESC) ................................ 4-6 Seats
Roadside Assistance Program ............................ 7-7 Head Restraints ............................................ 1-2
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out .................... 4-20 Heated Seats ............................................... 1-5
Roof Manual Lumbar ............................................. 1-4
Sunroof ...................................................... 2-51 Power Lift Seat ............................................. 1-9
Running the Vehicle While Parked ..................... 2-36 Power Seats ................................................. 1-4
Reclining Seatbacks ...................................... 1-6
Seatback Latches .......................................... 1-8
S Split Folding Rear Seat ................................ 1-10
Safety Belt Reminders ..................................... 3-30 Securing a Child Restraint
Safety Belts Rear Seat Position ...................................... 1-52
Care of ...................................................... 5-93 Right Front Seat Position .............................. 1-54
Extender .................................................... 1-32 Security Light ................................................. 3-41
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ................ 1-17 Service ........................................................... 5-3
Lap-Shoulder Belt ........................................ 1-26 Accessories and Modifications ......................... 5-3
Safety Belts Are for Everyone ....................... 1-12 Adding Equipment to the Outside of the
Use During Pregnancy ................................. 1-31 Vehicle ..................................................... 5-5
Safety Defects Doing Your Own Work ................................... 5-4
Reporting to the Canadian Government .......... 7-16 Engine Soon Lamp ...................................... 3-38
Reporting to General Motors ......................... 7-16 Publications Ordering Information ................... 7-16
Reporting to the United States Government ..... 7-15 Scheduling Appointments .............................. 7-10
Safety Warnings and Symbols .............................. iii Service Parts Identification Label ....................... 5-98
Scheduled Maintenance ..................................... 6-4 Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .............. 1-71
Additional Required Services ........................... 6-6 Setting the Clock ............................................ 3-57
Scheduling Appointments ................................. 7-10 Sheet Metal Damage ....................................... 5-96
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
11
Shifting
Out of Park ................................................ 2-34 T
Shifting Into Park ............................................ 2-33 Tachometer .................................................... 3-30
Signals, Turn and Lane-Change .......................... 3-7 Taillamps
Spare Tire Turn Signal, and Stoplamps .......................... 5-48
Compact .................................................... 5-89 Telescopic Wheel .............................................. 3-6
Installing .................................................... 5-79 Text Telephone (TTY) Users ............................... 7-6
Removing ................................................... 5-77 Theft-Deterrent Feature .................................... 3-89
Storing ....................................................... 5-85 Theft-Deterrent Systems ................................... 2-18
Specifications and Capacities .......................... 5-108 Content Theft-Deterrent ................................ 2-18
Speedometer .................................................. 3-30 PASS-Key® III+ Electronic Immobilizer ............ 2-19
Split Folding Rear Seat .................................... 1-10 PASS-Key® III+ Electronic Immobilizer
Start Vehicle, Remote ....................................... 2-7 Operation ................................................ 2-20
Starting the Engine ......................................... 2-24 Tilt Wheel ........................................................ 3-6
Steering ........................................................ 4-10 Time, Setting .................................................. 3-57
Steering Wheel Controls, Audio ......................... 3-89 Tire
Steering Wheel, Tilt and Telescopic ..................... 3-6 Pressure Light ............................................. 3-37
Storage Areas Tires ............................................................. 5-51
Center Console ........................................... 2-50 Aluminum Wheels, Cleaning .......................... 5-95
Convenience Net ......................................... 2-51 Buying New Tires ........................................ 5-68
Cupholders ................................................. 2-50 Chains ....................................................... 5-74
Driver Storage Compartment ......................... 2-51 Changing a Flat Tire .................................... 5-76
Front Storage Area ...................................... 2-50 Cleaning .................................................... 5-96
Glove Box .................................................. 2-50 Compact Spare ........................................... 5-89
Instrument Panel ......................................... 2-50 Different Size .............................................. 5-70
Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow ..................... 4-19 High-Speed Operation .................................. 5-60
Sun Visors ..................................................... 2-17 If a Tire Goes Flat ....................................... 5-75
Sunroof ......................................................... 2-51 Inflation - Tire Pressure ................................ 5-59
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
12
Tires (cont.) Trunk ............................................................ 2-12
Inspection and Rotation ................................ 5-66 Turn and Lane-Change Signals .......................... 3-7
Installing the Spare Tire ................................ 5-79 Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever ........................... 3-7
Pressure Monitor Operation ........................... 5-62
Pressure Monitor System .............................. 5-61
Removing the Flat Tire ................................. 5-79 U
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ............... 5-77 Uniform Tire Quality Grading ............................ 5-70
Sidewall Labeling ......................................... 5-53 Universal Home Remote System ....................... 2-43
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools ............ 5-85 Operation ................................................... 2-44
Terminology and Definitions ........................... 5-56
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ......................... 5-70
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ................. 5-72
Wheel Replacement ..................................... 5-72
V
Vehicle
When It Is Time for New Tires ...................... 5-67 Control ........................................................ 4-4
Winter ........................................................ 5-52 Loading ...................................................... 4-20
Towing Running While Parked .................................. 2-36
Recreational Vehicle ..................................... 4-26 Symbols ......................................................... iii
Towing a Trailer .......................................... 4-29 Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy .................. 7-17
Your Vehicle ............................................... 4-26 Vehicle Data Recording, Radio
Traction Frequency (RFID) ........................................ 7-19
Control System (TCS) .................................... 4-8 Vehicle Identification
Traction Control System ................................... 3-35 Number (VIN) ............................................. 5-97
Transmission Service Parts Identification Label ................... 5-98
Fluid, Automatic ........................................... 5-28 Vehicle Personalization
Transmission Operation, Automatic ............ 2-26, 2-28 DIC ........................................................... 3-50
Transportation, Courtesy .................................. 7-10 Vehicle, Remote Start ....................................... 2-7
Trip Odometer ................................................ 3-30 Ventilation Adjustment ...................................... 3-27
Visors ........................................................... 2-17
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
13
W Windshield
Washer ........................................................ 3-9
Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators ............... 3-28 Washer Fluid .............................................. 5-38
Warnings Wiper Blade Replacement ............................. 5-50
DIC Warnings and Messages ........................ 3-46 Wiper Blades, Cleaning ................................ 5-95
Hazard Warning Flashers ............................... 3-6 Wiper Fuses ............................................... 5-98
Safety and Symbols ......................................... iii Wipers ......................................................... 3-8
Wheels Winter Driving ................................................ 4-17
Alignment and Tire Balance .......................... 5-72 Winter Tires ................................................... 5-52
Different Size .............................................. 5-70
Replacement ............................................... 5-72
When It Is Time for New Tires .......................... 5-67
Where to Put the Child Restraint ....................... 1-42
X
XM Radio Messages ....................................... 3-77
Windows ....................................................... 2-15 XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ................ 3-92
Power ........................................................ 2-16
Y
Your Vehicle and the Environment ....................... 6-2
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
14

2009 Malibu

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

2009 Malibu

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

2009 Malibu

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

2009 Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual M

*: This symbol is shown when you need to see a

Adjust the head restraint so that the top of the restraint is

If the vehicle has a manual seat, it can be moved

Move the handle up or down repeatedly to decrease or

Press the top of the switch to turn the feature on.

Do not have a seatback reclined if the vehicle is

If your vehicle is a coupe or retractable hardtop model,

Lift the seatback up to return it to the upright position.

To adjust a power lift seat, press the top or bottom of

Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it is just a seat on

Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle after a crash if

Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why should I have to

Sit up straight and always keep your feet on the floor in

A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It will not give as

A: The lap belt is too loose. It will not give nearly as

A: The belt is buckled in the wrong buckle.

A: The belt is over an armrest.

A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It should

A: The belt is behind the body.

A: The belt is twisted across the body.

After the adjuster is set to the desired position, try to

2. Place the guide over the belt and insert the

1. Pull the elastic cord out from between the edge of

3. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies flat.

4. Buckle, position, and release the safety belt as

Older children who have outgrown booster seats should

Airbags plus lap-shoulder belts offer protection

A booster seat (C-D) is a child restraint designed to

To help reduce the chance of injury, the child restraint { CAUTION:

To assist you in locating

Securing a Child Restraint in the

The driver’s frontal airbag is in the middle of the

The vehicle has a feature that may automatically unlock

If a person of adult-size is sitting in the right front

K (Unlock): Press once to unlock the driver door.

Programming the Power Windows

In an emergency, the anti-pinch feature can be

Disarming the System

9 (LOCK/OFF): This position locks the ignition. It also

P (Park): This position locks the front wheels. It is the

{ CAUTION: • The vehicle’s exhaust system has been

Cleaning the Mirror

Press O to turn the compass display on or off.

If you have these controls,

Use the selector switch located below the four-way

• GM Goodwrench On Demand Diagnostics OnStar Turn-by-Turn Navigation

2. Locate in the garage, the garage door opener

Example of Eight Dip Switches with Three Positions

The panel of switches might not appear exactly as

Press | again to turn the flashers off.

The lever is located on the left side of the steering

Move the lever all the way up or down to signal a turn.

& (Intermittent; Speed Sensitive Wipers): For

1 (High Speed): For wiping at a high speed. { CAUTION:

The band on the lever on the outboard side of the

An indicator light on the outlet turns on to show it is in

United States Base version shown, Canada Similar